Home

YOKOGAWA DR232 and DR242 Instruction

Contents

1. Main menu SET ___ Lower menu 4 F MATCH TIME ENTER MATCH TIME No 1 ENTER 123 i 1 TIME 01 00 00 ENTER OV gt Set Day amp Time DD HH MM 00 4 GET OK ESC gt MOVE AVE gt 001 01 AVE 0 gt Select Channel No 4 001 01 MOVE AVE 0 D gt Select Channel No i O C 001 01 MOVE AVE 0 ENTER gt 2 64 Move Average Number O OFF i GET OK ESC INTERPOL ENTER 001 01 INTERPOL OFF D gt ONW001 Select Channel No i 001 01 INTERPOL OFF D gt 001 cC as Channel No 001 01 INTERPOL OFF ENTER OFF ON GET OK ESC gt GROUP ENTER GROUP No G01 ENTER G01 902 03 G04 G05 G06 G07 4 01 001 010 020________ ENTER T MERCEDE ES EORR 0123456789 4 GET OK ESC 6 1 6 IM DR232 01E 6 8 Setting Match Time Moving Average Interpolation and Groups Explanation Setting the Match Time MATCH TIME No selection of the match time number Three kinds of match times can be set TIME Any time between 00 days 00 hrs 00 min and 31 days 23 hrs 59 min can be set in 1 minute units The default setting is 01 days 00 hrs 00 min If 00 is set to day DD
2. DISP MODE C RECORD ESC FUNC PRINT O FEED INS DEL RANGE ALARM M FUNC 1 CHART SET ENTER MFuNc2 RELAY STATUS Display for Sub display 1 1 Select the sub display 1 using the DISP key 2 Select RLY using the MODE key Sub display 1 1501 RLY 3 Select the range to be displayed in blocks of 10 channels Sub display 1 1911 4 RLY RELAY STATUS Display for Sub display 2 1 Select the sub display 2 using the DISP key 2 Select RLY using the MODE key Sub display 1 and 2 1501 WRLY 1501 3 Select the range to be displayed in blocks of 10 channels Sub display 1 and 2 1501 wRLY 1041 Relay Status Display The status of relays can be displayed on sub display 1 and 2 On each display the status of maximum 30 relays can be monitored The display shows for relays which are currently not operated by internal switch alarm output relay and shows for relays which are currently operated by internal switch alarm output relay IM DR232 01E 4 11 ejdsig epo 101u0Jy Dunes 4 7 Using the RELAY STATUS Display Relation between the Relay Status and Internal Switch If the relay status of the internal switches is being displayed an 5 will be displayed as the first character The next two characters show the numbe
3. 77 57 Hd 0 AT 0 Pulse Input Module 68 48 eel fT 5 ep 57 Unless otherwise specified the dimensional tolerance is 3 though 0 3 for fractions smaller than 10 mm Digital Input Module 88 68 1 137 14 38 IM DR232 01E 14 12 Dimensional Drawings DI DO module Alarm module unit mm 137 GP IB module 54 i 1 N e 1 1 RS 232 C module I 137 If not specified the tolerance is 3 However in cases of less than 10mm the tolerance is 0 3mm IM DR232 01E 14 39 suoneoiieds 14 12 Dimensional Drawings RS 422 A RS 485 module unit mm 57 Ethernet module I 137 4 jf 57 14 40 IM DR232 01E 14 12 Dimensional Drawings Extension module Extension Base EXTENDER VF AUF
4. 001 WILD E e y Channel 30 Channel 21 Channel 20 Channel 12 Channel 11 Channel 10 Alarm status of channel 3 Alarm status of channel 2 Alarm status of channel 1 Channel No fixed to 1 in units of 1 Slot No Unit No will be displayed in the case of optional computation channels D oi eer es Channel 30 Alarm status of channel 22 Alarm status of channel 21 021 IM DR232 01E 4 7 Using the RELAY STATUS Display Relevant Keys Operating Procedure Explanation
5. Wiring Distance The last extension base in the connection can be located at a maximum distance of 30 m from the sub unit Setting of Terminator On Off Switch Set the terminator on off switch of an extension base to ON for the base that is the last in the connection Set these switches of all other extension modules to OFF Setting of Slot Numbers Select an unused slot number for each extension base This can include however a slot number for an extension module The following figure shows how the numbers you set correspond to the positions of slots and relate to channel numbers S e 8 1 423 423 Setpoints of slot number eia ee 21 setup switch on 61 951 6219 629 219 extension base Setpoint 6 Setpoint 5 4 Setpoint3 Setpoint2 Setpoint 1 Channel numbers where X51 X60 41 50 X31 X40 X21 X30 11 20 X01 X10 X is the unit number 3 28 IM DR232 01E 3 9 Connecting the Power Cord and Turning the Power ON OFF When Using the Accessory Power Cord DR232 DS400 DS600 when using the accessory power cord Follow the warnings b
6. O O Submenu items d REPORT ENTER MODE SET ENTER SET CH SET PRINT 4 HOURLY REPORT OFF ENTER OFF ON 4 c y 2 DAILY REPORT ON1 ENTER OFF ON1 ON2 MONTHLY 1 ENTER OFF ON1 ON2 START TIME 01 00 00 ENTER aN REPORT SET contiguration complete MODE CH SET ENTER SET CH SET PRINT i REPORT CH R01 ENTER R01 R02 R03 R04 R05 ROG R07 ROY R10T 4 RO1 ON 001 D OFF ON 4 RO1 ON 001 ENTER i CALC MODE AVE ENTER INST AVE SUM 4 REPORT CH SET contiguration complete END ENTER SETUP ABORT Completes the configuration of the SETUP menu IM DR232 01E 10 27 dN 145 sbumes oiseg 10 12 Working with the Report Function Sending the Sum to a Report Output Main menu item SETUP bl mw x xm OQ Submenu items REPORT ENTER MODE SET ENTER SET CH SET PRINT 4 HOURLY REPORT OFF ENTER OFF ON 4 c 2 DAILY REPORT ON1 ENTER OFF ON1 ON2 4 MONTHLY REPORT ON1 ENTER OFF ON1 ON2 4 START TIME 01 00 00 ENTER 4 al REPORT SET configuration complete ES C MODE CH SET ENTER SET CH SET PRINT 4 REPORT CH R01 ENTER R0
7. Main menu SET T MEMORY ENTER MEMORY READ ENTER CH SET WRITE READ SAVE LOAD COPY DELETE INFO INIT 4 READ MODE DIRECT ENTER DIRECT TRIGER STOP INFO 4 READ FILE AAA ENTER AAA BBB CCC DDD 4 READ START DATA 1 ENTER gt Start Limit 1 200000 4 READ START End of setting ESC Reading measured computed data from the RAM disk using the event action function Main menu SET 1 MEMORY ENTER MEMORY READ ENTER CH SET WRITE READ SAVE LOAD COPY DELETE INFO INIT 4 READ MODE TRIGER ENTER DIRECT TRIGER STOP INFO 4 READ FILE AAA ENTER AAA BBB CCC DDD 4 READ START DATA 1 ENTER gt Start limit 1 200000 4 READ START End of setting ESC IM DR232 01E ejeg dn jeg pue pejnduio5 poinseayy 11 2 Reading Measured and Computed Data Stopping reading SET Main menu PS MEMORY ENTER ENTER CH SET WRITE READ SAVE LOAD COPY DELETE INFO INIT READ MODE STOP ENTER DIRECT TRIGER STOP INFO 4 READ STOP YES ENTER YES NO READ STOP End of setting ESC Displayi
8. Main menu SET aa CA MEMORY ENTER MEMORY DELETE ENTER CH SET WRITE READ SAVE LOAD COPY DELETE INFO INIT 4 DELETE TYPE DATA ENTER DATA PANEL 4 OQ DELETE FILE AAA ENTER AAA BBB CCC 4 DELETE OK End of setting ESC FLOPPY ENTER FLOPPY DELETE ENTER SAVE LOAD DELETE INFO FORMAT 4 DELETE FILE AAA ENTER AAA BBB CCC 4 DELETE OK End of setting ESC Deleting a data file for the SETUP mode A data file for the SETUP mode can be deleted in the same way as a data file for the SET mode is deleted Select FLOPPY from the SETUP menu Main menu SETUP ara CA FLOPPY ENTER FLOPPY DELETE ENTER SAVE LOAD DELETE INFO FORMAT 4 DELETE FILE AAA ENTER AAA BBB CCC 4 DELETE OK End of setting ESC Note The communication function is disabled during deletion 11 20 IM DR232 01E 11 8 Displaying RAM Disk and Floppy Disk Information Relevant Keys Displaying information in the SET mode Operating Procedure OS recess RECORD ESC SET MEMORY GO C INS DEL Select Setting Parameter SYSTEM UNIT MATH CONST MEMORY FLOPPY TR kevLoc Hannes cuart set enter Press the SET key to enter the SET menu Select set using the O keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE
9. e co g 3 12 5 95 4 E p L ______o Laal 43 7 unit mm If not specified the tolerance is 3 However in cases of less than 10mm the tolerance is 0 3mm IM DR232 01E 14 41 Main Menu Pressing the relevant key a menu the main menu appears in the main display With the instrument equipped with a floppy disk drive pressing the relevant key will cause a menu the main menu to appear in the main display When the alarm output and communications modules are installed and system recognized the main menu indicating that alarm display hold and the relay hold functions are turned on is displayed e RANGE menu 001 01 VOLT 2V 5 selecting the type of input setting the recording span setting linear scaling pages 5 1 and 5 4 e CHART menu sET 1 CHART Setting the chart speed page 6 4 O CLOCK Setting the date and time page 3 32 PRINT menu MAN PR START Starting manual printing page 7 2 c RA LIST STARTO Printing list page 7 2 c lt HEADER START Printing header page 7 2 ALARM menu 001 01 1 OFFo setting alarms and relays including internal switches page 8 1 e SET menu SET 1 SYSTEMS Setting the recording mode page 6 1 O Q UNIT Setting the engineering unit page 6 1 c CA TREND setting the recording channel p
10. Sub display 1 001 3 Select the range to be displayed in blocks of 10 channels Sub display 1 011 Q ALM ALARM STATUS Display for Sub display 2 1 Select the sub display 2 using the DISP key 2 Select ALM using the MODE key Sub display 1 and 2 001 WALM 001 3 Select the range to be displayed in blocks of 10 channels Sub display 1 and 2 001 WALM 011 Alarm Status Display The status of alarms can be displayed on sub display 1 and 2 On each sub display the alarms of maximum 30 channels can be monitored which also depends on the number of input channels The display shows LI for channels where no alarm has occurred and shows for channels where an alarm has occurred The relation between the alarm status display and channel number is as shown below
11. a ocOoOcOkEXZtcXOOODOEX EXCXOOODO P Pel Pel ed Pe a6 P Pa Pol Pak Pn Dt Pe e Pel tol Sed dk bot Dot dt 2222200 0n106000Q00rFrFFi F 1nojuud peysa jo m d Bures s z peeds eyg s z 1nojuud 21 2 jenueui jo eun ejep Bures IM DR232 01E 2 6 2 3 Recording Functions Recording Format You can modify the recording format of measurement values according to your own preferences The following selections are available Items common for Analog Trend and Logging mode Printing Channel No or Tag When printing measurement values the corresponding channel number or a preset tag can be recorded with it This selection will also affect the display the same way The number of characters of a tag which will be printed out can be selected too Items for Analog Trend Mode Printing Starting Stopping Time of Recording You can select whether to print the time of starting stopping the recording refer to page 2 9 on the right side of the chart The first time recording starts after the power has been turned ON only the starting time will be printed After that the current starting time will be printed together with the stopping time of the previous recording To the right of the starting time a bar will be printed as
12. gt Select Setting Parameter CHART SYSTEM UNIT MATH CONST MEMORY FLOPPY TR set enter Operating Procedure Press the SET key to enter the SET menu Select set using the CS 2 keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Main menu SET an ENTER ENTER CH SET WRITE READ SAVE LOAD COPY DELETE INFO INIT 4 INIT YES ENTER NO YES 4 INIT OK End of initialization ESC Explanation The internal RAM disk is initialized All the data in the RAM disk will be deleted Thus copy necessary data to a floppy disk before carrying out initialization Note The communication function is disabled during initialization IM DR232 01E 11 23 ejeg dn jeg pue pejnduio5 pounseayy 11 10 Formatting a Floppy Disk Relevant Keys Formatting a floppy disk in the SET mode recess 5 SET FLOPPY hm Func gt reco 5 DEL Select Setting Parameter GUT SYSTEM UNIT MATH CONST MEMORY FLOPPY TR Keno CO
13. Operating Procedure MSS RECORD ESO SET MESSAGE mee sce GO C INS DEL gt Select Setting Parameter CHART 5 PR LIST FMT MESSAGE HEADER TITLET QD urne ser 2 1 Press the SET key for three seconds to enter the SET3 menu 2 Select set using the GS keys 3 To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept 4 New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Main menu SET 1 mJ Lower menu MESSAGE ENTERJ MESSAGE 01 gt 001 968 amp 0123456789 ABC KLT MESSAGE No 02 4 OXO MSG02 O C 198 0123456789 ABC KLT MESSAGE No COPY 4 COPY MSG01 TO MSG01 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 111213 1415 16 17 18 19 20 4 COPY MSG01 TO MSG02 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 To the next page 11 12 18 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER SET OK ENTER 6 14 IM DR232 01E 6 7 Entering Messages Headers and Title From the previous page HEADER ENTER CK TITLE ENTER
14. LI ACT LEVL SPEED CHG TREND G01 ACT LEVL GR TREND G01 G01 G02 G03 G04 G05 G06 G07 ACT LEVL FLAG F01 ACT LEVL FLAG F01 F01 F02 F03 F04 F05 06 F07 F08 F09 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 4 ACT LEVL REPORT To the next page ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER To the previous page From the following page IM DR232 01E 9 5 suonoung pue uopuny uonoy uan 9 1 Setting Event Action Functions PD Selection of event TIMER actions The MATH menu is displayed only with the DR232 1 DR242 1 and models with the M1 option The MEMRY and FLOPPY menus are displayed only with the DR232 1 DR242 1 The REPORT menu is displayed only with models with M3 option From the previous page EVT TIMER 1 4 EVT TIMER 1 123456 1 ALARM ACT EDGE ALARM ACK ao I ACT EDGE ALARM RST ao I ACT EDGE TIMER RST ao ACT EDGE RECORD OFF 4 ACT EDGE RECORD OFF OFF ON a PR ale I ACT EDGE DIGITAL PR ao p AGF EDGE MM PR 01 ACT EDGE MSG PR 01 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 111213 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 ACI EDGE DISP 01 AC
15. If not specified the tolerance is 3 However in cases of less than 10mm the tolerance is 0 3mm IM DR232 01E 14 35 14 12 Dimensional Drawings 10ch universal input module 10chDCV TC DI input module unit mm ome Oj t 57 20ch universal input module 20chDCV TC DI input module 137 i e r y e 114 3 30ch universal input module 30chDCV TC DI input module 137 171 6 If not specified the tolerance is 3 However in cases of less than 10mm the tolerance is 0 3mm 14 36 IM DR232 01E 14 12 Dimensional Drawings mA input Module unit mm 88 68 7 Power Monitor Module o o o Unless otherwise specified the dimensional tolerance is 3 though 0 3 for fractions smaller than 10 mm Strain Input Module with built in bridge resistors 88 137 IM DR232 01E 14 37 14 12 Dimensional Drawings Strain Input Module with NDI terminals unit mm
16. 5 3 1 Operation panel CASE See chapters 3 to 12 Handle to open close the front door Front door ea EE Power switch See page 3 22 Floppy disk drive Only for DR232 1 E Rear Vacant slot with cover for communication interface alarm or DI DO modules Failure output terminals Chart end output terminals Power fuse ASee page 13 2 r AC outlet Au xiliary for DS400 DS600 Heat sink fins lo 9 a x ale A See page 3 29 75557 Ases page Function grounding terminal e o o 1 4 IM DR232 01E 1 3 Names of Parts DR242 Main Unit panel mount hybrid recorder Front Main display See chapter 4 Sub display 1 See chapter 4 Sub display 2 See chapter 4 Status indicator Operation panel Located behind the front door See chapters 3 to 12 Handle to open close the front door Front door ea redd Power switch Floppy disk drive Only for DR242 1 Locat
17. gt Select Setting Parameter CHART iD INTG FILTER RELAY BURN OUT RJC COLOR eas MEME cuart ser Operating Procedure Enter the SET UP menu in the following procedure 1 When the display presents the operation display mode or a menu other than the SET UP menu first turn off the power switch 2 Turn the switch back on while pressing the DISP key and continue pressing the DISP key for about 5 seconds Select set using the GS keys If exiting the following lower menu setting halfway press the MODE ESC key The display returns to the main menu to which the lower menu belongs However newly set or selected contents are canceled When setting proceeds to the display for the setting end the newly set or selected contents are established Main menu SETUP cc Lower menu COLOR ENTER 001 01 COLOR PURPLE D gt Select Channel No 001 01 COLOR PURPLE D gt Select Channel No 4 001 01 COLOR PURPLE ENTER PURPLE RED GREEN BLUE BROWN BLACK NAVY YEL_GR RED_PR ORANGE 4 COLOR ESC Explanation Setting Recording Color Set the recording colors for each channel This setting can also be made for optional computation channels Select a color from the following ten colors PURPLE RED GREEN BLUE BROWN BLACK NAVY navy blue
18. giu DER A TIME TINO CESAR 2 8 6 3 FY NET TOSSED aee aret Vae caverta dant 2 8 9 14 9 15 Title title printouts 2 6 2 7 2 12 6 15 Trig PEE 11 4 11 9 Trigger recording eee ren e eiii Beide See also Alarm trend recording upon occurence 2 9 Troubleshooting teet rb ttr etin eite 13 3 U Unit NOs hp eee 4 2 4 3 4 10 4 12 Universal input module eese 3 1 2 Upper limit alarm See Alarm IV Value Scale scaled eee o une 2 6 2 9 6 13 printout Reference point for sssseseeeeeeeenne me See also scale check mark 2 6 2 7 Vertical printing See Recording direction Voltage level Warm M 3 38 WARNING for safety precautions sese g WATT ote es rT T E AE 3 19 Index 6 IM DR232 01E INDEX IX Y 2 Zero POSTION 10 2 calibrated values Ofa 13 11 L eft posiiODOf ee ee eere AREE 2 9 6 7 Right position of reete p get 2 9 6 7 Xepu IM DR232 01E Index 7
19. M AN 79 2 E b NJ 5 M 1 M AN 2 on o on og o n o on o O lt The 20 ch Universal input modules DU100 21 DU 100 22 and the 30 ch Universal input modules DU100 31 DU100 31 are similar to the ones shown above IM DR232 01E 1 3 Names of Parts 10 ch DCV TC DI input module DU200 11 DU200 12 DU200 11 DU200 12 1D es O od Clamp terminal Screw terminal feed fed feza fea WW ii p ed c 8252 84 HSS O ccdg cc 0g ooog ooog ooog Cover The 20 ch DCV TC DI input modules DU200 21 DU200 22 and the 30 ch DCV TC DI input modules DU200 31 DU200 31 are similar to the ones shown above mA input module DU300 11 DU300 12 Clamp terminal Screw terminal ed e 812 84 HSS ooog 0008 0008 0008 0008 O Wire clip 9 7 Clamp terminal DR232 01E 1 7
20. From the previous page To the previous page EVT MFUNC KEY 1 C 4 EVT MFUNC KEY 1 ENTER 12 4 D ACTzEDGE ALARM ACK ENTER ao tacts EDGE ALARM RST ACT EDGE TIMER RST ACT EDGE RECORD OFF gt 4 ACT EDGE RECORD OFF OFF d I ACT EDGE DIGITAL PR ENTER AD 01 ad Lo ACT EDGE MSG PR 01 ENTER 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 111213 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 ACT EDGE DISP 01 D ACT EDGE MSG DISP 01 ENTER 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 111213 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 ACT EDGE MATH START D 4 ACT EDGE MATH START ENTER START STOP CLEAR RESET I ACT EDGE FLAG F01 C 4 ACT EDGE FLAG F01 ENTER F01 F02 F03 F04 F05 F06 F07 F08 F09 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 SDA TA_WR D his ACT EDGE MEMRY DATA WR ENTER DATA WR WR TRIG RD TRIG LD_TRG1 LD TRG2 LD_TRG3 ACT EDGE FLOPY LD TRG1 D 4 ACT EDGE FLOPY LD_TRG1 ENTER LD_TRG1 LD_TRG2 LD_TRG3 ACT EDGEMEEENM START C ACT EDGE REPORT START ENTER gt START STOP ACT LEVL RECORD D 4 ACT LEVL RECORD To the next page From the following page IM DR232 01E 9 7 suonoung pue 4 9 1
21. ca et ESC MSG PRINT GO Select Function item Se ser 2 Operating Procedure Press the FUNC key to enter the FUNC menu To display the print menu from the RANGE ALARM or CHART SET SET3 menu press the DISP key Select set using the O keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept Main menu Lower menu MSG PRINT ENTER PRINT MESSAGE No 01 ENTER Explanation Starting message printing MSG PRINT Select a message number from 01 to 20 For details on how to set the message see Section 6 7 Entering Messages Headers and Titles on page 6 15 While the instrument is recording if the ENTER key is pressed messages are printed If an alarm occurs messages are also printed See Section 6 5 Setting the Alarm Printout on page 6 11 Message printout buffer Analog trend Up to 10 message printouts can be stored in memory Information exceeding 10 message printouts will be discarded After one message printout 9 are stored and another printout message can then be stored f 11 message printouts exceeding the allowed number of 10 are entered an asterisk will be printed at the top of the message when 10 message printouts are executed The m
22. gt 0 or The default settings 0 00 for left span and 100 00 for the right span For details on setting the engineering units for linear scaling refer to page 6 2 IM DR232 01E 1eeur uedg 1 Indul ayy funes 5 3 Configuring the Input Range and Recording Span or the Linear Scaling of a Power Monitoring Channel Relevant Keys Copo DSN eem ESC 001 01 AC 1Ph3W Ga RNG 250 5A V1 002 VA1 CD SPAN 1250 1250W KEYLOCI ser EnreR w ruwc 2 ie CUT Bere Press the RANGE key to enter the RANGE menu Using and select and or enter a value for each of the shaded fields shown below To exit any of the following menu items during the procedure press the MODE ESC Key This returns to the first item of the menu Note however that your new settings and selections are canceled Reaching the step showing the message SET OK confirms the latest settings selections Setting the Measuring Range and Recording Span Main menu item 001 01 AC 1Ph3W 4 001 01 AC 1Ph3W D Vj 001 01 AC 1Ph3W SKIP AC SCALE D
23. set 2 12 4 DR232 01E 12 2 Setting a Computation Equation Explanation A computation equation can be set for up to 60 channels A01 to A60 Setting the mode If A01 60 MODE ON is specified as in the example given on the previous page the same equation can be set for channels A01 to A60 To set an equation for one channel only specify for instance 01 01 MODE ON Computation equation In addition to operators described on page 12 1 the following symbols can be used in equations Used for setting Used if equations contain constants 01 to K60 M Used to specify the measurement channel No for which the data saved on the RAM disk is to be re generated Applicable for the DR232 1 DR242 1 equipped with a floppy disk drive A Used to specify the computation channel No for which the data saved on the RAM disk is to be re generated Applicable for the DR232 1 DR242 1 equipped with a floppy disk drive C Used to specify communication input data digital data G Used to specify the group No for which CLOG computation of data of a group measured on the same time is to be used Restrictions in equations Computation channel No The specified computation equation for a computation channel No can contain only computation channel Nos as variable which are equal to or smaller than said computation channel No
24. 11 1 Saving Measured and Computed Data Stopping saving Main menu SET 1 S O m gt MEMORY ENTER gt MEMORY WRITE ENTER CH_SET WRITE READ SAVE LOAD COPY DELETE INFO INIT 4 WRITE MODE STOP ENTER DIRECT TRIGER REPEAT STOP 4 WRITE STOP YES ENTER NO YES 4 WRITE STOP End of setting ESC Main menu SET L 1 Lower menu LOGIC ENTER LOGIC BOX NO 01 ENTER CK EVENT ALARM ENTER O C ACT EDGE ALARM ACK C O WR D CSKA ACT EDGE MEMRY AURETRIG ENTER SET OK ESC Measured computed data is saved to the internal RAM disk The memory size of the RAM disk is 512 KB Saving method WRITE MODE The following three methods are available DIRECT Measured computed data is saved immediately after setting has been completed Saving is complete when data of the specified length has been saved TRIGGER The event action function is used to save only one file of measured computed data when an event takes place This function is useful when you want to save measured computed data in case of an alarm REPEAT Same as TRIGGER except that measured computed data is saved each time an event takes place until the RAM disk is full or saving is stopped by the operator Events which occur during saving will be ineffective 11 4 IM
25. 4 4 IM DR232 01E 4 2 Using the MANUAL Display Explanation MANUAL Display for the Main Display Channel No Difference between Channels delta and Alarms Same as for the AUTO display refer to page 4 2 Measurement Values Same as for the AUTO display refer to page 4 2 except for the following When the input type of the channel is set to SKIP then SKIP will be displayed When the channel other than the channel of the input module is selected appears Engineering Units Same as for the AUTO display refer to page 4 2 except for the following When the input type of the channel is set to SKIP then no engineering unit will be displayed MANUAL Display for the Sub display 1 and 2 Data of two channels are displayed here simultaneously on each display Channel No Difference between Channels delta Alarms and Selected Display Mode Same as for the AUTO display refer to page 4 3 Measurement Values Same as for the AUTO display refer to page 4 3 except for the following When the input type of the channel is set to SKIP then SKIP will be displayed When the channel other than the channel of the input module is selected appears Engineering Units Same as for the AUTO display refer to page 4 3 except for the following When the input type of the channel is set to SKIP then no engineering unit will be displayed IM DR232 01E
26. gt 00000 cce 0209030307 cocococo coms DC Current Generator Short circuit between and terminal in channel 2 zug Input terminal CH2 Strain measurement Perform calibrations using 4 gauge method Use a 319300 bridge box for the Du500 14 s bridge box Wire the strain gauge or the bridge box to the channel 2 DU500 12 DU500 13 Jumper setting switch No 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 No 5 OFF ON DU500 14 R1 No 1 2 No 3 No 4 OFF OFF oFF OFF ON To R1 to R4 connect resistors with the specifications described below Calibration Resistors R1 R2 amp R3 Resistor R4 Accuracy ZERO 120 000 120 000 0 005 0 3ppm C 2k SPAN 120 000 119 521 0 005 0 3ppm C 20k SPAN 120 000 115 294 0 005 0 3ppm C 200k SPAN 120 000 80 000 0 005 0 3ppm C 13 8 IM DR232 01E 13 5 Calibration Operating Procedure Entering the calibration mode 1 While pressing and holding the MODE key turn on the power Selecting the subunit and module numbers 2 With OQ select the subunit number S MODULE No 0 gt 012345 3 With GS move the cursor 4
27. Goatees 11 10 to 11 11 11 12 11 14 Deleting COP YIN eret ieri ri HE ea n 11 15 to 11 19 SET key Chapter 6 9 1 9 12 9 19 Chapter 11 12 4 12 7 Set up list printing 7 4 Shunt resistor resistance 04 6 3 19 SINGLE rite eie mre Peri ena 2 8 10 6 SKIP skipping 2 3 4 2 4 3 4 5 to 4 7 4 0 5 3 Slots vcre ees 1 2 1 3 4 2 4 3 4 10 4 12 10 10 10 11 NOD Lu 3 Span for T Cording iacente neas irte eret 2 0 5 3 Calibrated values of tenete tee 13 11 SPAles 4 SDIOCKEbL 5 cce nb eoa Bedsits name e ori 3 6 Stop bit Strain balance sene i n e E 5 10 Strain input 1 2 3 40 5 10 to 5 12 Style n mber iecore e e aret ERR CORRER UE an 2 Ni M 1 14 1 Sub display 1 2 1 2 1 3 2 1 4 3 Suffix codes i scientiis See Model and Suffix Codes Symbols for conventions srt eese eniin ten etie ho ehe 8 for Safety pee See also WARNING 7 System module recognition 9 17 T Tag printout 2 12 6 9 10 4 Sole COO as eb ode br deti D t en 2 7 6 0 7 1 10 4 Number of character of 2 7 7 1 10 4 Temporary stop Terminal cover Thermocouple TIME Mid
28. rtt ens 2 1 10 23 for recording 2 8 6 3 6 5 10 6 14 6 for scan measurement sse 2 4 2 8 10 2 for rate of change alarms 22 2 2 13 10 8 INTV E 11 5 J K Key lock keylock function sse 2 17 9 15 sSettitig Of A A E AES 10 15 10 16 KEY LOCK KEYLOCK See Key lock function L Lincar salino eroe E Ee 2 16 5 5 List printout printing 2 11 6 13 7 2 Logging LOGGING iret dece See Mode EOGIC EE OEE OE EE O RIO ER 11 5 Logic LOGIC eee e meinen 9 9 Low limit alarm lower limit alarm 2 See Alarm M MA input module RSS ECC REOR ee 1 2 3 23 MANUAL See Display Manual printout printing eene 2 12 7 2 9 10 Mar aT eon ER ER ERE Y endum e e tete Match Time function Settifig OF PER RENE aa enema Measured data SAVING teu dep RE ER 11 1 to 11 5 Reading RESI VEA dix 11 7 to 11 9 Deleting e eer eR REA e ERIS 11 15 to 11 19 Measurement input functions eseeeeeeerr 2 3 2 4 Measurement interval 20 See interval Measurement range eee e a 14 2 MEMO re ERR UAE A RUE ERN RE 3 Message printout printing sees 2 12 6 15 7 3 9 10 T kGy i e eere HER exe e RR eR AS 9 9 M FUNC 2 key oeieo ro RUIN EATER Ne 9 9 Mode A
29. J N L U 0 5 Maximum allowable input voltage 2V DC or lower range RTD DI CONT 10V DC 6V DC or greater range DI LEVEL 60V DC Normal mode voltage voltage TC 1 2 times the rated range or less at peak value including 50 or 60Hz signal component RTD 50 mV or lower at peak value Normal mode rejection ratio 40dB or greater 50 60Hz 0 1 Common mode noise voltage 250V AC rms 50 60Hz Common mode rejection ratio 120dB or greater 50 60Hz 0 1 500Q unbalanced between the negative measurement terminal and ground Maximum noise between channels 150V AC rms 50 60Hz IM DR232 01E 14 11 14 2 Universal Input Module and DCV TC DI Input Module Measurement range accuracy and resolution As described below under the following operating conditions Ambient temperature 23 2 C ambient humidity 55 10 RH power supply voltage 90 to 250 VAC AC power supply 10 to 32 VDC the subunit of a DC power supply model only power supply frequency 50 60Hz within 1 AC power supply warm up time 30 minutes or more vibrations and others not affecting instrument operation However RTD input is not possible for the DCV TC DI input module T Measurement digital display Maximum nput ype Measurement range Measurement accuracy resolution DC Voltage 20mV 20 000 to 20 000mV 0 05 o
30. Subunit DS400 Unit No 1 Note When the following handling is done it is necessary to carry out system construction to operate the instrument correctly After executing system construction confirm the module information For details see page 9 16 Connection including addition or replacement removal of subunits or unit number setting see page 3 7 Mounting including addition or replacement removal of modules 3 8 IM DR232 01E 3 4 Installing the Chart and Ribbon Cassette Install the chart Preparing the Chart 1 To prevent double feed of the folded chart sufficiently ruffle and fan the chart on both folded side ends Note Use chart papers specified by Yokogawa part number B9627RY or B9627AY Using chart papers other than those specified may cause problems such as large recording errors or the paper getting caught under the sprocket Preparing the Chart Cassette 2 Open the front door and draw out the chart cassette from inside of the main unit by pulling forward the chart cassette pressers while simultaneously pushing them both right and left pressers toward the center Chart cassette Chart cassette presser 3 Open the chart pressure plate 1 by pulling the right and left lever of the chart pressure plate 1 Lever of chart pressure plate 1 Chart cassette 4 Open upward the chart pressure plate 2 by simultaneously pushing the right and left latch release button
31. nput noise rejection If input noise cannot be rejected by means of one point grounding or 100 ms integration insert capacitor or ferrite beads as they are effective in rejecting pulse noise Step 1 Connect a capacitor between the L input and ground lt 9 QN instrument Use a capacitor from a hundred pc UE to thousands of pF which can D T withstand high voltages and must be grounded Step 2 Rejection of pulse noise when grounding is impossible 02 9 oH Use a capacitor from a hundred instrument ff oL to thousands of pF Th Ferrite beads T 1 Insert the ferrite beads as necessary IM DR232 01E 3 43 pue uoneyyeisu 3 11 Countering Noise Relay noise suppression DC relay To prevent noise and protect the contact connect the diode to the relay coil terminal directly Dc external Contact addition to the above measure reduce power supply Diode the rated voltage of the relay circuit as connect to the relay much as possible for higher reliability z terminal socket It is necessary to choose a diode that T A directly matches the relay Generally a diode J whose rated rectifying current is at least 1 Relay three times the current flowing through the relay coil rating must the relay coil must be used be as low as possible And the rated reverse voltage must be a
32. ENTER ENTER ENTER From the following page IM DR232 01E 9 1 Setting Event Action Functions Selection of event CHART END actions The MATH menu is displayed only with the DR232 1 DR242 1 and models with the M1 option The MEMRY and FLOPPY menus are displayed only with the DR232 1 DR242 1 The REPORT menu is displayed only with M3 option From the following page EVT CHART END 4 r ACT EDGE ALARM ACK 4 ACK LI ACT EDGE ALARM RST ACT EDGE TIMER RST Wi derart 4 ACT EDGE RECORD OFF OFF ON aM _ NN m ACT EDGE DIGITAL PR avo ACT EDGE MSG PR 01 4 ACT EDGE MSG PR 01 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 111213 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 t ACT EDGE MSG DISP 01 4 ACT EDGE MSG DISP 01 C O 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 111213 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 ACT EDGE MATH START 4 ACT EDGE MATH START START STOP CLEAR RESET ACT EDGE FLAG FO1 4 ACT EDGE FLAG FO1 F01 F02 F03 F04 F05 F06 F07 F08 F09 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 I ACT EDGE MEMRY DATA WR 4 ACT EDGE MEMRY DATA WR DATA WR WR TRIG RD TRIG LD_TRG1 LD TRG2LD TRG3 ACT EDGE FLOPY LD_TRG1 4 ACT EDGE FLOPY LD_TRG1 LD_TRG1 LD_TRG2 LD_TRG3 ACT EDGE REPORT START 4 ACT EDGE REPORT START START STOP ACT LEVL RECORD
33. 10 uonisod 2 2 2 91 s z abed 10pjO peeds yeyo eumnbumnris jo eum Buipu3 21 2 21 2 yew wey X 700 rot uruw fu 2 e2uaJ9JoH i recor VEL DMM MMA NAN ite Toe Sr pee Buip40281 2 pussy 40 on 21 2 3 DENNNNNININONOHHHHHHHHHHOOODOOCOQOMO PPEETEPELL OLED EVER LEE tS Daath HH H A EH F33333L5 amp lLluL22222400000600000 F FF i iL yo a g DEMN ONDU EMN m O DD TN HNNAN N A e HH HHHOQOOODOQODOMU
34. ENTER ESC IM DR232 01E 5 4 Configuring the Measuring Range and Recording Span or the Linear Scaling of a Strain Input Channel Explanation Setting the Channel Number Set the channel number for which you want to configure the type of input recording span and so on In this procedure determine from which channel starting channel to which channel ending channel you want to include in your configuration Starting Channel Number The first three digits on the main display constitute the starting channel number The first digit is the unit number The second digit denotes the module number slot number The configurable range depends on the location where the power monitor module is connected A strain input module takes up twice the space of a standard size module This results in the number of the slot following the one where the strain input module is installed being a missing number See page 3 8 for more information Ending Channel Number The two digits that follow the starting channel number constitute the ending channel number For the configurable range see Starting Channel Number above Youcannot enter a channel number that is smaller than the starting channel number f you have entered the same number as the starting channel number only that one particular channel is included in your configuration configuration of the type of input recording span etc When you move the c
35. 2 0000 BAR 004 0 0153V 005 0 0123V Bargraph Display Sub display 1 can be turned into a bargraph display The measurement data on the main display are displayed as a bargraph on sub display 1 The bargraph shows a graph corresponding to the measurement value showing the recording span divided into 40 equal parts The left side of the bargraph shows the left span the right side of the bargraph shows the right span When you are using the linear scaling function the left and right side of the bargraph show the left scaling and right scaling value respectively Engineering units are not displayed When the main display shows SKIP ALL SKIP NO ALARM the bargraph will not appear Only the selected display mode will appear IM DR232 01E ejdsig epo 101u0Jy Dunes 4 6 Using the ALARM STATUS Display Relevant Keys Operating Procedure Explanation E Disp MODE C RECORD ESC FUNC PRINT CO FEED INS DEL RANGE ALARM CP M FUNC 1 CHART SET enter mrunc2 ALARM STATUS Display for Sub display 1 1 Select the sub display 1 using the DISP key 2 Select ALM using the MODE key
36. INT EXT EXTVALUE ENTER gt Ext Value Limit 20000 20000uV RJC SET ESC 10 12 IM DR232 01E 10 5 Setting Burn out Reference Junction Compensation Explanation Setting Burn out BURN OUT Set the dot printing position when burn out occurs for each channel OFF the burn out function is not actuated DOWN a dot is printed at the end of chart width on the minimum value setting side of the recording span UP Dot is printed at the end of chart width on the maximum value setting side of the recording span The default setting is OFF Setting Reference Junction Compensation RJC Set either the internal or the external compensation for each channel INT internal compensation is performed EXT external compensation is performed For external compensation set the voltage to be compensated Voltage to be externally compensated set in the range of 20000 to 20000 mV The default setting is INT Note In order to make the set or selected contents effective the contents must be registered For details see page 10 23 To return from the SET UP menu to the operation display mode select END in the main menu For details see page 10 23 IM DR232 01E 10 13 L3S sbumes oiseg 10 6 Setting Recording Colors Relevant Keys 0 528 7 econo 5 SETUP COLOR rum sce GO Cree INS DEL
37. Operating Procedure Press the CHART key to display the CHART menu Set and select using OQ escape while using a single menu press MODE ESC key The menu returns to the first menu to which the single menu belongs Note that newly selected or set items will be canceled When the device displays that setting is completed the newly set or selected details are fixed Main menu SET Ja Lower menu CL CK ENTER 96 01 01 03 36 23 ENTER gt Set Date amp Time YY MM DD HH MM SS HET op ESG Explanation Setting the Date and Time Set them in the order of year month day hour minutes seconds e Year Specify the lower two digits of the year Example 1996 96 2000 00 Month day Use two digits for each Hour 00 to 23 Press the ENTER key at the set time to make it effective Note The date and time settings are backed up by the lithium battery in the main unit 3 34 IM DR232 01E 3 11 Countering Noise Types and Features of Noise Sources Commercial Power Supply It is necessary to consider both 50 and 60Hz as noise components It is important to note that a power supply line in which a thyristor or inverter is incorporated functions not only as an energy surplus line but also as a supply surplus line Thyristor SCR A thyristor is used to control power through ON OFF modulation of commercial power by controlling the phase a
38. ser enter wruwc 2 Operating Procedure Press the SET key to enter the SET menu Select set using the CS keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Main menu SET 1 EEA C A FLOPPY ENTER gt FLOPPY FORMAT ENTER SAVE LOAD DELETE INFO FORMAT 4 FORMAT MODE 1 44MB ENTER a 720KB 1 44MB DARWIN ENTER FORMAT YES ENTER NO YES 4 Formatting 4 FORMAT OK Eno ESC Formatting a floppy disk in the SETUP mode A floppy disk can be formatted in the same way as in the SETUP mode Select FLOPPY from the SETUP menu Main menu SETUP 71 t d lt FLOPPY ENTER FLOPPY FORMAT SAVE LOAD DELETE INFO FORMAT 4 FORMAT MODE 1 44MB ENTER 1 2MB 720KB 1 44MB 4 VOLUME DARWIN ENTER 4 FORMAT YES ENTER NO YES 4 Formatting ESC 4 FORMAT OK Ena 11 24 IM DR232 01E 11 10 Formatting a Floppy Disk Explanation A floppy disk is formatted All the data on the floppy disk will be deleted Thus copy necessary data to another media before carrying out formatting Format mode FORMAT MODE Select the format mode from the following 2HD 1 44 MB 1 2 MB 2DD 72
39. IM DR232 01E 5 13 1eeur uedg Indul ayy Humas 5 6 Configuring the Pulse Input Channel Explanation Types of Input Pulse Input Measurement PULSE Select this option when measuring pulse input Skip SKIP No measurement is done Measurement Mode Select the mode used in pulse input measurement Use the computing function when summing the count or turn on time over a given period of time Instantaneous Count Mode RATE Select this option when determining the count for one second Instantaneous Turn on Time Mode GATE Select this option when detecting the on off states by means of variations in the instantaneous value every second Span SPAN Set the upper and lower limits of the pulse count and turn on time The maximum configurable value is 30000 Scale SCL Set the upper and lower limits of the pulse count and turn on time The maximum configurable value is 30000 Configure this menu item when converting the scale values to those of a system of units suited for your purpose The maximum configurable range is 0 30000 excluding the decimal point Scale Upper 100 Revolution rpm Scale Lower 0 0 3000 Span Lower Count sec Span Upper Filter On Off FILTER Set this menu item to ON when eliminating chatter up to 5 ms Unit UNIT Configure this menu item when assigning a unit to the measured value See Section 6 1 Setting the Recording Mode Engineering Uni
40. OFF not printed ON printed The default setting is OFF Selection of Horizontal or Vertical Printing LOG FORMAT In logging mode select either horizontal or vertical printing of the channel number TAG For examples of printing see Section 2 3 Recording Functions page 2 7 HORIZON printed horizontally VERTICAL printed vertically The default setting is HORIZON IM DR232 01E 10 5 145 sbumes oiseg 10 2 Setting Recording Format Selection of Recording Interval in Digital Printing Logging Mode LOG INTERVAL Select recording of the channel number TAG and measured values whether at one interval or at a selected interval for each channel from the 6 timers For the setting of the timer see Section 6 1 Setting the Recording Mode Engineering Unit Recording Channel and Recording Interval page 6 3 and for the selection of the timer for each channel see Section 6 4 Setting Tag Digital Printout and Manual Printout page 6 9 SINGLE Digital print The interval is determined by the chart speed and the number of columns to be printed See the table in chapter 14 page 14 3 Logging mode interval for timer No 1 MULTIPLE intervals selected for each channel from 6 kinds of timers for either Digital printing or the Logging mode The default setting is SINGLE Note n order to make the set or selected contents effective the contents must be registered For details see p
41. 3 11 Countering Noise Propagation of Noise INVERTER MOTOR 86 04 10 19 30 SRMPLE 0 05 ms 300 0 V Voltage waveform 300 0 0 00 25 00ms 2 000 R Current waveform 2 000 0 00 Voltage current waveforms of an inverter 25 00ms Relay A relay is frequently used to amplify alarm and temperature controller outputs However since a counter electromotive force counter e m f is produced by coil inductance when the relay is turned off and the e m f becomes noise care must be taken Due to chattering at the relay contact tens to hundreds of kHz noise occurs mainly in bursts Thus the noise energy often becomes high Transceiver In large scale plants transceivers are often used for communications between the field and the control room Although W G of the Japanese Electric Measuring Instruments Manufacturers Association recommends to use transceivers covering a wave band of 27MHz smaller sized transceivers for the 140 or 470MHz wave band are often used Noise Simulator To test the immunity to pulse noise mainly thyristor noise a noise simulator is often used A test noise of approximately 1kV for 0 85 is used synchronously with the power supply frequency Since data acquisition equipment is often used for measurements of equipment subjected to the pulse noise test the influence of noise must be considered Noise is propagated in the following three ways Conduction noise is conducted through a power line inp
42. E E 3 T CH10 O O Wiring Diagrams Single gauge method Z DU500 12 DU500 13 Jumper setup switch A No 1 Rg 0 No 2 TNI No 3 No 4 ecol 0 No 5 sen 0 OFF No 1 No 2 3 No 4 No 5 ON ON ON OFF OFF CH1 CH3 CH5 CH7 CH9 Model with External Bridge Resistors NDI terminal O CH1 CH4 CH5 CH8 CH9 R fixed resistor r resistance of leadwire Rg resistance of strain gauge e output voltage developed across bridge E voltage imposed across bridge DU500 14 Single gauge three wire method R z fixed resistor r z resistance of leadwire Rg resistance of strain gauge e z output voltage developed across bridge E voltage imposed across bridge 3 24 IM DR232 01E 3 7 Connecting the Signal Lines DU500 12 DU500 13 00500 14 Jumper setup switch t A No 1 No 2 Rg B L No 3 No 4 No 5 66 Oo IO S C c c D H OFF ON 1 No 2 No 3 No 4
43. Units equiped with screw type terminals should only be used in panel installations Before turning on the power always ground the protective ground terminal Do not use the function grounding terminal 4 marked terminal under the power connecting part as the protective grounding terminal For AC power and ground wiring use crimp on lugs for 4mm screws with insulation sleeves Make sure that the crimp on tool must be one specified by the crimp on lugs manufacture and that the crimp on lugs and tool must be matched to the wire size To prevent electric shock do not touch the terminals after wiring An AC outlet auxiliary for the DS400 DS600 should be used to supply power to the DS400 DS600 using a power cable DV400 051 separately available Do not use this AC outlet to supply power to the other equipments nor use other cables for the power connection Otherwise the current flowing through the AC outlet will exceed the permissible current thereby resulting in the fuse blowing overheating or burning may occur cH M M M M Connecting procedure DR242 1 Check that the power switch is turned off 2 Remove the cover protecting the power terminals 3 Connect the power supply wires and the protecting ground wire to the power terminals 4 Replace the cover Connecting procedure DS400 DS600 1 Check that the power switch is turned o
44. ejdsig epo 101u0Jy Dunes 4 3 Using the PAGE Display Relevant Keys Operating Procedure Explanation DISP MODE RECORD E 0 FUNC PRINT FEED RANGE ALARM 2 M FUNC 1 CHART SET enter mrunc2 1 Select the main display using the DISP key 2 Select PGE using the MODE key Sub display 1 002 0 1936V 003 0 0995V APGE 3 Select the required set of five channels page using the CS keys Display 007 0 0197V 008 0 0074V APGE 009 0 0162V 010 0 0102V PAGE Display for the Main Display When this display is selected the measurement values of five consecutive channels will be displayed using sub display 1 and 2 also Channel No Difference between Channels delta and Alarms Same as for the AUTO display refer to page 4 2 Measurement Values Same as for the AUTO display refer to page 4 2 except for the following When the input type of the channel is set to SKIP then SKIP will be displayed When the channel other than the channel of the input module is selected appears Engineering Units Same as for the AUTO display refer to page 4 2 except for the following When the input type of the channel is set to SKIP then no engineering unit will be displayed PAGE Display for the Sub display 1 and 2 In combination with the page display of the main
45. 5 3 Configuring the Input Range and Recording Span or the Linear Scaling of a Power Monitoring Channel Single phase two wire configuration CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 P1 VA1 V1 n PF1 PH1 Var1 PF1 FREQ V1 Select from these combinations Single phase three wire three phase three wire configurations dual voltage dual current modules for three phase use only Select from these combinations Select from either of the two groups of combinations Select from either of the CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 P1 VA1 v1 n PF1 PH1 P3 VA3 13 VA13 PF13 PH13 V1 n V3 V13 113 FREQ V1 Var1 PF1 Var3 PF3 Var13 PF13 Three phase three wire configuration triple voltage triple current modules for three phase use only CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 P1 VA1 V1 n PF1 PH1 P2 VA2 v2 12 2 2 V3 I3 PF3 PH3 P13 VA13 PF13 PH13 V1 n V2 12 V3 V13 113 FREQ V1 Var1 PF1 Var2 PF2 Var3 PF3 Var13 PF13 vo 10 v1 l1 V1 n V1 n V2 12 v2 12 V2 12 V3 I3 V3 I3 V3 Three phase four wire configuration modules for three phase use only CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 PO VAO V1 n PFO PHO P1 VA1 v2 12 PF1 PH1 P2 VA2 V3 I3 PF2
46. All Rights Reserved Copyright 1996 Yokogawa Electric Corporation IM DR232 01E Unsupported Functions As Classified by the Style Number The following functions are not available for style number S1 Computation function including remote RJC Saving and reading of measured data computated data and set up data FDD function Summer Winter time RS 422 A RS 485 cs munication module Pulse input module m Strain and AC input module Extender module and Extender base Report function Ethernet module Digital input module Flag and group reset functions for M1 option The measuring of active power and apparent power on CH3 to CH6 for power monitor module The following functions are not available for style number S2 Summer Winter time RS 422 A RS 485 communication module Pulse input nodule m Strain and AC input module Extender module and Extender base Report function Ethernet module Digital input module Flag and group reset functions for M1 option The measuring of active power and apparent power on CH3 to CH6 for power monitor module The following functions are not available for style number S3 Pulse input module m Strain and AC input module Extender module and Extender base Report function Ethernet module Digital input module Flag and group reset functions for M1 option The measuring of active power and apparent power on CH3 to
47. MATH START SET OK configuration complete LOGIC BOX No 3 01 to 30 EVT MATCH TIME 2 MATH STOP 4 SET OK configuration complete Computation equation CALC TLOG SUM 001 ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER Selects match time 1 Provides the setting for clearing computed values Selects match time 1 Provides the setting for starting computing Selects match time 2 Provides the setting for ending computing If in the event action functions you have assigned the same event to more than one LOGIC BOX number at the same time the DR recorder executes computing beginning with the smallest LOGIC BOX number In the above configuration the DR recorder clears computed values at 8 00 and starts computing The values and behaviors of the event action functions when computing is done with the above configuration are as follows 12 10 IM DR232 01E 12 4 Starting Stopping Computation Results of ti 8 00 9 00 ie the 9 00 of the next day Time 2 2 Logic box 1 Resetting of computed value Resetting of computed value Logic box 2 Start of computing Start of computing Logic box 3 End of End of computing computing Sum the values measured on channel 001 every hour Setting the TIMER
48. Communication format Half duplex Synchronizing format Start stop asynchronous transmission synchronized by start stop bit Baud rate bps 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 or 19200 selectable START bit 1 bit fixed Data length Either 7 or 8 bits selectable Parity Even Odd or None selectable STOP bit Either 1 or 2 bits selectable Connector 6 point screw type terminal uses M4 screws Minimum response time 0 10 20 50 or 100 ms selectable Reception buffer length 250 bytes Escape sequence Trigger Status call Open and Close Electrical characteristics SDA SDB RDA RDB SG Between the signal terminal and the main internal circuit is insulated functionally Communication distance 1 2 km maximum Terminator Internal resistor 120 ohm 1W switch with the slide switch 14 30 IM DR232 01E 14 10 Communication Interface Module Ethernet Style number S8 Electrical and Mechanical specifications Conforms to IEEE802 3 Frames are not supported Communication method Ethernet Transmission specifications 10BASE T CSMA CD 10Mbps Baseband Transmission speed 10 Mbps Protocols TCP IP UDP ARP ICMP Maximum number of connections 4 Input data ASCII Supporting RS 232 C commands Output data ASCII Binary External dimensions Approx 57 W x 137 H x 57 D Weight 0 3 kg IM DR232 01E 14 31 14 11 Specifications of Extension Module and Extensi
49. HH MM every day shows the set time If day DD is set to a value other than 00 HH MM of DD day every month shows the set time DD HH and MM give the set numeric values respectively The match time setting is used with the event action function Refer to 9 1 on page 9 1 for details Moving Average MOVE AVE This setting can be set for each channel individually The number of samples used for the moving average can be set from 2 to 64 The default value is 0 which means that no moving average is carried out The result of the moving average is being displayed printed Interpolation INTERPOL This setting can be set for each channel individually If the instrument is equipped with the optional computation function or floppy disk drive this setting can also be made for computation channels A01 to A60 The default setting is OFF OFF no interpolation will be carried out ON interpolation will be carried out according to the priority of recording colors The priority of recording colors is black gt purple gt redish purple gt navy blue gt red gt blue gt brown gt green gt orange gt yellowish green Group setting GROUP GROUP No selection of the group number Up to seven groups can be set e 01 to G07 This setting specifies which channel numbers will be included in one group A is used for ee 99 entering a single channel while a be used to enter a range of channels Setting the same channe
50. KEYLOCK lights up Message printout MSG PRINT Prints out messages For details see Section 7 3 Starting Message Printing on page 7 3 Select a message from the corresponding code 01 to 20 IM DR232 01E 9 15 suonoung pue 4 uonoyaue 3 9 4 Clearing Alarm Message Buffers Displaying Module Communications Information Structuring System Modules and Initializing Information Relevant Keys DISP MODE ESC ALM BUF CLEAR Func PRinr GOL L Feen INS DEL gt Select Function item CHART BUF CLEAR MSG BUF CLEAR MODULE INFT ser 2 Press and hold the FUNC key for about three seconds to enter the FUNC3 menu To enter the FUNC menu from the RANGE ALARM CHART or SET SET3 menu press the DISP key Select set using the CS keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept There may be some menus that are not displayed by basic settings in Chapter 10 Main menu O Lower menu im BUF CLEAR ENTER Operating status MSG BUF CLEAR EN
51. RRJC Remote RJC available if the instrument is equipped with the optional MATH function Reference channel RJC Within the setting range of reference channel No TC thermocouple must be selected as the type of input to the reference channel If the channel No or type of input for the reference channel or the type of thermocouple is changed the alarm and partial compression recording functions will be turned OFF If the type of input for the reference channel or the type of thermocouple is changed the RRJC settings will be cleared and the type of input and measuring range for the reference channel will be set to the one which was in effect before the change was made The recording span will be set to the initial value of the measuring range m DC current mA input module This input can be set only for mA input channels The measuring range is 20 mA to 20 mA Setting the Recording Span The measurement range is decided according to the type of input The recording left and right span must lie within the measurement range However the recording span is 0 to 1 for the DI input type The value on the left side of the SPAN menu shows the left span and the value on the right side of the SPAN menu shows the right span For the remote RJC the setting range for recording span is the same as that for the reference channel IM DR232 01E 5 1eeur uedg induJ ayy funes 5 2 Setting Linear Scaling an
52. Reference junction Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key SET UP RJC Section 10 5 compensation Key lock Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key SET UP LOCK Section 10 7 Menu configuration Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key SET UP Section 10 8 of FUNC key FUNC PARM Menu configuration Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key SET UP SET PARM Section 10 9 of SET key Report function Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key SET UP REPORT Section 10 12 Reset timer FUNC key TIMER RESET Section 9 3 Lock keys FUNC key KEY LOCK ON Section 9 3 Start report FUNC key REPORT START Section 10 12 Stop report FUNC key REPORT STOP Section 10 12 Start report print FUNC key REPORT RECALL Section 10 12 START Stop report print FUNC key REPORT PRINT Section 10 12 START Clear message buffer Press the FUNC key for about three seconds MSG BUF CLEAR Section 9 4 Display module settings Press the FUNC key for about three seconds MODULE INF Section 9 4 Display communication Press the FUNC key for about three seconds COMM INF Section 9 4 settings Initialize setting Press the FUNC key for about three seconds INIT Section 9 4 information Procedure varies according to the menu configuration of the SET key see section 10 9 Procedure varies according to the menu configuration of the FUNC key see section 10 8 14 IM DR232 01E 1 1 About DARWIN Created from a completely new concept that is based
53. YEL GR yellowish green RED PR redish purple and ORANGE The default setting is PURPLE for channel 1 RED for channel GREEN for channel 3 BLUE for channel 4 BROWN for channel 5 BLACK for channel 6 NAVY for channel 7 YEL_GR for channel 8 RED PR for channel 9 and ORANGE for channel 0 Enter a unit number and a slot number in the two boxes Note In order to make the set or selected contents effective the contents must be registered For details see page 10 23 To return from the SET UP menu to the operation display mode select END in the main menu For details see page 10 23 10 14 IM DR232 01E 10 7 Setting Key Lock Relevant Keys Git 757 ees ESC SETUP LOCK GO Cre INS DEL gt Select Setting Parameter CHART FILTER RELAY BURN OUT COLOR LOCK cum Q ser EnreR 2 Operating Procedure Main menu SETUP Enter the SET UP menu in the following procedure 1 When the display presents the operation display mode or a menu other than the SET UP menu first turn off the power switch 2 Turn the switch back on while pressing the DISP key and continue pressing the DISP key for about
54. gt Select Setting Parameter SYSTEM UNIT MATH CONST TREND TIMER LOG 1 CHART KEYLOGI Operating Procedure Press the SET key to enter the SET menu Select set using the CS keys ESC C RECORD Cacen CES Ce INS DEL ser EnreR To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Main menu SET 1 CONST CONST No K01 K01 02 04 05 06 K07 K08 9 K10 4 ND K01 9 9999E 29 L up ou es eee SET OK End of setting Explanation Up to 60 constants KO1 to K60 can be set ENTER ENTER ESC The number of significant digits is 5 excluding the decimal point If exponent is used the mantissa and exponent must consist of 5 digits and 2 digits respectively Configurable ranges 1 0000 35 to 1 0000E 35 0 1 0000E 35 to 1 0000E35 IM DR232 01E 12 7 IPPON LIN ejqerreAv uoneinduio Bunnoox3 12 4 Starting Stopping Computation Computation can be started and stopped from the FUNC menu or using the event action function Starting stopping computation from the FUNC menu Press the FUNC key and select the desired operation from the FU
55. 1 Open the front door and remove the chart cassette cassette from the main unit 2 Press the red lever at the bottom of the carriage The ribbon cassette holder moves to the right Ribbon cassette holder Screw shaft Red lever 3 Touch the ribbon cassette holder with a finger and tilt the housing downward 4 Turn the ribbon cassette rotating knob in the direction of the arrow counterclockwise to take up the ribbon slack 5 Fit the projection of the housing into the slot of the ribbon cassette and insert the cassette fully into the holder 6 Bring up the front part of the cassette until it latches and make sure it is horizontal IM DR232 01E 3 11 pue uoneyyeisu 3 4 Installing the Chart and Ribbon Cassette 7 Push the ribbon cassette to the left until the latch engages Check that the three white lines of the printer head are not visible when viewed from the front If the white lines can be seen the ribbon cassette is not properly loaded Push the cassette to the left again 8 Turn the ribbon cassette rotating knob once more in the direction of the arrow counterclockwise to take up the ribbon slack 9 Return the chart cassette to the main unit 10 Feed the chart paper by pressing the FEED key on the operation panel to prevent a delay in starting the chart paper feed Note Check that the ribbon cassette is properly loaded in the carriage f a ribbon cassette is used for a lo
56. 1 00 2 00 23 00 24 00 For cumulative summation it resets the cumulative sum at a preset time Daily reports The DR recorder makes reports at a preset time or times For cumulative summation it resets the cumulative sum at the preset time of a day Monthly reports The DR recorder makes reports at a preset time of the day Report Channels There are sixty report channels from RO1 to R60 You can assign channels for measuring objects being computed or computation channels and the type of computing on a report channel basis When making a report of computed data let computing start before letting the report making start Types of Computing Menu Item Data Item for Computing INST Instantaneous value at the time of making report AVE Average maximum and minimum over the computing period SUM Sum and cumulative sum over the computing period Sum and Cumulative Sum Sum The total sum over an hour for hourly reports the sum over a day for daily reports or the sum over a month for monthly reports The DR recorder resets this value each time it makes any of these reports Cumulative sum The total sum up to the preset time to make a report in the case of hourly reports or the sum up to a preset time of the day to make a report in the case of daily reports The DR recorder resets this value at each preset time or at each preset time of the day for report making The DR recorder does not perform cumulative summation for monthl
57. 2 CU1 CU2 CU3 CU4 PT1S PT2S JPT1S JPT2S J263B exo 4 SPAN 200 0 600 0 C ENTER Span limit 200 0 600 0 C 4 SCL 0 00 100 00 ENTER 4 SET OK ESC 001 01 SCL DI LEVL 4 001 01 SCL DI LEVL ENTER LEVL CONT SPAN _____ 1 ENTER gt Span limit 0 1 4 SCL 0 00 100 00 ENTER 4 SET OK ESC The setting of the channel number is the same as explained in 5 1 on page 5 2 The following explanation assumes that you already carried out the channel setting and that you selected SCL as the input type Selecting the Input Type for Linear Scaling The input type can be selected from the following The default setting is VOLT e VOLT DC voltage Refer to page 5 3 TC thermocouple Refer to page 5 3 RTD resistance temperature detector Refer to page 5 3 DI contact Refer to page 5 3 Setting the Recording Span Refer to page 5 3 Setting the Scaling Values SCL The left scaling and right scaling values are set following the left and right span values of the span menu The value on the left side of the SCL menu shows the left scaling value and the value on the right side of the SCL menu shows the right scaling menu The setting ranges from 30000 to 30000 The decimal point can be set in any position of the scale as shown below Set it when the left scale is set 9 66
58. Copying 4 COPY OK End of setting ESC DR232 01E 11 17 ejeg dn jeg pue pejnduio5 pounseayy 11 6 Copying in ASCII Format Explanation Measured computed data in the internal RAM disk is converted to ASCII data then copied to a floppy disk The identifier is CSV Conversion channel COPY CH Used to select a channel whose data is to be converted to ASCII data Measurement channels and computation channels are arranged in the order of 001 002 560 A01 A02 A60 For instance if 559 A02 is specified data for channels 559 560 01 and A02 will be converted Conversion data COPY DATA Used to specify the conversion range for the channels specified by COPY CH Enter the conversion start data No and end data No Data size When measured computed data is converted to ASCII data 12 bytes will be used for each data set Thus data size can be calculated as follows Data size 178 20 x number of conversion channels 2 24 12 x number of conversion channels 1 x number of data sets to be converted Copying is not possible if destination s memory size is insufficient Note 5 When a file is copied to a floppy disk the file creation date will be replaced by the date on which the file is copied 11 18 IM DR232 01E 11 6 Copying in ASCII Format Data format ASCII converted data is saved in the following format Sample by DAR
59. ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER _ ENTER From the following page IM DR232 01E 9 1 Setting Event Action Functions Selection of event ALARM actions The MATH menu is displayed only with the DR232 1 DR242 1 and models with the M1 option The MEMRY and FLOPPY menus are displayed only with the DR232 1 DR242 1 The REPORT menu is displayed only with models with the M3 option From the previous page EVT ALARM 4 ACT EDGE ALARM ACK 4 ACK ao LI ACT EDGE ALARM RST eX ACT EDGE TIMER RST ao 4 ACT EDGE RECORD OFF OFF ON NN PR C I ACT EDGE DIGITAL PR ao tes PR 01 4 ACT EDGE MSG PR 01 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11121314 15 16 17 18 19 20 ACT EDGE MSG DISP 01 4 ACT EDGE MSG DISP 01 AN 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 1112131415 16 17 18 19 20 ACT EDGE MATH START 4 ACT EDGE MATH START START STOP CLEAR RESET ACT EDGE FLAG F01 4 ACT EDGE FLAG F01 F01 F02 F03 F04 FOS F06 F07 F08 F09 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 ACT EDGE MEMRY DATA_WR 4 ACT EDGE MEMRY DATA_WR DATA WR WR TRIG RD TRIG LD_TRG1 L
60. HOLD RESET Repeated multiplication Sign logical negation NOT Multiplication division 27 Addition subtraction Greater smaller GT LT GE LE Equal not equal EQ NE Logical AND AND Logical OR exclusive OR OR XOR Alarm Up to 4 alarms can be set for each computation channel Only two types of alarm are available upper limit alarm and lower limit alarm 1 Hysteresis is always set to 0 For a detailed description of alarm setting refer to 8 1 Setting Alarms and Relays including internal switches page 8 1 Event action function The event action function can be used to start stop computation and clear computation channels in case an event takes place refer to 9 1 Setting Event Action Functions page 9 1 Actions to be taken in case of overflow and computation error Actions to be taken in case of an error during computation can be specified Error display OVER or OVER is displayed Error data during TLOG or CLOG The operator is asked to select whether to display the data as a computation error or ignore the error and continue computation Overflow data during TLOG or CLOG The operator is asked to select whether to display the data as a computation error or ignore the error and continue computation The operator is also asked to select whether or not the data be used as the upper lower limit value Description of the upper lower limit value is given bel
61. LD TRG1LD TRG2LD TRG3 ACT EDGE REPORT START 4 ACT EDGE REPORT START START STOP ACTzLEVL RECORD 4 ACT LEVL RECORD To the next page ENTER ENTER ENTER From the following page 9 8 IM DR232 01E 9 1 Setting Event Action Functions Explanation When an event is detected this menu allows you to set and execute a certain action Selection of logic LOGIC box number Select a box number from among 01 to 30 for storing a combination logic from events to actions Select the same number as the box number already indicating events and actions and set an event and action to overwrite the logic number Selection of events EVT Select any event from among the following NONE releases the event action setting REMOTE This menu is displayed only with the DI DO modules that are recognized as system modules see page 9 16 When a remote control signal is applied the action is executed There are 12 control signals available Select any control signal from these numbers for event setting Remote control signal terminal numbers are applicable for this selection See page 3 19 for the remote control terminal numbers ALARM If an alarm occurs the action is executed See Section 8 1 Setting Alarms and Relays including internal switches on page 8 1 for setting alarms RELAY If the selected internal switch o
62. NC FUNC FUNC3 OFF PANEL KEY LOCK ON 4 KEY LOCK ON FUNC FUNC FUNC3 OFF m PANE L KEY LOCK OFF 4 KEY LOCK OFF FUNC FUNC FUNC3 OFF PANEL S U LIST START 4 S U LIST START FUNC3 FUNC FUNC3 OFF 1 PANEL S U LIST STOP 4 S U LIST STOP FUNC3 FUNC FUNC3 OFF m PANEL MSG PRINT 4 MSG PRINT FUNC FUNC FUNC3 OFF PANEL ALM BUF CLEAR 4 ALM BUF CLEAR FUNC3 FUNC FUNC3 OFF PANEL MSG BUF CLEAR 4 MSG BUF CLEAR FUNC3 FUNC FUNC3 OFF m PANEL MODULE INF 4 MODULE FUNC FUNC3 OFF PANEL COMM INF COMM INF FUNC3 FUNC FUN3 OFF PANEL RE SYSTEM RE SYSTEM FUNC3 FUNC FUNC3 OFF F PANEL RAM INT RAM INT FUNC3 FUNC FUNC3 OFF PANEL ALL ITEM ALL ITEM FUNC FUNC FUNC3 OFF INIT ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER To prevlous page 10 18 IM DR232 01E 10 8 Setting FUNC FUNC3 Menu Explanation Setting FUNC FUNC3 FUNC PARM Select the menu to be displayed by pressin
63. NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC AND OR Setting When a group of alarms share the same internal switch or alarm output relay you can select how the internal switches alarm output relays will be operated AND will be operated when all alarms are occurring OR will be operated when at least one alarm is occurring Alarm occurrence Channel 1 Alarm status Alarm occurrence Channel 2 Operation Alarm output AND 3 relay status OR Operation HOLD NON HOLD Setting You can select whether to hold the operating status of operated internal switches or alarm output relays This setting applies to both the internal switches and the alarm output relays Alarm status Alarm release Alarm release Operation of 1 1 Internal switch Working Working ney output Alarm reset relay Refer to page 2 5 Reflashing Alarm Setting When several alarms share the same alarm output relay you can select this setting which results in a short de operation of the relay when a second alarm occurs Alarm occurrence Channel 1 Alarm status Channel 2 Alarm occurrence Channel 3 l Reflash ON IWorking Working Working Alarm output relay Approx 20oms Approx 200ms Reflash OFF _ m 2 14 IM DR232 01E 2 4 Alarm Function Recording Alarm Information Analog Trend Mode When an alarm occurs or releases the occurren
64. Noise superimposed Connect input wiring far away from noise source Ground recorder Ground measurement object Isolate thermocouple from measurement object Use shielded wiring for input line Change A D integral times Use moving average Use input filter No countermeasure taken against ambient temperature changes Install input terminal cover properly Protect recorder from blowing air of fan Keep temperature changes near input terminals small Input connected improperly Connect input properly Connect module properly Tighten screws properly Isolate RTD from ground Replace disconnected thermocouples Recorder connected in parallel with other instruments Do not use burnout functions in other instruments Ground recorder and other instruments in the same ground line Do not connect recorder in parallel with other instruments for use with dual element TC RJC set improperly for TC input Set RJC properly Dot printing position not calibrated correctly Calibrate correctly Other cause Contact Yokogawa Engineering Service Defective display Noise superimposed Lay input wiring far away from noise source Ground recorder Ground measurement object Isolate TC from measurement object Use shielded wires for input line Change A D integration times Use input filt
65. Relevant Keys OS sees ESC SET TAG pe QO C Select Setting Parameter CA CHART2 ZONE PARTIAL TAG DIGITAL PR MANT cuart set enter 2 1 Press the SET key for three seconds to enter the SET3 menu 2 Select set using the GS keys 3 To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept 4 New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Main menu SET __ Lower menu TAG 001 01 TAG gt 2 0 51 Select Channel No i 001 00 TAG STAG Ac in S A gt Select Channel No 001 01 12345678901 TAG 1234567890123456 968 4 0123456789 ABC KLT SET OK ESC DIGITAL PR ENTER 001 01 DIGITAL PR ON D ONBOoOIMMEEEENEENE HEB Select Channel No 4 001 01 DIGITAL PR ON D ONBOOIMEEEEENENEE HEB C O gt Select Channel No In case SINGLE is set as log interval at 4 the RECORD setting in the SET UP mode 001 01 DIGITAL PR ON ENTER OK ESC ONBOOINMEEEEENENE HEH OFF ON Incase MULTIPLE is set as log interval at J the RECOR
66. Sixty internal switches are provided which can be operated upon alarm occurrences These switches are only for internal operations and are used in combination with the event action function refer to page 2 17 Alarm Output Relays The alarm module or the DI DO module includes an alarm output relay The contact of this relay can be output to the outside For how to mount modules see 3 3 How to Connect Input Output Modules page 3 7 IM DR232 01E 2 13 suonoun4 2 4 Alarm Function Operation Mode Energizing De energizing Setting The alarm output relays can be selected to be energized or de energized on alarm occurrence Using de energizing the alarm output relay will be activated when the power drops in the same way as when an alarm occurs This setting can be done for each relay individually Relay contacts in case of energizing A contact When power is OFF When power is on and no alarm has occurred NO C NO C When power is OFF When power is on and no alarm has occurred NO C NO C C contact When power is OFF When power is on and no alarm has occurred When power is on and an alarm has occurred NO C When power is on and an alarm has occurred NO C When power is on and an alarm has occurred NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC Relay contacts in case of de energizing When power is on When power is OFF When power is on and an alarm has and no alarm has A occurred occurred
67. The minimum width of a zone is 5mm A decimal point cannot be set The default settings are Omm for the left position and 250mm for the right position If the instrument is equipped with the optional computation function or floppy disk drive this setting can also be made for computation channels A01 to A60 Partially Expanded Recording PARTIAL This setting specifies whether to carry out partially expanded recording and if so which percentage of the recording span will be compressed and the corresponding boundary value If the instrument is equipped with the optional computation function or floppy disk drive this setting can also be made for computation channels A01 to A60 Selecting Partial Recording ON OFF ON Partial recording will be carried out OFF Partial recording will not be carried out The default setting is OFF Specifying the Compressed Part and Boundary Value RATE This setting specifies which percentage 1 to 99 of the full recording span will be compressed The default value is 5096 Boundary value This setting specifies the boundary value which corresponds to the previous set compressed part The setting lies within the recording span but when linear scaling is being used the setting lies within the left right scale range The default value is 0 Note If boundary values are to be set for succeeding channels the decimal point is handled as shown below If succeeding channels are set the decimal point position of b
68. Within the measuring range in the related channel DI can be set to either 0 or 1 SCALE Within a linear scaling value Computation channel Within the range specified by the computation function RHand RL VOLT TC RTD DI and DELTA Within 1 to maximum measuring range minus minimum measuring range in the related channel For example set 30000 without using a decimal point if the maximum value exceeds 30000 DI can be set to only 1 SCALE Set 1 to 30000 without using a decimal point dH and dL When the standard channel uses VOLT Within the measuring range When the standard channel uses other than VOLT maximum measuring range minus minimum measuring range to maximum measuring range minus minimum measuring range For the type of input see Section 5 1 Setting the Type of Input and Recording Span on page 5 3 Note When setting alarm values in continuous channels use the decimal point as follows The decimal point of an alarm value when the continuous channels have different measuring ranges should be in the position determined by the individual measuring range If the decimal point is outside the measuring range an error occurs For example if channels with measuring ranges 20 mV and 2 V and a type T thermocouple channel are all set to an alarm value of 10000 then the alarm values in the respective channels are as follows 10 000 mV in the 20 mV measuring range channel 1 0000 V in 2 V measuring ra
69. You can also start stop report making using the event action functions Reports come in the following three types Type Intervals Between Making Reports Data Item for Computing Hourly report Every hour 1 00 2 00 23 00 24 00 An hour s average maximum minimum An hour s sum and cumulative sum Instantaneous value at the time of making the report Daily report Every other day preset time A day s average maximum and minimum A day s sum and cumulative sum Instantaneous value at the time of making the report Monthly report Every other month preset time A month s average maximum and minimum A month s sum and cumulative sum Instantaneous value at the time of making the report On Off of Hourly Daily and Monthly Report Making Configure the on s and off s of hourly daily and monthly report making separately You can set hourly daily and monthly report making all to at the same time In addition you can set daily and monthly reports to either the standard format ON1 or the enhanced format ON2 of output Note that the enhanced format can only be set for either daily reports or monthly reports Output Formats The format of output is available in either the standard or enhanced format Hourly reports can have the standard format only Standard format Prints the results of computing configured on a report channel basis Enhanced format Daily reports the results of computing configured on a report channe
70. channel measurement values of reference channel This function changes the left and right span of the recording span to left and right scale values which are converted to a different physical quantity This can be applied to each channel and a different engineering unit can be entered for display and printouts Example where voltage values are cenverted into linear scaling values Left span 2V Right span 2V left scale 0 1A Right scale 1 1A This function computes a moving average over a preset number of K measurement values This function is useful for displaying and recording of unsteady measurement values The computation formula is as follows Dm Mm K 1 Mm K 2 Mm 2 Mm 1 Mm where Dm m th average value Mm K 1 the measurement value of the K 1 th measurement before the m th measurement Mm K 2 the measurement value of the K 2 th measurement before the m th measurement Mm 2 the measurement value of the second last measurement before the m th measurement Mm 1 the measurement value of the last measurement before the measurement Mm the measurement value of the m th measurement K number of samples and an integer ranging from 2 to 64 At the first computation the measurement value of the first measurement will be multiplied by the number of samples after which the average will be taken The measurement values of the second and later measureme
71. for turn on time Note It takes a maximum of 2 seconds for normal measured values to be output when the power is turned on when the measurement mode is changed or when the setting for turning on off the filter is changed The DR recorder indicates a value representative of no data on the display or 8005H for the binary format or a faulty data value for the ASCII format in the case of output to the communication line until the normal measured values are output Filter Removes chatter of up to 5 ms can be turned on or off on a channel basis Input Signal Levels Open contact 200 Q maximum Closed contact 100 kQ minimum Normal Operating Temperature Humidity Range 0 to 50 C 20 to 80 RH for an ambient temperature range of 0 to 40 C or 10 to 50 RH for 40 to 50 C non condensing Normal Operating Magnetic field Strength 400 A m maximum 14 22 IM DR232 01E 14 6 Specifications of Pulse Input Module Maximum Input Voltage 5V DC Signal Source Ratings 15 V DC 30 mA minimum Insulation Resistance Across input terminals and ground 20 MO minimum 500 V DC Withstanding Voltage Across output terminals and ground 500 V DC 1 min no channel to channel isolation Power Consumption Included in the value of a system s installed main unit or sub unit Dimensions Approximately 57 W x 137 H x 68 D mm Weight Approximately 0 3 kg Installation Category Overvoltage Category CAT II
72. of range except for 50 V range 40 of range 50V range Strain input module DU 500 10 of range except for 2000ue range 50 of range 2000ue range Other input modules 10 of range IM DR232 01E 14 9 suoneoyioeds 14 1 Specifications of DR232 DR242 and DS400 DS600 Main Unit Installation Desk top type DR232 Panel mount type DR242 Regardless of which installation method you use be sure to install the units in an upright position Sub Unit Installation Floor mounting Use the feet at the bottom of each unit Direct panel mounting Screw the unit directly to the panel at the specified points DIN rail mounting Use the dedicated mounting brackets Rack mounting Use the dedicated mounting brackets Regardless of which installation method you use be sure to install the units in an upright position Materials Steel plate aluminium plate plastic moldings Color Main unit Display Slate Gray light equivalent to Munsell 0 1 PB 4 6 0 2 DR232 main unit Ice White equivalent to Munsell 6 6 Y 7 9 0 5 DR242 main unit Lamp Black equivalent to Munsell 0 8 Y 2 5 0 4 Subunit Slate Gray light equivalent to Munsell 0 1 PB 4 6 0 2 Lamp Black equivalent to Munsell 0 8 Y 2 5 0 4 External dimensions DR232 approx 438 W x 291 H x 301 D mm DR242 approx 444 W x 288 H x 308 D mm Sub unit DS400 approx 336 W x 165 H x 100 D mm Sub unit D 00 approx 422 W x 176 H x 100 D mm Weight DR2
73. of the span the DR recorder cannot measure the phase and power factor negative overflow A maximum of two scans worth of data become invalid immediately after a change has been made to the measuring range and or wiring 14 16 IM DR232 01E 14 4 Specifications of Power Monitor Module Measuring Accuracy and Resolution As described below under the following operating conditions Ambient temperature 23 2 C ambient humidity 55 10 RH power supply voltage 90 to 250 VAC AC power supply 10 to 32 VDC the subunit of a DC power supply model only power supply frequency 50 60Hz within 1 AC power supply warm up time 30 minutes or more vibrations and others not affecting instrument operation Measured Data Item Measuring Accuracy Resolution Effective voltage 0 5 of SPAN 0 01 Vrms for 25 V range 0 1 Vrms for 250 V range Effective current 0 5 of SPAN 0 0001 Arms for 0 5 A range 0 001 Arms for 5 A range Active power 1 of SPAN 20 0 01 W for 12 5 W 25 W and 37 5 W spans 2 5 of SPAN 0 lo Ix 30 0 1 W for 125 W 250 W and 375 W spans 5 of SPAN 30 lt l Ix 80 1 W for 1 250 W 2 500 W and 3 750 W spans Apparent power 1 of SPAN 0 lt 1 Ix 80 0 01 VA for 12 5 VA 25 V A and 37 5 V A spans 0 1 VA for 125 VA 250 VA and 375 VA spans 1 VA for 1 250 VA 2 500 VA and 3 750 VA spans Reactive power 5 of SPAN 0 xl ol lt 60 0 01 Va
74. pulse input module with screw terminals DU700 11 10 channel digital input module with screw terminal NO Instrument Number Please quote this instrument number when contacting the dealer Terminal Modules Check that model code given on the name plate is according to your order Model Codes Model Description DT100 11 DI DO module screw type terminal DT200 11 Alarm module 4 transfer contacts screw type terminal DT200 21 Alarm module 10 make contacts screw type terminal DT300 11 GP IB module DT300 21 RS 232 C module D sub terminal DT300 31 RS 422 A RS 485 module DT300 41 Ethernet module NO Instrument Number and Style number equipment Please quote these numbers when contacting the dealer IM DR232 01E Checking the Contents of the Package Standard Accessories Name Part No Q ty Description 1 Power cord see page 2 3 1 2 Fuse A1350EF 1 Timelag 2 5A 250V for DR232 242 in case of DR232 located in fuse holder 3 DC power supply A1105JC 1 Only for the subunit models whose power supply terminal connector code is 2 4 Ribbon cassette B9627AZ 1 10 colors for DR232 242 5 Chart paper B9627AY 1 Length 30m 25mm grid for DR232 DR242 6 Mounting brackets B9900CW 1x2 forDR242 7 Clamp filter 1197 1 When power supply code is 1 8 User s Manual IMDR232 01E 1 this manual for DR232 242 9 User s Manual IMDR231 11E 1 Communication Interface manual for DR232
75. purple redish purple navy blue red blue brown green orange and yellowish green The recording color of the numerical values in the logging mode is purple only The time during which one scan of trend recording or numerical printout is carried out is called the recording interval Recording interval for trend recording This recording interval can be selected from AUTO or FIX AUTO The recording interval is decided automatically depending on the measurement scan interval and chart speed in order prevent the dots from overlapping However in cases where this calculation would render the recording interval smaller than the scan interval the recording interval will equal the scan interval Recording interval Scan interval x N where N is an integer satisfying N lt 720 scan interval x chart speed 720 is fixed Example when scan interval is 2s chart speed is 100mm h then N 720 2 x 100 2 3 6 The closest matching integer is 3 Accordingly the recording interval becomes 2 x 3 6s FIX Recording is carried out at an interval which is the same as the scan interval 2 to 60s regardless of the chart speed Recording interval for digital printouts This recording interval can be selected from MULTIPLE or SINGLE MULTIPLE Six preset recording intervals Timer 1 to 6 can be set and a recording interval can be selected per channel The timer setting can be selected from relative and absolute Relative time Time will
76. such as key operation remote control signal and alarm status Pretrigger 0 to 100 can be specified in 10 intervals 14 4 IM DR232 01E 14 1 Specifications of DR232 DR242 and DS400 DS600 Filename when saving data 8 ASCII characters input However when saving the measured computed values using trigger repeat 5 ASCII characters input last 3 letters are set automatically from 001 to 208 Optional Math Function Computation types Types Four arithmetical operations SQR square root ABS absolute value LOG common logarithm LN natural logarithm EXP exponent statistical computation logical computation AND OR NOT and relational computation exponentiation previously measured value reference hold and reset Statistical computation CLOG Computation process of simultaneously measured values within a group total maximum minimum average and maximum minimum TLOG Computation process of a specific channel over time axis total maximum minimum average and maximum minimum Statistical computation interval Set by the event action function Hold Temporary suspending of computation and temporary hold of the computed result During statistical computation resume the computation from the hold point after the hold is released Number of channels for computing Number of channels that can be allocated for computational purposes 60ch maximum Computation interval Every measurement interval except w
77. uejs S 1 3 Names of Parts Strain input module DU500 12 DU500 13 DU500 14 DU500 12 DU500 13 DU500 14 25 AS NDI terminal Clamp terminal Pulse input module DU600 11 Screw terminal Cover d Digital input module DU700 11 Screw terminal 1 8 IM DR232 01E 1 3 Names of Parts Terminal Modules DI DO module DT100 11 O Screw terminal d 2 M 99 9 v 38 9 9 1 5 So 5 9 7 4 9 9 o D Cover O Alarm module DT200 11 DT200 21 DT200 11 DT200 21 Screw terminal Screw terminal Communication Module GP IB module DT300 11 GP IB connector Switch to set the address Switches to set communication parameters RS 232 C connector IM DR232 01E 1 9 uejs S 1 3 Names of Parts RS 422 A RS 485 Module DT300 31 RS 422 A RS 485 terminal ZAAI Switches to
78. 10 during computation an overflow will occur Data applicable for computation The following data is used for computation Measured data Specified by channel No 001 to 560 Computed data Specified by computation channel No A01 to A60 Constant Value specified for K01 to K60 e Group data Measured data of channels belonging to a group Specified by group No G01 to G07 This is applicable only for CLOG Communication input data Data written to the instrument s memory via communication interface Specified by data No C01 to C60 Data on internal RAM disk Applicable only for the DR232 1 DR242 1 equipped with a floppy disk drive Measured computed data saved in the internal RAM disk Specified by M001 to M560 for measured data or 1 to MA60 for computed data 12 2 IM DR232 01E 12 1 Overview of the Computation Function Handling of data for computation For computation measured computed data is treated as a value having no unit For instance if the measured data for channel 001 is 20 mV and the measured data for channel 002 is 20 V the computation result of 001 002 will be 40 Priority of Operators Priority of operators when they are used in an equation is shown below Operators are listed in order of priority from the highest to the lowest Type Operator Function 50 SQRQ LNO EXPO SUMO PRE Q
79. 12 hours The DR recorder takes different actions depending on the time it recovers from the power failure After the Time of Report Making Before the Time of Report Making Time of Recovery from Power Failure Valid report function start of report making enabled Condition after recovery from power failure Valid report function start of report making enabled Report making Immediately after recovery from Time for report making power failure Report printing Immediately after recovery from Time for report making power failure Data included in report making Data measured up to the point of Data measured over the given power failure period except the power failure time If automatic report printing is turned on If the power failure time covers the given period of report making no report for that period is made Handling of Faulty Data If data being computed contain any faulty data the DR recorder treats the data as summarized in the following table depending on the type of computing and faulty data Type of Faulty Data Average Minimum Maximum Instantaneous Value Sum Positive overflow Excluded from Included in computing Takes faulty data as Excluded from computing the result of computing computing Negative overflow Excluded from Included in computing Takes faulty data as Excluded from computing the result of computing computing Channels included in Excluded from Excluded from computing Take
80. 5 seconds Select set using the O amp 2 keys If exiting the following lower menu srtting halfway press the MODE ESC key The display returns to the main menu to which the lower menu belongs However newly set or selected contents are canceled When setting proceeds to the display for the setting end the newly set or selected contents are established IO Lower menu n LOCK ENTER KEY LOCK NOT ENTER NOT USE 4 LOCK SET ESC LOCK USE ENTER NOT USE 4 RECORD KEY LOCK ENTER FREE LOCK 4 FEED KEY LOCK ENTER FREE LOCK 4 PRINT KEY LOCK ENTER FREE LOCK 4 FUNC KEY LOCK ENTER FREE LOCK 4 M FUNC1 KEY LOCK ENTER FREE LOCK 4 M FUNC2 KEY LOCK ENTER FREE LOCK 4 A CODE NUMBER ___0 ENTER Set the pass word 4 KEY LOCK SET ESC IM DR232 01E 10 15 145 sbumes oiseg 10 7 Setting Key Lock Explanation Selection of Use or Nonuse of Key Lock Select whether the key lock function is used or not used NOT the key lock function cannot be used e USE the key lock function can be used The menu KEY LOCK ON is displayed in the FUNC menu and key lock can be executed For details see Section 9 3 Alarm Acknowledgment Alarm Reset Timer Reset Keylock and Message Printout page 9 15 The default setting is NOT Selection of Making Key Lock Ineffective Even if
81. 55 2 make eee o o contact 1 4 ALm output umo e e Alarm output 5 5 2 J transfer contact RIK 4J transfer contact G Output contact rating 250 V DC 0 1 A resistive load 250 V AC 2A resistive load 30 V DC 2A resistive load 3 26 IM DR232 01E 3 8 Connecting an Extension Module to Extension Bases Using an extension module and extension bases you can install input modules at a location distant from the sub unit s The module and bases are powered from the sub unit and therefore can be located even in a place where there is no power source nearby Installing an Extension Base A For fire prevention use extension bases in an upright position Do not cover up the extension base s module allow a clearance of at least 3 cm around the module Ambient Temperature and Humidity Use an extension base under the following environmental conditions Ambient temperature 10 to 60 C Ambient humidity 20 to 8096 RH at 10 to 40 C 10 to 5096 RH at 40 to 50 C 5 to 30 RH at 50 to 60 C Use the extension base in a condensation free condition Note Condensation may occur if you move the extension base from an area of low humidity to an area of high humidity or if any drastic temperature variation takes place In addition a measurement error will result if the DR recorder is in the thermocouple input mode In that case allow at leas
82. 7 D mm The dimensions do not include the support feet Approximately 114 8 W x 171 5 H x 143 3 D mm The dimensions include the support feet Weight Extension module Approximately 176 kg Extension base Approximately 345 kg 14 32 IM DR232 01E 14 12 Dimensional Drawings DR232 Main Unit unit mm 424 Rear Panel 438 30 207 63 6 ite N If not specified the tolerance is 3 However in cases of less than 10mm the tolerance is 0 3mm IM DR232 01E 14 33 14 12 Dimensional Drawings DR242 Main Unit unit mm Rear Panel 424 o 444 _ 40 T 203 ME 9 N N p If not specified the tolerance is 3 However in cases of less than 10mm the tolerance is 0 3mm 14 34 IM DR232 01E 14 12 Dimensional Drawings Sub unit DS600 Sub unit DS400 unit mm 336 8 320 olo llo lelo 9 lo 1 e
83. CH6 for power monitor module The following functions are not available for style number S4 and S5 m Strain and AC input module Extender module and Extender base Report function Ethernet module Digital input module Flag and group reset functions for M1 option The measuring of active power and apparent power on CH3 to CH6 for power monitor module Products with style number S6 is not sold The following functions are not available for style number S7 Ethernet module Digital input module Flag and group reset functions for M1 option The measuring of active power and apparent power on CH3 to CH6 for power monitor module IM DR232 01E Checking the Contents of the Package Unpack the box and check the contents before operating the instrument In case the wrong instrument or accessories have been delivered or if some accessories are not present or if they seem abnormal contact the dealer from which you purchased them Furthermore please contact a Yokogawa representative to order any of parts as follows Main Unit DR232 DR242 Check that the model and suffix code given on the name plate are according to your order Model and Suffix Codes Model Suffix Code Description DR232 Hybrid recorder desktop type DR242 Hybrid recorder panel mount type Memory No memory asm 3 5inch Floppy disk drive Software Without data acquisiti
84. DS400 DS600 DC power supply model AC adapter DV500 002 2 pin inlet w VDE cable Part No B9988YB for DC100 DA100 DS400 DS600 DC power supply model AC adapter DV500 003 2 pin inlet w SAA cable Part No B9988YC for DC100 DA100 DS400 DS600 DC power supply model AC adapter DV500 004 2 pin inlet w BS cable Part No B9988YD for DC100 DA100 DS400 DS600 DC power supply model Name Model Description DAQ 32 DP120 13 Windows 95 98 and Windows NT DAQ 32 Plus DP320 13 Windows 95 98 and Windows NT Name Part No Min Q ty Description Ribbon cassette B9627AZ 1 10 colors Chart paper B9627RY 10 Length 30 m grid 10mm B9627AY 10 Length 30 m grid 25mm IM DR232 01E Safety Precautions This instrument is an IEC safety class I instrument provided with terminal for protective grounding The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation service and repair of this instrument If this instrument is used in a manner not sepecified in this manual the protection provided by this instrument may be impaired Also YOKOGAWA Electric Corporation assumes no liability for the customer s failure to comply with these requirements The following symbols are used on this instrument avoid injury death of personnel N Alternating current or damage to the instrument the operator must refer to an explanation ON power in the User s Manual or Service Manual O OFF power Protective ground
85. Example 02 001 01 In this example any computation channel No which is equal to or greater than A03 cannot be used Either TLOG or CLOG can be used in an equation Note Each equation must consist of up to 40 characters The total number of channels and constants to be used for each equation is 16 or smaller Setting the recording span Set the recording span for computation results The setting range is from 9999999 to 99999999 The decimal point can be placed in five positions as represented in XX XXX XXX XX XXXX X xxxxx The unit specified in 6 1 Setting Recording Mode Engineering Unit Recording Channel and Recording Interval page 6 1 will be used LEFT Sets the left limit value of the recording span RIGHT Sets the right limit value of the recording span Note If the computation ON OFF computation equation or span setting is changed the alarm and partial compression recording settings for the corresponding channel will be reset IM DR232 01E 12 5 IPPON LIN ejqerreAv uoneinduio Bunnoox3 12 2 Setting a Computation Equation Example of Settings of CLOG When computing the maximum minimum maximum minus minimum sum and average of data measured at the same time on multiple channels you must configure groups beforehand Example of settings where the averages for channels 001 002 003 004 006 and 008 are computed Configuration of groups In the SET menu assi
86. Explanation HEADER LINE No 1 ENTER 12345 4 1 ________________ ENTER MEME E EN L amp 0123456789 ABC KLT 4 SET OK ESC TITLE ENTER gt 198 0123456789 ABC KLT 4 GET Entering a Message MESSAGE No selection of the message No Up to 20 messages can be entered 5 01 to 20 entering the message The message contents can be entered here using up to 16 characters Characters and numerals can be selected from the menu The default setting is all spaces COPY copying messages The contents of an entered message message No at the left side of the setting can be copied to another message number at the right side of the setting You cannot copy to the same message number Printing out a message A message can be printed out on the occurrence of an alarm refer to 6 5 on page 6 11 for details using the FUNC menu refer to 7 3 on page 7 3 for details or using the event action function refer to 9 1 on page 9 1 for details Displaying a message A message can be displayed on the main display using the even action function Entering a Header HEADER LINE No selection of the header line One header can consist of up to five lines LINE 1 to 5 entering one line of the header The header contents can be entered here using up to 80 characters for each line and thus up to 400 characters for the en
87. JPt100 1mA high resolution JPT2S JPt100 2mA high resolution and J263B J263 B Refer to chapter 14 for the measurement range of each setting The default setting is PT1 DI voltage level LEVL contact CONT This input type can be selected from LEVL and CONT In case of LEVL a voltage of less than approx 2 4 V will be recognized as 0 OFF whereas a voltage of approx 2 4V or more max allowable voltage is up to 60 VDC will be recognized as 1 ON In case of CONT an open externally connected contact to which no voltage is applied will be recognized as 0 OFF whereas a closed contact will be recognized as 1 ON The default setting is LEVL DELTA difference between channels Computation can be done only in the same unit Destination channels should lie within the first channel No to the last channel No range The number of the reference channel should be lower than the number of the destination channels The default setting for the reference channel is 01 The type of input and the measuring range in the distination channel are the same as for the reference channel After setting the DELTA difference between channels if you attempted to change the type of input and the measuring range setting the difference between channels is released thereby the type of input and the measuring range in the destination channel are returned to their original settings and the recording span is returned to its initial value
88. Lowpass filter or use of moving average Cutoff frequencies of lowpass filter 50 60 Hz and 10 Hz and frequencies of their respective integral multiples Input Resistance 100 Q Insulation Resistance Across channels 50 V DC Across input terminals and ground 20 MO minimum 500 V DC Withstanding Voltage Across channels 1 000 V AC 1 min 50 60 Hz Across input terminals and ground 1 500 V AC 1 min 50 60 Hz excluding DU500 14 Temperature Coefficient Zero 0 012596 of range C Span 0 0125 of range C Power Consumption Included in the value of a system s installed main unit or sub unit Dimensions Approximately 57 W x 137 H x 88 D mm Weight Approximately 0 5 kg Installation Category Overvoltage Category CAT II IEC1010 IM DR232 01E 14 15 14 4 Specifications of Power Monitor Module Model Code Use Input Channels Terminal Configuration and Shortest Measurement Interval Model Code Use Input Channels Terminal Shortest Configuration Measurement Interval DU400 12 Single phase Clamp 2s one channel each for voltage and current DU400 22 Three phase Clamp 2s three channels each for voltage and current Two terminal pressure clamping Not usable as an equivalent to three modules of single phase use Method of Input Transformer isolated input with isolation between channels separated channels Method of Measurement and Computing Digital multip
89. PH2 P3 VA3 PO VAO PF3 PH3 P1 VA1 V1 n P2 VA2 V2 12 VA3 V3 FREQ V1 PFO Var1 PF1 Var2 PF2 Var3 PF3 PO VAO P1 VA1 P2 VA2 P3 VA3 vo 10 V1 n V1 n V1 n V2 12 v2 12 V2 12 V3 V3 V3 two groups of combinations IM DR232 01E 5 3 Configuring the Input Range and Recording Span or the Linear Scaling of a Power Monitoring Channel Setting the Recording Span SPAN Set the left and right spans within the limits of an input range In the SPAN menu item the left hand value is the left span and the right hand value the right span Set the recording span within the measuring range The measurable limits vary depending on the measuring range you select as shown below 25V 0 5A 25V 5A 250V 0 5A 250V 5A Effective voltage Vi 1 2 3 13 0 0 00 to 25 00 Vrms 0 00 to 25 00 Vrms 0 0 to 250 0Vrms 0 0 to 250 0Vrms Effective current Ii 1 2 3 13 0 0 0000 to 0 5000Arms 0 000 to 5 000Arms 0 0000 to 0 5000Arms 0 000 to 5 000Arms Active power 12 50 to 12 50W 125 0 to 125 0W 125 0 to 125 0W 1250 to 1250W P1 P2 P3 Active power 25 00 to 25 00W 250 0 to 250 0W 250 0 to 250 0W 2500 to 2500W P13 Active power 37 50 to 37 50W 375 0 to 375 0W 375 0 to 375 0W 3750 to 3750W PO Apparent power 0 00 to 12 50VA 0 0 to 125 0VA 0 0 to 125 0VA 0 to 1250VA VALVA2 VA3 Apparent power 0 00 to 25 00VA 0 0 to
90. Printing Characters Select 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 or 16 The default setting is 7 f the number of printing characters is less than the set TAG set in Sect 6 4 Only the number selected here will be printed For the number of characters when displaying see chapter 4 Selection of Dot printing Recording System Select it from the following systems The default setting is NORMAL To practically record it the RECORD must be turned on Channels to be recorded are those selected to be ON in Setting the Channels to be Recorded Dot Recording on page 6 2 NORMAL Records all channels to be recorded ALARMI Records only those channels in which alarms are generated Continues recording even if the alarm is reset ALARM2 Records only the channels in which alarms are generated Stops recording when the alarm is reset GROUP Records the channels which are set into a group see page 6 16 Recording can be done only if GR TREND is set in the event action function 10 4 IM DR232 01E 10 2 Setting Recording Format Selection of Printing When Chart Speed Is Changed SPEED CHANGE PR When the chart speed is changed in dot recording select whether to print with the changed chart speed or not OFF does not print ON prints The default setting is ON Selection of Printing Record Start Stop Time ON OFF MARK PR In dot recording select whether the record start stop time is printed or
91. Rack mounting The following fittings are supplied for rack mounting For details of the mounting procedure see the instruction manual for rack mounting fitting Name Model Description Rack mounting fitting DV400 011 For DS400 DS600 conforming to ANSI EIA IM DR232 01E 3 6 3 3 How to Connect the Input Output Modules AN When connecting the Input Output modules make sure to turn OFF the power to the DR232 DR242 DS400 DS600 to prevent an electric shock or damage to the instrument Setting the Unit Number of each Subunit Connecting Method When connecting subunits to the DR232 DR242 it is necessary to assign a distinctive unit number to each subunit This number can be selected from 0 to 5 the setting 6 and up will not be recognized and is set as shown in the figure below by a setting switch rotary dipswitch Note When you connect an input module at the location of the setting switch the switch can not be operated anymore Therefore make sure you set the switch before connecting any input module there It is convenient for confirming unit numbers to write each unit number setting on the gray concave surface at the top of DS600 subunit or on the left side of DS400 subunit Verify that the power to the DR232 DR242 DS400 DS600 has been turned OFF Remove the cover of the location where the module will be connected Do not remove any N cover of locations where no module will be conn
92. Re set ranges or channels with in channels with continuous ranges continuous ranges 031 There may be an invalid module in channels Change channels in which with continuous ranges continuous ranges are set 040 Reference channel number greater than Change the reference channel number that of the channel for interchannel differential computations 041 Skipped range in the reference channel for Change the range in the reference channel interchannel differential computations 042 RPJC range in the reference channel for Change the range in the reference channel interchannel differential computations 043 SCALE in range setting in the reference Change the range in the reference channel channel for interchannel differential computations 044 The reference channel for interchannel Change the reference channel number differential computations does not exist 045 The left and right spans are identical Change the scale setpoint 046 The left and right scale values are identical Change the scale setpoint value 060 The alarm setting was made in the channel Change ranges where SKIP was set 061 The alarm was set to a channel with ranges Change ranges where alarm setting cannot be set 062 The alarm setpoint is out of range in a Set correct alarm setpoint channel with continuous ranges 063 Relay number set incorrectly Set relay number correctly 080 Invalid character strings for group setting Set character strings correctly 081 In
93. Rgi Rg2 Rg3Rg4 00500 12 00500 13 00500 14 Rg4 Rg3 Jumper setup switch 0 1 E al 6 IP ele A Noa LOLs No 5 OFF ON 0 i No 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 No 5 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON Wiring Pulse Input Signal Lines to Pulse Input Module Open collector Contact TTL open collector 10 10 El CH1 o cH1 BAI CH2 BEE Wiring Output Signal and Remote Control Signal Lines to DI DO and Alarm modules Terminals NO NC pr100 11 NO C NC DT200 11 NO C DT200 21 Terminal arrangement NO C NC 5 Failure output transfer contact m 1 output E Chart end output transfer contact 45 WIS 2J transfer contact 3 4 eee o G 5 Remote contro signal input eee o KA 12 contact terminals 251 lt Alarm peer 9 output
94. SEX L four wire two wire ws Stop bit B8 Parity 504 BBRB ON SW3 im m m OFF I Address upper Minimum response time SWA o m m 12 3 aO Baud rate No 1 to 3 of SW1 Baud rate No 1 No 2 No 3 300 OFF OFF ON 600 OFF ON OFF 1200 OFF ON ON 2400 ON OFF OFF 4800 ON OFF ON 9600 ON ON OFF Default Setting 19200 ON ON ON 38400 OFF OFF OFF Data length No 4 of SW1 Data length No 4 pi OFF 8 ON lt Default Setting 3 1 6 IM DR232 01E 3 5 Connecting the Interface Cables Parity No 1 to 2 of SW2 Parity No 1 No 2 None OFF OFF ODD OFF ON EVEN ON OFF Default Setting Stop bit No 3 of SW2 Stop bit No 3 1 OFF Default Setting 2 ON Switch between four wire two wire systems No 4 of SW2 four wire two wire No 4 four wire OFF lt Default Setting two wire ON Minimum response time No 1 to 3 of SW3 Minimum response time No 1 No 2 No 3 Oms OFF OFF OFF Default Setting 10ms OFF OFF ON 20ms OFF ON OFF 50ms OFF ON ON 100ms ON OFF OFF Address No 4 of SW3 and No 1 to 4 of SW4 Address No 4 SW3 No 1 SW4 No 2 SW4 No 3 SW4 4 5 4 1 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON Default Setting 2 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 3 OFF OFF OFF ON ON 4 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON 6 OFF OFF ON ON OFF 7 OF
95. Section 3 4 Installing the Chart and Ribbon Cassette s there enough chart paper left The remaining chart paper length is printed in the left margin of the chart at 20 cm intervals When replacing the chart paper see Section 3 4 Installing the Chart and Ribbon Cassette If problems develop with the recorder see Section 13 3 Troubleshooting Recommended parts replacement period It is necessary that recorder parts be replaced periodically for use of the recorder over an extended period of time The table below shows the recommended parts replacement periods for specific parts that wear out These replacement periods indicate where the recorders have been used under normal operating conditions When replacing parts refer to these replacement periods taking the actual operating conditions into consideration When replacing parts other than the chart paper ribbon cassette or fuse please contact your nearest Sales representative Addresses may be found on the back cover of this manual Part Part number Replacement Description period in years Display B9233KJ 3 4 30 000 hours Fuse A1350EF 2 For AC power supply 2 5A time lag fuse Fuse B9573TZ 10 For printer board 500 mA Motor B9233EA 5 For chart paper Motor DR232 B9232CM 5 For carriage with a screw shaft Motor DR242 B9233EF 5 For carriage with a screw shaft Motor B9233GR 3 For ribbon cassette Lithium battery 9234 7 10 For back
96. Values Engineering Units and Selected Display Mode Same as for the sub display 1 Others Same as for the sub display 1 Points to Note when Using the AUTO Display When all three displays are set to AUTO display the main display will start displaying data of the channel with the smallest channel number on sub display 1 data of the next two channels will be displayed while on sub display 2 data of the next two channels will be displayed When the data are updated the display will be replaced with data of the next consecutive channel When the input type of all channels is set to SKIP then depending on the display as described below ALL SKIP will be displayed When the main display is set to AUTO display then this will be displayed settings on the main display regardless of the settings of sub display 1 and 2 When sub display 1 is set to AUTO display and the main display is set to any other mode than AUTO then this will be displayed on sub display 1 regardless the setting of sub display 2 When sub display 2 is set to AUTO display and the main display is set to any other mode than AUTO and sub display 1 to any other mode than AUTO then this will be displayed on sub display 2 When on any of the main sub display1 or sub display 2 ALL SKIP appears other displays which may have been set to AUTO will turn blank Only the selected display mode on sub display 1 and the status display will appe
97. a reference point to the time of starting Selecting the Number of Columns for Digital Printouts You can select how many columns where one column equals data of one channel will be used in one line for printing out measurement data Selection of the Pitch of Channel Printouts You can select at which distance the channel numbers or tags will be printed You can also select this printout OFF When tags have been selected this distance applies to the tag printout Selection of the Pitch of Title Printouts You can select at which distances the title will be repeatedly printed You can also select this printout OFF Selection of the Scaled Values Printout You can select the printing pattern for scaled values refer to page 2 9 You can also select this printout OFF Selection of the Reference Point of Scaled Values You can select whether or not to print a reference point for the positions of the scaled values Items for Logging Mode Selection of the Recording Direction Horizontal Vertical You can select whether printouts will occur in horizontal or vertical direction Example of a printout in horizontal direction ni d Lodi i I direction IM DR232 01E 2 7 suonoun4 2 3 Recording Functions Recording Colors Recording Interval In the trend recording the color of the recording can be selected per channel The colors which can be selected are black
98. although new settings selections will not be kept 4 New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Main menu Lower menu CHART ENTER CHART SPEED _100mm H ENTER gt Chart Speed Max 1500mm H 4 GET OK ESC Setting Chart Speed 2 1 Press the SET key for three seconds to enter the SET3 menu 2 Select set using the GS keys 3 To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept 4 New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Main menu 5 Lower menu CHART2 ENTER SECOND SPEED 100mm H ENTER Chart Speed Max 1500mm H 4 TIMER MODE RELATIVE ENTER H 00 01 00 gt Set Day amp Time DD 00 OXY GET 5 gt TIMER MODE ABSOLUTE ENTER 4 TIME 1h ENTER 1min 2min 3min 4min 5min 6min 10min 12min 15min 20min 30min 1h 2h 3h 4h 6h 8h 12h 24h i REF TIME 00 00 ENTER 4 SET OK ESC 6 4 DR232 01E 6 2 Setting the Chart Speed Explanation Chart Speed 1 CHART This setting specifies the chart speed of ordinary trend recordings The setting ranges from 1 to 1500mm h in 1 mm steps The default setting is 100mm h Chart Speed 2 CHART2 This settin
99. be installed External dimensions and weight Type External dimensions W x H x D mm Weight kg DU100 11 apporox 57x137x88 0 5 DU100 12 apporox 57x137x88 0 5 DU100 21 apporox 114x137x88 1 0 00100 22 114 137 88 1 0 00100 31 172 137 88 1 5 00100 32 172 137 88 1 5 00200 11 57 137 88 0 5 00200 12 57 137 88 0 5 00200 21 114 137 88 1 0 00200 22 114 137 88 1 0 00200 31 172 137 88 1 5 00200 32 172 137 88 1 5 DR232 01E 14 13 14 3 Specifications of mA input Module Style Number S5 Model Code Number of Input Channels Terminal Configuration and Shortest Measurement Interval Model Code Number of Channels Terminal Configuration Shortest Measurement Interval DU300 11 10 Screw 0 5s DU300 12 10 Clamp 0 5s Method of Input Non balanced floating input with isolation between channels separated channels Resolution of A D Conversion 20000 Integral Time of A D Conversion Manual or automatic selection between 20 ms 50 Hz 16 7 ms 60 Hz and 100 ms 10 Hz Except auto switch does not function on the subunit DS400 DS600 of a DC power supply model Selecting AUTO will set the A D integration time to 20 ms 50 Hz Shortest Measurement Interval and Cutoff Frequency When the lowpa
100. by the crimp on lugs manufacture and that the crimp on lugs and tool must be matched to the wire size To prevent electric shock do not touch the terminal after wiring and make sure to re apply the cover AN CAUTION Do not apply an input voltage exceeding the following levels to each terminal of the universal or DCV TC DI input module Otherwise the internal circuits may be damaged Max allowable input voltage 2 VDC range or less RTD TC and DI CONT 10 VDC 6 to 20 VDC range DI LEVEL 60 VDC Max common mode noise voltage 250 VACrms 50 60Hz For the maximum voltage of the remote control signal input see DI remote control of recorder functions on page 14 14 The overvoltage category of each input module is CAT II IEC 1010 1 1 Check that the power switch of this instrument is turned off 2 Remove the terminal cover the figure below shows DU100 11 Terminal cover e Screws for fastening the cover 3 Fasten the signal wires to the terminals as shown in the figure on the next page 4 Re apply the terminal cover and fasten the screws Nolo Make sure that the equipment connected to the signal in output conforms IEC CSA 950 or IEC CSA 1010 Also make sure to use cables that conform to IEC CSA standards In case you are using an internal RJC in case of thermocouple input the following considerations are necessary to stabilize the temperature at th
101. can be digitally printed by a key operation or eventlaction function Zone recording Recording width and recording positions 0 and 100 positions can be set in mm units for each channel in case of dot recording Partial compression A part of the amplitude can be compressed in case of dot recording only one boundary Display Display method VFD 5 x 7 dot matrix 3 rows Number of characters Main display 22 large characters 1 row Sub display 1 and 2 40 small characters 2 rows Displayed contents Digital value display data for freely selected channels can be displayed on each row 1 channel per line max 5 rows channel No or tag up to 7 characters alarm search measurement values engineering unit Bargraph display measurement data of the main display are displayed as a bargraph Auxiliary data clock alarm status alarm relay status logging ON OFF recorder operation Alarms when equipped with Alarm module Number of settings Up to four alarms can be set for each channel Kind of alarms selection from higher limit lower limit difference higher limit difference lower limit higher limit on rate of change lower limit on rate of change Rate of change alarm time interval Can be set to measurement interval x 1 to 15 common to both rising and falling limits Output mode Energize de energize setting AND OR mode setting and output hold non hold setting can be made common to all channels A maximum number of 6 reflash
102. channel for difference between channels 2 16 5 3 Reference junction compensation sss See RJC REFLASH Reflashing alarm Registration of details set selected with SET UP menu 10 23 RELATIVE relative time June tec reete 2 8 6 3 Relay for alarm output energizing de energizing setting 2 14 10 11 Remote control REMOTE eee 2 18 3 26 9 9 Replacement period for parts sse 13 1 Report ON OFF orita EEEE A SENA peor ERU START A E STOP ANAIAREN EA Reset PAN Feina A See Alarm x oen c eee een See Timer reset Resistance temperature detector sss See RTD Ribbon eG Dv vc RC ORO Rl e 3 3 7 to 3 9 RIC 2 3 10 13 dep 2 19 5 3 RS 232C Interface ade iE CH n 2 19 3 16 RS 232C module eee tone n 5 1 5 3 15 RS 422 A RS 485 Interface 2 19 3 18 RS 422 A RS 485 module 5 1 6 3 17 RTD eb 2 3 5 3 S Scan interval 4 eine RN CUBE ERN See Interval Scale Check See also Values 10 5 Scale value ze e e RENE See value Screwssliaft aai in e DERE TIE Dee 3 7 13 1 Screw Terminals ps be 2 3 1 4 1 5 3 19 3 30 Set up data
103. computation channels RRJC Remote RJC available if the instrument is equipped with the optional MATH function In cases where the object is located in distance for temperature measurement using thermocouples the temperature of the object can be measured without using a number of expensive thermocouples if a junction terminal is installed near the object This method requires the object to be connected to the terminal via a thermocouple and the terminal to this instrument via copper lead wires Furthermore the junction terminal needs to be connected to an input terminal of this instrument via a thermocouple The temperature of the junction terminal is then measured to carry out compensation for the reference contact point used for measurement of temperature of the object then finally temperature of the object is measured Junction terminal This instrument to be provided by the customer Thermocoupler Reference channel 5 Copper lead wire TET NS E MR Thermocoupler terminals Tug ur OO Ce zar EM Q VEN MSIE M V Re IO cm Copper lead wire Thermocoupler 1 G Q e eae Cs A E a Thermocouplers of the same type must be used Computing amp Report Function Option This function can print the results of a statistical calculation of data on a specif
104. contents of the file The following information of the read file is displayed r Sample rate intervals at which data was saved r Date time on which a trigger event took place Saving start date time in the case where saving was carried out in DIRECT mode r Model type on which data was saved Number of pieces of data per channel Data No in effect when the trigger event took place Always 1 if saving was carried out without DIRECT or PRE TRIGGER settings made gt MODEL EXPANDABLE 496 07 07 00 00 LENGTH 20000 gt SAMPLE 10 Sec TRIG DATA 1 ENTER key CHANNEL 201 60 SONS 201 BBE BREED BERR RRR ONN 231 BERR I SEES Channel is changed if this digit is changed L Status of channel Nos 201 to 230 m Data available 1 No data available Status of channel Nos 231 to 260 Data available L1 No data available Displaying recording the read data To display or record the read data it is necessary to assign the read data to computation channels A01 to A60 using the SET menu This assignment is still possible even if the instrument is not equipped with the optional computation function Assign the following channels to computation channels A01 to A60 e M001 to M300 Read data for measurement channels e MAOI to MA60 Read da
105. control IM DR232 01E 2 1 suonoun4 2 1 Display Functions Display for Setting the Type of Input Computation and Recording Conditions Menus for setting each of the following functions will be displayed measurement input functions refer to page 2 3 recording functions refer to page 2 5 alarm functions refer to page 2 13 calculation functions refer to page 2 16 event action function key lock function and external in output function refer to page 2 17 18 Display for Setting Fundamental Functions Menus for performing fundamental settings will be displayed 2 2 IM DR232 01E 2 2 Measurement Input Functions Input Type DC Voltage Measurements can be done after selecting the measurement range per channel The minimum range is 20mV the maximum range is 50V Thermocouple Measurements can be done after selecting the type of thermocouple per channel The available types are R S B K E J T L U N W and KPvsAUTFE Reference Junction Compensation RJC can be set to either use Internal RJC INT or External RJC EXT per channel Burnout function can be set OFF per channel or it can be selected in which direction the trend line will move if burnout occurs right or left Resistance Temperature Detector Measurements can be done after selecting the type of resistance temperature detector RTD per channel The available 17 types are Pt100 1mA Pt100 2mA JPt100 1mA JPt100 2mA Pt50 2mA Ni1
106. display data of two channels are displayed here simultaneously on each display Other display modes cannot be selected Channel No Difference between Channels delta Alarms and Selected Display Mode Same as for the AUTO display refer to page 4 3 Measurement Values Same as for the AUTO display refer to page 4 3 except for the following When the input type of the channel is set to SKIP then SKIP will be displayed When the channel other than the channel of the input module is selected appears Engineering Units Same as for the AUTO display refer to page 4 3 except for the following When the input type of the channel is set to SKIP then no engineering unit will be displayed IM DR232 01E 44 Using the ALARM SEARCH Display Relevant Keys Operating Procedure Explanation DISP MODE C RECORD ESC FUNC PRINT GO FEED INS DEL RANGE ALARM KR M FUNC 1 CHART SET enter mrunc2 ALARM SEARCH Display for the Main Display 1 Select the main display using the DISP key 2 Select SER using the MODE key Sub display 1 003 0 0054V 004 0 0319V ASER ALARM SEARCH Display for Sub display 1 1 Select sub display 1 using the DISP key 2 Select SER using the MODE key Sub display 1 004 0 0269V 005 RH 0 0248V SER ALARM SEARCH Display for Sub display 2 1 Select sub display 2
107. display presents the operation display mode or a menu other than the SET UP menu first turn off the power switch 2 Turn the switch back on while pressing the DISP key and continue pressing the DISP key for about 5 seconds Select set using the GS keys If exiting the following lower menu setting halfway press the MODE ESC key The display returns to the main menu to which the lower menu belongs However newly set or selected contents are canceled When setting proceeds to the display for the setting end the newly set or selected contents are established 10 20 IM DR232 01E 10 9 Setting SET SET3 Menu Main menu SETUP CSKA Lower menu n SET PARM ENTER PANEL SYSTEM ENTER DIRUTA SYSTEM SET ENTER SET PARM SET ESC O O sETSET3 OFF PANEL UNIT ENTER 4 UNIT SET ENTER ale SET SET3 OFF PANEL MATH ENTER 4 MATH SET ENTER ale SET SET3 OFF PANEL CONST ENTER 4 CONST SET ENTER al SET SET3 OFF PANEL MEMORY ENTER 4 MEMORY SET ENTER D SET SET3 OFF PANEL FLOPPY ENTER 4 FLOPPY SET ENTER SET SET3 OFF PANEL CHART2 ENTER 4 CHART2 SET3 ENTER C2 SET SET3 OFF PANEL ZONE ENTER 4 ZONE SET3 ENTER CY SET SET3 OFF PANEL PARTIAL ENTER 4 PARTIAL SET3 ENTER CY SET SET3 OFF PANEL
108. each input output module must be the same as or lower than that of the main unit or subunit to which the module is connected 2 the release number of a dedicated software package must be the same or higher than the style number of the main unit or subunit where the package is installed and where it performs control Any equipment software not meeting these requirements might have incompatible areas with your system configuration In this manual equipment of style S8 is explained For unsupported functions as classified by the style number see the next page The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice as a result of improvements in the instrument s performance and functions Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of its contents However should you have any questions or find any errors please contact your nearest YOKOGAWA representative as listed on the back cover of this manual Copying or reproduction of all or any part of the contents of this manual without permission is strictly prohibited DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation 1st Edition January 1996 2nd Edition February 1996 3rd Edition June 1996 4th Edition November 1996 5th Edition March 1997 6th Edition November 1997 7th Edition November 1998 8th Edition June 2000
109. etai t Se Ree iie RS 13 3 Error Codes 2 evan dre Hv e EP REB PA ERU Y 13 4 lenior 13 6 Chapter 14 Specifications Index 14 1 Specifications of DR232 DR242 and DS400 DS600 essere 14 1 14 2 Universal Input Module and DCV TC DI Input Module eee 14 11 14 3 Specifications of mA input Module 14 4 Specifications of Power Monitor Module 14 5 Specifications of Strain Input 2 2 0222 2 00000000100000000000050000 14 6 Specifications of Pulse Input Module esee enne nennen nennen nene 14 7 Specifications of Digital Input module 14 82 Alarni eae RR ERE 149 DUDO Module iere te RU EG HN IIR ARE eS 14 10 Communication Interface Module eese 14 11 Specifications of Extension Module and Extension Base 14 12 Dimensional Drawings em etre tre ri e P e eei 12 IM DR232 01E List of Menus and Set up Data The following is a list of set up data procedures to switch to different setting modes and setting menu Measurement Condition Settings Chart Speed Settings Recording Settings Display Settings Alarm Settings Parameters Procedure Selecting menu Reference Input type span linear RANGE key 001 01 VOLT 2V Chapter 5 scaling Units SET key SET UNIT Section 6 1 Mo
110. events using the event action functions so the time report making starts matches the time the report is created data items included in the first round of report making are one data item greater in number than those included in the second or any subsequent round of report making Processing Against Absence of Measurement Measurement may not take place if the DR recorder is loaded beyond its processing capability If absence of measurement occurs the DR recorder compensates for the missing data with the data it measures immediately after recovering from the absence of measurement the data for the period with no measurement thus match those acquired immediately after recovering from the absence of measurement 10 32 IM DR232 01E 10 12 Working with the Report Function If Power Failure Occurs While Report Function Is Active The DR recorder takes different actions depending on the length of a power failure If the power failure time is longer than 12 hours The DR recorder makes a report immediately after it recovers from the power failure and then stops making reports It does not execute printing based on the settings for automatic printing Print out reports either using the communication function or from the FUNC menu Results of computing The DR recorder computes data measured up to the point immediately before the power failure Time of report making The time when the power failure occurred If the power failure is less than
111. for a month starting at a specified date and time These types of report making can be turned on or off separately Output of the Results of Computing for Reports The DR recorder prints the results on a recording chart or send them to a report output Output Formats of the Results of Computing for Reports Hourly report Standard format Daily report Standard format or enhanced format Standard format results of computing daily reports Enhanced format results of computing daily reports plus results of computing hourly reports Monthly report Standard format or enhanced format Standard format results of computing monthly reports Enhanced format results of computing monthly reports plus results of computing daily reports The enhanced format applies to either daily reports or monthly reports only Either the average instantaneous value or sum in each computing of a report Types of Computing for Reports AVE Average maximum and minimum over a preset interval INST Instantaneous value at the time of report making SUM Sum and cumulative sum over a preset interval Sum Cumulative Sum Hourly report Hourly sum Sum over 24 hours resets at the time to make up a daily report Daily report Daily sum Sum over a month resets at the time to make up a monthly report Monthly report Monthly sum Not applicable Unit Conversion SUM only When inputs over a unit of time are integrated the unit conversion compensates for any discrepancy in the u
112. fuse turn OFF the power and disconnect the power source Do not use a different fuse or short circuit the fuse holder Do not Remove any Covers There are some areas with high voltages Do not remove any cover if the power supply is connected The cover should be removed by qualified personnel only External Connection To ground securely connect the protective grounding before connecting to measurement or control unit n IM DR232 01E 7 How to Use this Manual This User s Manual consists of the following twelve chapters and Index Chapter Title Description Chapter 1 System Configuration Explains the position of the DR within DARWIN its configuration etc Chapter 2 Functions Explains the functions of the DR Operating procedures are not explained here Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring Describes cautions for use explains how to install and wire the DR the power cord how to switch ON OFF the DR how to set the date time explains the noise filter etc Chapter 4 Setting the Monitor Mode Display Explains the display in the monitor mode Chapter 5 Setting the Input Type Recording Span Linear Scaling Explains the operations when setting the input type recording span and linear scaling function Chapter 6 Setting the Recording Conditions Explains the operations w
113. if the temperature changes rapidly In case of thermocouple input this might result in erroneous measurements In those cases allow the instrument to achieve eqailibrium with to its new environment for at least one hour before starting operation Never install the instrument in any of the following locations in direct sunlight or near heat sources where an excessive amount of soot steam dust or corrosive gases are present near strong magnetic field sources near high voltage equipment or power lines where the level of mechanical vibrations is high e in an unstable place Installation Method DR232 Can be used on a desk top installed on the floor or rack mounted Always install the instrument vertically saDesk top or floor installation Install the instrument vertically on a horizontal flat floor as shown below 3 2 IM DR232 01E 3 2 How to Install Rack mounting The following fittings can be supplied for rack mounting Name Model Description Rack mount fitting DV400 013 Conforming to ANSI EIA 266 25 265 9 1 190 5 0 5 i 37 External dimensions and rack mounting dimensions for the DR232 are shown below To install the rack mount fitting on the instrument remove the screws at the right and left forward of the instrument and use the mounting screws attached to the rack mount fitting Be careful that right and left screws have different lengths The screw at the ri
114. key lock is executed the turning on off of the power switch DISP MODE key operation and cursor key operation are effective Other than the above whether operation of the following keys is made effective or locked can be selected Selectable keys RECORD FEED PRINT FUNC M FUNCI and M FUNC2 Choice FREE made effective LOCK locked The default setting is LOCK Setting Password A CODE NUMBER Set a password for executing resetting key lock Can be set in the range of 0 to 9999 The default setting is 0 Note In order to make the set or selected contents effective the contents must be registered For details see page 10 23 To return from the SET UP menu to the operation display mode select END in the main menu For details see page 10 23 10 16 IM DR232 01E 10 8 Setting FUNC FUNC3 Menu Relevant Keys ESC Operating Procedure Main menu SET UP ___ Peg e SETUP FUNC PARM rcp QO C INS DEL Select Setting Parameter JELAY BURN OUT RJC COLOR LOCK FUNG PARM CA Gag ser LewrER Enter the SET UP menu in the following procedure 1 When the display presents the operation display mode or a menu other than the SET UP menu first turn off the power switch 2 Turn the switch back on while pressing the DISP key and continue pressing the DISP key for about 5
115. measured data computed data and set up data This function is available if the instrument is equipped with a floppy disk drive This function enables saving of data to the internal RAM disk or floppy disk and reading of data into the instrument Starting stopping of computation reset clear status clear and group reset This function is available if the instrument is equipped with the computation function or equipped with a floppy disk drive This function enables starting and stopping of computation and resetting and clearing of computed data Flag Valid only for models with mathematical option M1 Set the flag to 1 Key Lock Function This function prevents alterations by careless key operations When the key lock function is activated the indicator KEYLOCK at the right side of the display will be lit All key operations except power ON OFF DISP MODE key and the cursor will then be disabled However you can preset whether RECORD FEED PRINT FUNC M FUNCI M FUNC2 keys will remain operable even after key lock has been set Furthermore when activating or releasing the key lock a menu for password verification appears to prevent the key lock to be used by unauthorized operators IM DR232 01E 2 17 suonoun4 2 6 Other Functions External In Output Function alarm module or DI DO module is required Alarm Output This output can be performed from the internal relay in the alarm module or the DI DO module Th
116. not OFF not printed ON printed The default setting is ON Selection of Number of Columns for Digital Printing DIGITAL PR CLMN Select to print measured values for the number of channels in a horizontal line Select 1 2 3 or 4 The default setting is 1 If TAG has been selected in selecting the channel number TAG this is limited to 3 columns If TAG uses 16 characters the TAG entry is limited to two columns Selection of Channel Number Printing Pitch CHANNEL PITCH In dot recording select how many millimeters are taken as the channel number printing interval When TAG has been selected in channel number TAG selection the TAG corresponding to the channel number is printed OFF not printed 5 0 mm printed every 5 0 mm 12 5 mm printed every 12 5 mm The default setting is 5 0 mm Selection of Title Printing Pitch TITLE PITCH In dot recording select how many millimeters are taken as the title printing interval For setting a title see Section 6 7 Entering Messages Headers and Title page 6 15 OFF not printed 600 mm printed every 600 mm 1500 mm printed every 1500 mm The default setting is 1500 mm Selection of Scale Check Mark Printing SCALE TIC PR In dot recording select whether a tic mark indicating the scale mark positions is printed or not For setting the scale mark printing see Section 6 6 Setting Scale Printout List Printout and List Format page 6 13
117. not using the instrument for a long time When the instrument is not being used for an extensive period of time unplug the power cord from the outlet when using an adapter for direct wiring to the power supply disconnect the power cord from the outlet IM DR232 01E pue uoneyyersu 3 2 How to Install Installation Conditions The instrument must be installed in a location where the following conditions are met Ambient temperature and humidity Ambient temperature 0 to 50 C However in case you mount the AC power supply model subunits DS400 DS600 directly to a panel or if you apply the DIN rail or mount them in a rack it is possible to use them in a range of 10 to 60 C A e When the environmental temperature is 50 C or more the temperature of the rear panel may rise to more than 70 C Thus touching the rear panel under these circumstances has the danger of sustaining burns To prevent a fire always use the instrument in a vertical position and do not block the upper side of the modules a space of at least 3cm is necessary Ambient humidity 20 to 80 RH for 10 to 40 C 10 to 50 RH for 40 to 50 C 5 to 30 RH for 50 to 60 C However no condensation should be present Installation location Room Installation height Altitude up to 2 000 m Note Internal condensation may occur if the instrument is moved to another place where both the ambient temperature and humidity are higher or
118. of rdg 0 3 C 0 1 C Nil00 ImA e 200 0 to 250 0 C 30 0596 of rdg 0 3 C SAMA Nil00 ImA DIN 6 60 0 to 180 0 C 30 0596 of rdg 0 3 C Nil200mA 7 70 0to 200 0 C J263 B 0 0 to 300 0K 0 05 of rdg 0 3K 0 1K Cul0 GE 8 200 0 to 300 0 C 30 296 of rdg 0 7 C L amp N g Cul0 WEED 8 Cul0 BAILEY 14 12 High resolution RTD Pt100 1mA 5 140 00 to 150 00 C 0 05 of rdg 0 3 C Pt100 2mA 5 70 00 to 70 00 C 0 05 of rdg 0 3 C 0 019C JPt100 1mA 5 2140 00 150 00 C 0 05 of rdg 0 3 C JPt100 2mA 5 70 00 to 70 00 C 0 05 of rdg 0 3 C Contact Voltage input Off for a voltage of less Off for a voltage of less than 2 4V than 2 4V On for a voltage of 2 4V On for a voltage of 2 4V or more or more TTL TTL Contact input On Off of contact On Off of contact 1 R S B K E J T ANSI IEC 584 DIN IEC 584 JIS 1602 1981 6 SAMA DIN 2 L Fe CuNi DIN43710 U Cu CuNi DIN 43710 7 McGRAW EDISON COMPANY 3 N Nicrosil Nisil IEC 584 DIN IEC 584 8 ranges to which accuracy applies 4 gt W W 5 RE W 26 Re Hoskins Mfg Co Cul0 GE 84 4 to 170 0 C 5 Pt503JIS 1604 1981 JIS C 1606 1986 10 L amp N 75 0 to 150 0 C Pt100 JIS C 1604 1989 JIS 1606 1989 IEC 751 DIN IEC 751 10 WEED 200 0 to 250 0 C JPt100 JIS C 1604 1981 JIS C 1606 1989 Cul0 BAILEY 200 0 to 250 0 C Noise rejection
119. of setting 11 2 IM DR232 01E 11 1 Saving Measured and Computed Data Saving one file only using the event action function Main menu SET 1 C A MEMORY ENTER gt MEMORY WRITE ENTER CH_SET WRITE READ SAVE LOAD COPY DELETE INFO INIT 4 WRITE MODE TRIGER ENTER DIRECT TRIGER REPEAT STOP 4 WRITE file ENTER AAA BBB CCC 4 WRITE FILE DDDD ENTER 4 WRITE SAMPLE INTVL ENTER INTVL 1min 2min 5min 10min LOGIC 4 WRITE LENGTH 1k ENTER 10 20 30 40 50 100 200 300 400 500 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 10k 20k 30k 40k 50k 4 WRITE PRE TRIG 10 ENTER 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 4 ESC WRITE START End of setting Saving files repeatedly using the event action function Main menu sET 1 T MEMORY ENTER MEMOR Y WRITE ENTER CH_SET WRITE READ SAVE LOAD COPY DELETE INFO INIT 4 WRITE MODE REPEAT ENTER DIRECT TRIGER REPEAT STOP 4 WRITE file ENTER AAA BBB CCC 4 WRITE FILE DDDD ENTER 4 WRITE SAMPLE INTVL ENTER INTVL 1min 2min 5min 10min LOGIC WRITE LENGTH 1k 10 20 30 40 50 100 200 300 400 500 1k 2k Sk 4k 5k 10k 20k 30k 40k 50k 4 WRITE PRE TRIG 10 ENTER 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 J ESC WRITE START End of setting IM DR232 01E 11 3 ejeg dn jeg pue pejnduio5 pounseayy
120. on modular architecture this group of next generation data acquisition systems is called DARWIN Data Acquistion and Recording Windows Today many data acquisition networks are increasingly being linked together More than ever before large volume high speed accurate easy to use communication functions are essential in many disciplines In the world of measurement and control where the number of measurement points has increased sharply the ability to acquire information from a large number of points easily and economically is crucial Interfacing to a personal computer allows simplified utilization of the information while improving quality and efficiency DARWIN is based on a unique new concept to meet these needs The art of measurement is revolutionized by DARWIN which integrates functions of conventional recording and data logging Most existing data acquisition equipment has been the all in one type in which the measurement section and display recording section are contained in one box While this simplifies operation on the one hand it is difficult to adapt to changes in the measurement environment and also makes expansion difficult DARWIN uses a data acquisition engine and remote I O modules which are completely separate from each other It is an entirely new product line which quickly and flexibly copes with various restrictive conditions and changes in specifications Supported by a personal computer a whole line up can be create
121. ose pore o dra do e Ed 3 11 3 15 3 17 14 10 Boundary value for partial expanded recording 2 10 6 7 Buffer EAM 6 11 9 17 Messie vieres iip E 7 3 9 17 Alarm 6 11 clearing ose Rei oe 9 17 Digital number of columns for eene 2 7 10 5 Engineering Unit secs eee tee a 2 12 6 2 Headlet c is eet c e NARI 2 12 6 15 7 2 IB C 2 11 6 13 7 2 ENERO RU 2 12 7 2 9 10 MESSABE cine eve NEW PER ER TREE 2 12 6 15 7 3 9 10 printout sses 7 3 clearing 9 17 Tag cite etai 2 12 6 9 10 4 Title 2 6 2 7 2 12 6 15 2 12 Bubnout zou ERA MU 2 3 10 13 C Oin nET A i e ER RU ROTER peters 3 7 13 1 Carrying handle eere eren CREER 2 2 19 Chart chart cassette chart 4 3 5 to 3 9 Chart end output eterna 2 18 3 26 CHART o e 6 4 Chart Speed ioe oot etre er dee 2 5 2 8 6 4 6 5 14 6 setting change 2 5 6 5 9 10 Clamp terminal uite e cete ede 2 to 4 1 4 3 26 CIO CK 2 1 4 13 CODE NUMBER See Password Component ty pe i cet ete eA 1 1 1 3
122. previous page 001 01 DI LEVL 4 001 01 DI LEVL ENTER LEVL CONT 4 _____ One CS 1 ENTER gt Span limit 0 1 4 GET OK ESC 002 02 DELTA REF 01 4 002 02 DELTA REF Ch 01 ENTER gt Select Channel No i SPAN 2 0000 2 0000V ENTER Span limit 2 0000 2 0000V i GET OK ESC 002 02 2NM FRJC Chz01 002 02 RRJC RJC Chz01 ENTER Select Channel No SPAN 0 0 1760 0 C ENTER am limit 0 0 1760 0 C GET OK ESC Setting the Channel No This setting specifies the channels to which the type of input and recording span applies Set a range of channels in the same unit whether you specify from what channel the first channel to what channel the last channel First Channel No Begin The first three characters on the main display show the number of the first channel to which settings apply A numeral in the first character position shows a unit number A numeral in the second character position represents a module number slot number Setting range Determined by the positions in which the input modules are connected For details see page 3 8 Last Channel No End The two characters following the first channel number show the number of the last channel to which settings apply Setting range See description of the above The first channel number The number of th
123. range max value min value x 0 05 TC RTD min value of the measurement range 109 Linear scaling 32000 or a minimum value of the recording span max value min value x 0 05 When a measurement value exceeds the following value will be displayed DC voltage a maximum value of the measuring range max value min value x 0 05 TC RTD min value of the measurement range 10 C Linear scaling 32000 or a maximum value of the recording span max value min value x 0 05 If the input module is not connected properly XXXXXX will be displayed While waiting for an input signal OOOOOO will be displayed Engineering Units If the channel number has been selected to appear on the display six characters are used for displaying engineering units If TAG has been selected to appear on the display only three characters are used for displaying units Only the first three characters of the unit setting will then be displayed even if the first character of the unit setting is a space When XXXXXX are displayed as measurement value no engineering unit will be displayed 001 d 0 0467V Measurement value Alarm pifference between channels Channel No 1st digit unit No A will be displayed in the case of optional computation channels 2nd digit slot No 3rd digit channel No in units of 1 Others If y
124. reach the final display of that setting T MEMORY ENTER MEMORY COPY ENTER CH SET WRITE READ SAVE LOAD COPY DELETE INFO INIT 4 COPY MODE TO FDD ENTER TOFDD FROM FDD 4 COPY TYPE DATA ENTER DATA PANEL 4 COPY FILE AAA ENTER AAA BBB CCC DDD 4 COPY CONVERT OFF ENTER 2 4 Copying CK COPY OK End of copy ESC COPY TYPE PANEL ENTER DATA PANEL 4 COPY FILE AAA ENTER AAA BBB CCC DDD 4 Copying COPY OK End of copy ESC COPY MODE FROM FDD ENTER TOFDD FROM FDD 4 COPY TYPE DATA ENTER DATA PANEL 4 COPY FILE AAA ENTER BBB CCC DDD Copying 4 COPY OK End of copy ESC IM DR232 01E 11 15 ejeg dn jeg pue pajndwog poinseayy 11 5 Copying a Data File Explanation Measured computed set up data is copied from the internal RAM disk to a floppy or vice versa Types of files that can be copied COPY TYPE DATA copies measured and computed data PANEL copies set up data Saving measured computed data to a floppy disk Data measured or computed using the instrument cannot be saved to a floppy disk directly It must be saved to the internal RAM disk first then copied to a floppy disk It is not possible to change the file name when copying the file Displaying recording measured computed data saved on a floppy disk using the instrument To use the instrument to display or record measured computed data copied to a floppy disk the file
125. rejection by integration type A D lowpass filter or moving averaging Input resistance Min 10MQ at 2V DC or lower thermocouple range Approx 1MQ at 6V DC or higher Insulation resistance Min 20MQ at 500V DC between the input terminal and ground IM DR232 01E 14 2 Universal Input Module and DCV TC DI Input Module Input bias current max 0 Dielectric strength Between input terminals 1000V AC 50 60Hz for one minute Between an input terminal and ground 1500V AC 50 60Hz for one minute Input source resistance DCV TC 2 or lower RTD 100 or lower per line Pt100Q 50 or lower per line Pt50Q 1Q or lower per line 100 Temperature coefficient Zero 0 01 of range C full span 0 01 of range C 0 02 of span C for Cul0Q Thermocouple burnout Detected in a thermocouple range On Off enabled current of 4 detectable pulse width of approx 5ms 2 kQ or lower is considered normal 100 or greater is considered disconnected Detection interval for thermocouple burnout 2 5 sec for a measurement period of 0 5 sec in all other cases each measurement interval Detection timing for thermocouple burnout The burnout condition is detected at each measurement interval However with a 10ch universal input module connected and a measurement interval of 0 5sec the minimum interval of the burnout detection becomes 2 5 sec Power consumption Included in the main unit or the subunit to which the module is to
126. screw 2s module DU100 22 20 clamp 2s DUI100 31 30ch screw 2s DU100 32 30ch clamp 2s DU200 11 10 screw 0 5s DU200 12 10ch clamp 0 58 mV TC Du200 21 20ch screw 2s DU200 22 20ch clamp 2s module 200 31 30ch screw 2s DU200 32 30ch clamp 2s Input method floating unbalanced input each channel mutually isolated channel independent The RTD range 00100 only has common potential terminal b A D resolution 20000 A D integration time 20ms 50H27 16 7ms 60Hz 100ms 10Hz or auto Except auto switch does not function on the subunit DS400 DS600 of a DC power supply model Selecting AUTO will set the A D integration time to 20 ms 50 Hz Minimum measurement interval Filter ON OFF ow pass filter OFF Low pass filter ON AID number integration 20ms 16 7ms 100 20ms 16 7ms 100ms of channels time 50 2 60 2 10Hz 50Hz 60Hz 10Hz 10 0 5s 4s 3s 12s 20 2s 5s 4s 15s 30 2s 6s 4s 20s 2s if the power monitor module is installed Normal operating temperature humidity 20 to 80 RH for 10 to 40 C 10 to 50 for 40 to 50 C 5 to 30 RH for 50 to 60 C no condensation Compensation for the reference junction Switchable internally or externally for each channel Compensation accuracy for the reference junction measured at 0 C where the input terminals are balanced Type R S B W
127. see page 9 17 Selecting a Message Printout This setting specifies whether to print a message on alarm occurrence and if so which message will be printed The default setting is OFF OFF No message will be printed Message No This setting can be selected from 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 and 20 When a message No has been selected where no message has been entered printout will not be carried out For details on setting messages refer to 6 7 on page 6 15 IM DR232 01E 6 11 suonipuoo 6 6 Setting Scale Printout List Printout and List Format Relevant Keys esr OS Gaz ESC SET SCALE PR RECORD gt Select Setting Parameter lDIGITAL PR MANUAL PR ALARM PR SCALE m repo CD C INS DEL KEYI ser EnreR Operating Procedure 1 Press the SET key for three seconds to enter the SET3 menu 2 Select set using the GS keys 3 To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept 4 New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Main menu SET Lowe
128. the END mode 20 With GS select the END mode ADJUST MODE END gt S_UNITO MODULE 0 DISPLAY CAL EXEC END 21 PRESS the ENTER key 22 With CS select STORE or ABORT A D ADJUST END ABORT gt S_UNITO MODULE 0 ABORT STORE 23 Press the ENTER key Return to operation 2 Terminating the calibration mode 24 When you return to normal measurement after completing calibration turn off the power and then back on CAL EXEC mode for calibration of a specified range Items for calibration range Items for the calibration range vary depending on the type of module to be calibrated For use with universal input modules select the items for the calibration range from among the following 20 mV 60 mV 200 mV 2 V 6 V 20 V 50 V Pt 1 mA Pt 2 mA Pt 1 mA H Pt 2 mA H Cu 2mA When the DC V TC DI input module is selected RTD in the universal input module is not displayed The choice is 20 mA only for mA input modules For strain input modules select from 2k 20k 200k and INIT INIT Set defaults in the A D Adjustment section Calibration is necessary however after execution For digital input modules select from 60mV and 6V Displaying error messages The following error messages are displayed Attempted to remove the module during calibration Or hardware error ERROR145 Invalid calibrated data ERROR144 Note When calibrating a high precision RTD P
129. the analog trend mode The default setting is the full recording width of 250mm The left and right boundary of the recording zone left position and right position respectively correspond to respectively the left and right span of the recording span Tr of channel 1 of channel 2 Tr nd of channel 3 lt gt lt 2 1 Zone 2 Left position of zone 1 Right position of zone 1 left span of ch1 Scale values are used to mark the divisions of zones and three different scale format can be selected right span of ch1 Zone 3 IM DR232 01E suonoun4 2 3 Recording Functions Partially Expanded Recording When carrying out trend recording partially expanded recording enables you to compress a part of the recording span in order to examine the expanded other part of the span in more detail The left boundary of the recording span being 0 and the right boundary of the recording span being 100 a segment of the recording span can be compressed The following example shows a situation where 25 of the recording span has been compressed The points A B C D E and F before compression correspond to the points A D E and in the figure after compression The 25 left of the boundary shows 6 to OV whereas the 75 right of the boundary shows 0 to 6V Before compressing 6 5 4 3 2 HI 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 V Measu
130. to F on the dipswitch correspond to the address 10 to 15 respectively IM DR232 01E 3 5 Connecting the Interface Cables RS 232 C Communication Settings Communication parameters are set using the three switches located on the RS 232 C modules R Switch 1 e pos Switch 2 Switch 3 ON OFF Data length Baud rate ON OFF L Not used Stop bit Parity ON OFF I L Not used Handshake format Switch 1 and No 4 of switch 2 Baudrate dipswitch No 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 Switch 2 150 OFF OFF OFF OFF 300 OFF OFF ON OFF 600 OFF ON OFF OFF 1200 OFF ON ON OFF 2400 ON OFF OFF OFF 4800 ON OFF ON OFF 9600 ON ON OFF OFF lt initial value 19200 ON ON ON OFF 38400 OFF OFF OFF ON Data length dipswitch No 4 7 OFF 8 ON lt initial value Switch 2 Parity dipswitch No 1 No 2 NONE OFF OFF ODD OFF ON EVEN ON OFF initial value Stop bit dipswitch No 3 1 OFF lt initial value 2 ON Switch 3 Handshake format dipswitch No 1 No 2 No 3 no handshake OFF OFF OFF lt initial value XON DTR OFF OFF ON XON RTS OFF ON OFF CTS DTR OFF ON ON CTS RTS ON OFF OFF When the baud rate is set to 38400 there is no handshake Note When you are using the accessory standard software t
131. to the chart paper rest and check that the paper is fed properly Check this in the same way when the chart paper is fed manually without recording If the chart paper is not fed properly repeat the procedure from step 2 For details of turning the power on see page 3 31 12 When the chart paper approaches the end the words RENEW CHART in an scarlet strip on the paper appear Prepare a new set of chart paper 13 When the letters CHART in the status indicator in the display light it indicates that the paper has run out Replace the chart with a new one according to the above procedure To remove the chart paper from the chart rest open the chart rest cover and take out the paper IM DR232 01E 3 4 Installing the Chart and Ribbon Cassette Loading the Ribbon Cassette Preliminary Preparation If the carriage to which the ribbon cassette is to be mounted is located near the right end turn off the power and bring the carriage to a location near the left end by turning the screw shaft then load the ribbon cassette Set the RECORD key on the operation panel to OFF and set all the recording actions for the event action functions see page 9 1 to OFF so that recording does not start while loading the ribbon cassette If applicable turn off the power Note Do not perform recording without the ribbon cassette loaded otherwise the platen may be scratched or the chart paper may break Load the Ribbon Cassette in the DR232
132. 0 2 0000 1 0000 RO2 002 INST V 10 000 003 SUM L 2 400000E 01 4 800000 01 RO4 RO5 RO6 01 AVE unit06 20000 000 10000 000 30000 000 RO7 02 INST 200000 00 R08 A03 SUM 2 400000E 01 4 800000 01 R09 R10 Types of Units computing Results of Minimum or Maximum R60 Channels included in printing computing cumulative sum Axx computing channel Report channels Enhanced format Time to make report Starting time DAILY REPORT Jan 03 97 00 00 START Jan 01 97 00 00 RCH R01 R02 R03 R04 R05 R06 R07 R08 R09 R10 R60 Channels included in printing Axx computing channel MODE UNIT Jan 03 00 00 MIN TOTAL MAX Jan 02 01 00 Jan 02 02 00 Jan 03 00 00 TAG 001CH AVE V 1 0000 2 0000 1 0000 2 0000 2 0000 2 0000 INST V 10 000 9 000 9 000 10 000 SUM 1 2 400000E 01 4 800000E 01 1 000000E 0 1 000000E 00 1 0000008 00 01 AVE unit06 20000 000 10000 000 30000 000 10000 000 10000 000 10000 000 INST 200000 00 9999 99 9999 99 200000 00 SUM 2 400000E 01 4 800000 01 1 000000 0 1 000000E 00 1 000000 00 Types of Results of Minimum or Enhanced format section of report computing Units computing cumulative sum Maximum 154 of the result of computing at respective preset times for daily reports Report channels Note If any of the following conditions is true you cannot print reports even when the preset time to make a report arrives In that case the DR recorder prints repor
133. 0 KB Volume name Beginning the volume name with a space is not allowed If this happens an error will occur Note The communication function is disabled during formatting IM DR232 01E 11 25 ejeg dn jeg pue pejnduio5 pounseayy 12 1 Overview of the Computation Function Type Operator Example Description Addition 001 002 Obtain the sum of the measured data of channel 001 and channel 002 Subtraction 002 001 Obtain the difference of the measured data of channel 002 and channel 001 Multiplication 003 K1 Multiply constant K1 to the measured data of channel 003 Division 004 K2 Divide the measured data of channel 004 by constant K2 Power 005 006 Take the power of measured data of channel 005 with the measured data of channel 006 Absolute value ABSO ABS 001 Obtain the absolute value of the measured data of channel 001 Square root SQRO SQR 002 Obtain the square root of the measured data of channel 002 Common logarithm LOG LOG 003 Obtain the common logarithm of the measured data of channel 003 Natural Logarithm LN LN 004 Obtain the natural logarithm of the measured data of channel 004 Exponent EXPO EXP 005 Make the measured data of channel 005 to be x and obtain e be used as signs as in 001 Logical operators Type Operator Example Description Logical product AND 001 ANDO002 when channel 001 0 and chann
134. 00 1mA SAMA Nil00 1mA DIN Nil20 1mA J263 B Cul0GE Cul0L amp N CulOWEED Cul0BAILEY Pt100 1mA high resolution Pt100 2mA high resolution JPt100 1mA high resolution and JPt100 2mA high resolution Contact Input The type of contact input can be selected from voltage level input or contact input and recording can be set ON or OFF per channel In case of the voltage level input a voltage level up to 2 4V results in recording OFF whereas a voltage level of 2 4V or more results in recording ON DC Currents DC currents ranging from 20 mA to 20 mA can be measured by means of the built in 250 0 shunt resistors AC Voltages Currents The effective voltage effective current active power reactive power apparent power frequency power factor and phase angle can be measured The measuring range is common to all terminals The input terminals of the module with this input mode unlike those of modules with other input modes are not consistent with a setup screen in terms of the channel number Strain The module for this input mode supports the single gauge single gauge three wire not yet supported by the DU500 14 module adjacent side two gauge opposed side two gauge and four gauge methods If you have connected any new strain gauge or changed the measuring range go through initial balancing before starting measurement Pulses The module for this input mode can measure the number of pulses per second on a channel basis or dete
135. 0k 30k 40k 50k Some options cannot be selected depending on the number of channels to be saved or the number of computation channels Pre trigger PRE TRIGGER If REPEAT or TRIGGER has been selected as WRITE MODE data which occurs before the trigger event is activated can be saved within the specified data length Set the trigger timing in units of percentage 96 of the specified data length in steps of 10 Data which occurs before the trigger Trigger event Y 20 rM Data length 100 4 File name If DIRECT or TRIGGER has been selected as WRITE MODE the file name must consist of up to 8 characters If REPEAT has been selected as WRITE MODE the file name must be of up to 5 characters in length The lower 3 digits of the file name indicate the serial number 001 to 208 AUX CON PRN and CLOK cannot be used for a file name The identifier is DAT ejeg dn jes pue poinseayy 11 1 Saving Measured and Computed Data Data format Measured computed data is saved in binary format Data size Data size can be calculated using the following equations Measured data 2 bytes 1 data Computed data 4 bytes 1 data Header 576 64 x number of measurement channels number of computation channels bytes Data size 576 64 x number of measurement channels number of computation channels number of measurement channels x 2 number of comput
136. 1 R02 R03 R04 R05 RO6 R07 RO8 ROY R10T 4 RO1 ON 001 OFF ON 4 RO1 ON 001 ENTER 4 CALC MODE SUM ENTER INST AVE SUM 4 SUM UNIT sec ENTER INTVL sec min hour day 4 REPORT CH SET cotigurtion complete ESC gt END ENTER SETUP ABORT ABORT STORE ENTER Completes the configuration of the SETUP menu Printing Reports Main menu item SETUP Submenu items REPORT ENTER MODE PRINT ENTER SET CH_SET PRINT 4 REPORT PRINT ON ENTER OFF ON 4 OS REP PRINT SET configuration complete ESC gt h ENTER SETUP ABORT ESC ABORT STORE ENTER Completes the configuration of the SETUP menu 10 28 IM DR232 01E 10 12 Working with the Report Function The DR recorder calculates and processes an hour s day s or month s worth of measurement or computation data into instantaneous values averages and or sums to print the results in a predetermined format at a preset time The results can be delivered using the communication function or printed on a recording chart For more information on output using the communication function see the separate DR130 DR231 DR232 DR241 DR242 Communication Interface User s Manual IM DR231 11E You select from the choices in the FUNC menu which opens when you press the FUNC key to start stop report making or print reports
137. 2 or less OFF 100 or more Noise rejection Rejection by integration type A D lowpass filter Cut off frequency 50 60 10Hz Input resistance CONT Min 10 MQ LEVEL Approx 1 MQ Insulation resistance Min 20 MQ at 500 V DC between the input terminal and ground Dielectric strength Between input terminals 1000 V AC 50 60 Hz for one minute Between an input terminal and ground 1500 V AC 50 60 Hz for one minute Input source resistance LEVEL 2 or lower Power consumption Included in the main unit or the subunit to which the module is to be installed 14 24 IM DR232 01E 14 7 Specifications of Digital Input Module Dimensions Approximately 57 W x 137 H x 68 D mm Weight 0 5 kg Installation Category Overvoltage Category CAT II IEC 1010 IM DR232 01E 14 25 14 8 Alarm Module Style Number S2 Type Number of outputs Contact mode Terminal type Type Contact mode Terminal type DT200 11 4 Transfer contact NO C NC screw DT200 21 10 Make contact NO C screw Normal operating temperature humidity 20 to 80 RH for 0 to 40 C 10 to 50 RH for 40 to 50 C no condensation Output updating rate every measurement interval Contact mode Make contact normal open common contact type Transfer contact normal open common normal close type Energize de energize switchable Hold non hold switchable Reflash alarm up to
138. 22 A RS 485 interface module can be connected For details regarding operation and commands refer to IMDR231 11E Internal Illumination Option Clear internal illumination for easy distinction of traces is available as an option Internal illumination will be provided when the power is turned ON FDD DR232 1 DR242 1 This function enables saving reading of measured data computed data and set up data for SET mode to from the internal RAM disk and saving reading of set up data for SET and SETUP modes to from a floppy disk This also allows you to use events provided by the event action function as a trigger to save retrieve measured computed data to from the internal RAM or retrieve set up data when an event takes place Computation Function Option This function is available if the instrument is equipped with the computation function M1 model This function executes the following computations and displays and records the results Four arithmetical operations addition subtraction multiplication division square root absolute values common logarithm natural logarithm power logical product logical sum exclusive OR logical negation statistical operation relational operation Up to 60 channels can be used for computation It is also possible to use the event action function to start stop computation or clear data for computation channels Furthermore up to 4 levels of alarm upper limit alarm lower limit alarm can be set for
139. 242 10 Data acquisition software DP120 13 Only for models whose software code is 2 1 of these power cord types is supplied according to the instrument s suffix code IM DR232 01E 5 Checking the Contents of the Package Optional Accessories Optional Software Spares Name Model Description Extender module DV100 011 Extender base DV100 012 Extension cable DV200 000 Length 0 5m Extension cable DV200 001 Length 1m Extension cable DV200 002 Length 2m Extension cable DV200 005 Length 5m Extension cable DV200 010 Length 10m Extension cable DV200 020 Length 20m Extension cable DV200 050 Length 50m Extension cable DV200 100 Length 100m Extension cable DV200 200 Length 200m Extension cable DV200 300 Length 300m Extension cable DV200 400 Length 400m Extension cable DV200 500 Length 500m Shunt resistance DV300 011 10Q for screw Shunt resistance DV300 012 10Q for clamp Shunt resistance DV300 101 1000 for screw Shunt resistance DV300 102 100Q for clamp Shunt resistance DV300 251 250Q for screw Shunt resistance DV300 252 2500 for clamp Rack mount kit DV400 011 for DS400 600 Rack mount kit DV400 013 for DR232 Power cable DV400 051 between DR232 242 and DS400 600 Strain conversion cable DV450 001 Cable adapter DV250 001 For expanding cable AC adapter DV500 001 2 pin inlet w UL CSA cable Part No B9988Y A for DC100 DA100
140. 250 0VA 0 0 to 250 0VA 0 to 2500VA VA13 Apparent power 0 00 to 37 50VA 0 0 to 375 0VA 0 0 to 375 0VA 0 to 3750VA VAO Reactive power Varl Var2 Var3 0 00 to 12 50Var 0 0 to 125 0 Var 0 0 to 125 0 Var 0 to 1250Var Reactive power 0 00 to 25 00Var 0 0 to 250 0Var 0 0 to 250 0 Var 0 to 2500Var Var13 Reactive power 0 00 to 37 50 Var 0 0 to 375 0 Var 0 0 to 375 0 Var 0 to 3750Var Var0 Power factor 1 00 to 1 00 1 00 to 1 00 1 00 to 1 00 1 00 to 1 00 PFi i 1 2 3 13 0 Phase 80 0 to 80 0deg 80 0 to 80 0deg 80 0 to 80 0deg 80 0 to 80 0deg PHi i 1 2 3 13 0 Frequency 45 00 to 65 00Hz 45 00 to 65 00Hz 45 00 65 00Hz 45 00 to 65 00Hz FREQ Precautions in Measurement Input the voltage or current being measured at a level between 10 and 100 of the measuring range The DR recorder bases its calculations of all other parameters on the frequency of V1 Extra care must therefore be taken when setting the input level of V1 If the input level fails to fall within the given limits there is no guarantee that the measurement of any other parameters will be reliable IM DR232 01E 5 9 1eeur uedg Indul ayy funes 5 4 Configuring the Measuring Range and Recording Span or the Linear Scaling of a Strain Input Channel CS ESC 001 01 STRAIN 200k De Func
141. 3 Varl Var3 Varl3 Varl Var3 13 Varl VA3 Var0 Varl Var2 Var3 Frequency FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ Power factor PF PFI PF1 PF2 PF2 PF13 PF13 PF13 PFO Phase angle PH PHI PHI PH3 PHI PH3 PHI PH2 PH3 PHI PH2 PH3 PH13 PH13 PH13 PHO IM DR232 01E 14 4 Specifications of Power Monitor Module Continuously Applicable Maximum Voltage and Current Voltage 250 Vrms Current 5 Arms Crest Factor 3 maximum 600 Vpeak Maximum Common Mode Voltage 250 Vrms Common Mode Voltage Rejection Ratio Voltage and Current Ranges 0 02 of span when 250 V 45 to 65 Hz is imposed Input Resistance Voltage input 300 kQ minimum for AC voltages Current input 1 O maximum for AC currents Filter Moving average Wattage Calculation Use of M1 computing function Insulation Resistance Across output terminals and ground 20 MQ minimum Withstanding Voltage Across output terminals and ground 2 300 V AC 50 60 Hz 1 min Normal Operating Temperature Humidity Ranges 0 to 50 C 20 to 80 RH for an ambient temperature range of 0 to 40 C 10 to 50 RH for 40 to 50 C non condensing Power Consumption Included in the value of a system s installed main unit or sub unit Dimensions Approximately 57 W x 137 H x 99 D mm Weight Approximately 0 5 kg Installation Category Overvoltage Category CAT II IEC1010 IM DR232 01E 14 19 suoneoiieds 14 5 Spec
142. 32 approx 9kg DR242 approx 12kg with no modules installed Sub unit DS400 approx 0 9kg with 4 input modules installed approx 2 5kg Sub unit DS600 approx 1 1kg with 6 input modules installed approx 3 5kg with no modules installed Clock with calendar function Clock accuracy 100ppm However this does not include the delay less than 1 second caused when the power is switched ON and OFF once Fail Chart end output Contact output at rear of main unit one transfer contact Refer to 12 4 for functions specifications Set value backup Lithium battery backup approx 10 years at ambient temperature of 23 C Insulation resistance At least 20MQ between the power supply and ground between each terminal and ground and between each input terminal measured with 500 VDC Dielectric strength Between power supply terminal and ground of DR232 242 main unit 1500 VAC 50 60Hz for one minute Between input terminal and ground of DR232 242 main unit 1500 VAC 50 60Hz for one minute Between output terminal and ground of DR232 242 main unit 2300 VAC 50 60Hz for one minute 14 1 0 IM DR232 01E 14 2 Universal Input Module and DCV TC DI Input Module Style Number S2 Type Number of Channels Terminal Type and Minimum Measurement Interval Kind Type Minimum measurement DUIOO 11 10 screw 0 5s Universal DU100 12 10 clamp 0 5s input 00100 21 20
143. 4 001 01 AC 1Ph3W ENTER 1Ph2W 1Ph3W 3Ph3W 21 3Ph3W 3l 3Ph4W 4 RNG 250V 5A P1 D 250V 0 5A 250V 5A 25V 0 5A 25V 5A 4 RNG 250V 5A P1 ENTER P1 P3 P13 4 SPAN 125 0 125 0W ENTER gt Span Limit 125 0 to 125 0W 4 SET OK configuration complete ESC Setting Linear Scaling Main menu item 001 01 AC 1Ph3W gt Select Channel No Submenu items 4 001 01 AC 1Ph3W 2 001 01 1 gt Select Channel No Io 001 01 SCL AC 1Ph3W Press twice jy 001 01 SCL AC 1Ph3W ENTER 2k 20k 200k 4 RNG 250V 0 5A P13 D 250V 0 5A 250V 5A 25V 0 5A 25V 5A 4 RNG 250V 0 5A P13 LENTER P1 P2 P3 P13 4 SPAN 125 0 125 0W ENTER gt Span limit 125 0 to 125 0W 4 SCL 0 00 100 00 ENTER 4 SET OK configuration complete ESC IM DR232 01E 5 3 Configuring the Input Range and Recording Span or the Linear Scaling of a Power Monitoring Channel Explanation Setting the Channel Number This procedure sets the channel number for which you want to show and record the values of a parameter selected from the effective voltage effective current active power reactive power apparent power frequency power factor and phase angle which were calculated using the measured data Therefore it does not correlate with the terminals of an input module In this procedure determine from which channel starting channel to which channel endi
144. 5 39 0 13 720 315 055 23 2 S520 16 3 96 02 14 15 05 41 0 12 670 315 02 23 26 25 25 16 2 96 02 14 15 05 43 0 12 830 315 015 23205 840 16 1 96 02 14 15 05 45 0 12 350 315 01 23 2 COO noc Ted L Y J i Y 3 Saving date time Data Note The following special ASCII codes will be converted as follows Space 20H Q Space 20H u gt u 75H gt e 65H U Space 20H No copying is allowed during computing The communication function remains disabled during copying If you save data using a trigger a T precedes the time attached to the data saved at the time of triggering IM DR232 01E 11 19 ejeg dn jas pue pounseayy 11 7 Deleting a Data File Relevant Keys SET MEMORY Func PRINT 1 5 FEED 1 5 DEL gt Select Setting Parameter CHART SYSTEM UNIT MATH CONST MEMORY FLOPPY TRT C cuart ser enter 2 Press the SET key to enter the SET menu Select set using the CS keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting
145. 6 contacts can be specified Contact capacity 250V DC 0 1A with a resistor load 250V AC 2A with a resistor load 30V DC 2A with a resistor load Dielectric strength Between the output terminal and ground 2300V AC 50 60Hz for one minute Power consumption Included in the main unit or the subunit to which the module is to be installed External dimensions and weight Type External dimensions W x H x D mm Weight kg DT200 11 apporox 57x137x68 0 3 DT200 21 apporox 57x137x68 0 4 14 26 IM DR232 01E 14 9 DI DO Module Style Number S2 General Specifications DO Alarm output DO Failure output Terminal type Screw Normal operating temperature humidity 20 to 80 RH for 0 to 40 C 10 to 50 RH for 40 to 50 C no condensation Power consumption Included in the main unit or the subunit to which the module is to be installed Dielectric strength Between input terminal and ground 1500V AC 50 60Hz for one minute Between output terminal and ground 2300V AC 50 60Hz for one minute External dimensions Approx 57 W x 137 H x 68 D mm Weight 0 35kg Output update rate every measurement interval Contact mode Transfer contact NO C NC Energize de energize switchable hold non hold switchable Reflash alarm can be set Contact rating 250V DC 0 1A resistive load 250V AC 2A resistive load 30V DC 2A resistive load Function The output relay for a failure bec
146. AVE ENTER CH SET WRITE READ SAVE LOAD COPY DELETE INFO INIT 4 SAVE file ENTER AAA BBB CCC 4 C O SAVE FILE AAA ENTER 4 Saving 4 SAVE OK Ena of saving ESC FLOPPY ENTER FLOPPY SAVE ENTER gt Select Setting Parameter CHART SS SYSTEM UNIT MATH CONST MEMORY FLOPPY TR Keno CO ac runc 1 set enter 2 Press the SET key to enter the SET menu Select set using the CS keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting SAVE LOAD DELETE INFO FORMAT 4 SAVE file ENTER _____ SAVE FILE AAA ENTER Saving SAVE OK End of saving ESC 11 10 IM DR232 01E 11 3 Saving Set up Data Relevant Keys Saving set up data for the SETUP mode SETUP FLOPY sucer GO C Operating Procedure INS DEL gt Select Setting Parameter PRN ADJ SCAN INTV RECORD MATH FLOPPYT kevuoc OQ CHART SET ENTER M FUNC2 Carry out the following steps to enter the SET UP menu 1 If the SET UP menu is not currently displayed turn the power OFF 2 While holding the DISP key turn the p
147. Across channels 50 V DC except for DU500 14 Across output terminals and ground 1 500 V AC 1 min excluding DU500 14 Normal Operating Temperature Humidity Range 0 to 50 C 20 to 80 RH for an ambient temperature range of 0 to 40 C 10 to 50 RH for 40 to 50 C non condensing Power Consumption Included in the value of a system s installed main unit or sub unit Dimensions DU500 12 DU500 13 Approximately 114 3 W x 137 x 88 D mm 0500 14 Approximately 114 3 x 137 x 77 D mm Weight DV 500 12 13 O 6kg DV 500 14 0 8kg Installation Category Overvoltage Category CAT II IECI010 Accessory Bridge box 319300 120 Q IM DR232 01E 14 21 suoneoiieds 14 6 Specifications of Pulse Input Module Model Code Number of Input Channels Terminal Configuration and Shortest Measurement Interval Model Code Number of Channels Terminal Configuration Shortest Measurement Interval DU600 11 10 Screw 0 5 s The interval between data updates is fixed to one second Method of Input Potential with reference to the shared voltage of the COMMON line within the same module Types of Input Voltage free contact or open collector TTL or transistor Measurement Modes RATE instantaneous count mode Outputs the prescaled value of the count of pulses imposed over the last one second interval of measurement GATE instantaneous turn on time mode Outputs the prescaled values of the conta
148. After the list print terminates or stops the display returns to the S U LIST START If the setup list printing starts analog trend recording will stop After the printing is completed analog trend recording resumes 7 4 IM DR232 01E 8 1 Setting Alarms and Relays including internal switches Relevant Keys RECORD 001 01 1 OFF eee CID 5 zOFF 2 OFF 3 OFF 4zOFF eus LITE rune rj ser 2 Operating Procedure Press the ALARM key to enter the ALARM menu Select set using the GS keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you rach the final display of that setting Main menu 001 01 1 0OFF Select Channel No 4 001 01 1 OFF gt Select Channel No Lower menu 001 01 1 OFF gt 2 001 01 1 ENTER 1234 4 GET OK ESC L 00101 1 H 0 00 4 001 01 1 _ _ 00 00 gt Alarm Limit 0 00 100 00 4 RELAY OFF 4 A GET OK RELAY S01 D 4 RELAY S01 ENTER 4 G ET Explanation Selecting channel Nos Channels Nos A01 to A60 are available for computation channels optional Selecting the al
149. Balancing Equivalent to 410 000 for single gauge method Measuring Ranges and Accuracies As described below under the following operating conditions Ambient temperature 23 2 C ambient humidity 55 10 RH power supply voltage 90 to 250 VAC AC power supply 10 to 32 VDC the subunit of a DC power supply model only power supply frequency 50 60Hz within 1 AC power supply warm up time 30 minutes or more vibrations and others not affecting instrument operation Gauge Method Measuring Range Accuracy Resolution Single gauge 2000 to 2000 ue 0 596 of Range 0 1 pe 20000 to 20000 0 3 of Range pe 200000 to 200000 ue 0 3 of Range 10 pe Two gauge 1000 to 1000 ue 0 596 of Range 0 1 pe 10000 to 10000 ue 0 3 of Range 1 pe 100000 to 100000 ue 0 3 of Range 10 pe Four gauge 500 to 500 pe 0 5 of Range 0 1 5000 to 5000 ue 0 3 of Range 1 pe 50000 to 50000 pe 0 3 of Range 10 pe The Accuracies and Resolutions of the DU500 12 and DU500 13 models do not include the influence of the internal and contact resistance of the jumper setup switch 1 4 20 IM DR232 01E 14 5 Specifications of Strain Input Module Accuracy of Bridge Resistors 0 01 5 ppm C excludes contact resistance of the jumper setup switch Contact Resistance of the Jumper Setup Switch 100 mQ maximum Input Resistance 10 minimum Filter Third order sinc filter moving average Withstanding Voltage
150. Comp tati n ect ERIGI VERE EN RN 2 16 Coridit10IDzq e ee 2 1 Computation Computation error 0 12 9 12 10 Opera loi E aa 12 1 Equation e e ERRORS RR 12 1 to 12 5 eee eter ORE TENERE TE IRR 12 6 Starting stopping clearing resetting 12 7 12 8 Computed data SAVING 11 1 to 11 4 Reading eA RATER ERRORES RYE 11 5 to 11 7 Deleting Joco testet aree nv en 11 13 to 11 17 Copying alarm other items range see 9 12 9 13 Crimp on WU gS 3 13 D Data format uie ierit aeter 11 19 Data le gth u ete bee IRR CERE 3 15 3 17 BETIS VASTE 11 5 11 11 DC power terminal connector eene 5 3 31 DE VOlta SO se 2 3 5 3 DCV TC DI input module sene 4 1 4 3 20 IM DR232 01E Index 3 Xepu INDEX Deleting a character or numerical eese See Inserting deleting a character or numerical Destination channel for difference between channels 2 16 5 3 DI digital input aeterne noie 2 3 5 3 PSIG Me ea calle a 4 1 5 3 20 Difference between channels 2 16 5 3 4 2 5 3 Difference high low een See Alarm Digital printou
151. D setting in the SET UP mode DIGITAL PR TIMER No 1 ENTER 123456 MANUAL PR ENTER 001 01 MANUAL PR ON D ONBOOIMMEEEENEENEE HEB Select Channel No 4 001 01 MANUAL PR ON D ONBOOIMEEEEENEENE HEB Select Channel No i 001 01 MANUAL PR ON ENTER ONBOoOIMMEEEENEENE HEB OFF ON 4 GET OK ESC 6 8 IM DR232 01E 6 4 Setting Tag Digital Printout and Manual Printout Explanation Tag Seiting A tag of up to 16 characters can be assigned to each channel If the instrument is equipped with the optional computation function or floppy disk drive this setting can also be made for computation channels 01 to A60 The characters numbers for the tag can be selected by cursor from the displayed row on sub display 1 For details on the number of characters which will be printed refer to 10 2 on page 10 4 For details on the number of characters which will be displayed refer to 4 1 on page 4 2 To select whether the tag or channel number are displayed printed refer to 10 2 on page 10 4 The default settings are all spaces For details concerning entering characters numbers refer to page 6 15 Digital Printout Setting DIGITAL PR This setting can be selected for each channel from the following This setting applies to the digital print of the analog mode and logging mode The default setting is ON OFF Digital printout will not be carried out for this channel ON
152. D SET MEMORY Xx Func painr C 3 Feen INS DEL gt Select Setting Parameter CHART SYSTEM UNIT MATH CONST MEMORY FLOPPY TR ser Enter Press the SET key to enter the SET menu Select set using the GS amp 2 keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Selecting the channel to be saved SET Main menu Bs m M M M M MEMORY ENTER gt MEMORY CH SET ENTER CH_SET WRITE READ SAVE LOAD COPY DELETE INFO INIT i 001 01 CH SET ON D gt Select Channel No 001 01 CH SET ON D gt Select Channel No 001 01 CH SET ON ENTER ON OFF 4 CH SET OK End of setting ESC Saving immediately SET Main menu E L2 E MEMORY ENTER gt MEMORY WRITE ENTER CH_SET WRITE READ SAVE LOAD COPY DELETE ve INIT WRITE MODE DIRECT ENTER DIRECT TRIGER REPEAT STOP 4 WRITE file ENTER AAA BBB CCC 4 WRITE FILE DDDD ENTER 4 WRITE SAMPLE INTVL ENTER INTVL 1min 2min 5min 10min LOGIC 1 WRITE LENGTH 1k ENTER 10 20 30 40 50 100 200 300 400 500 1k 2k Sk 4k Sk 10k 20k 30k 40k 50K ESC WRITE START End
153. DE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept There may be some menus that are not displayed by basic settings in Chapter 10 Main menu ALARM ACK ENTER J Operating status OQ ALARM RST TIMER RESET CSKA MATH START al MATH CLR CSKA MATH STOP ENTER O C MATH CSKA Lower menu KEY LOCK ON ENTER gt A CODE NUMBER 2888 ENTER 3 4 MSG PRINT ENTER PRINT MESSAGE No 01 Displayed when computation is not in progress 1 when stopped 2 Displayed when computation is in progress i e when started 3 Displayed only when incomplete measurement occurs during computation Note 5 _ ___ If MATH is selected as a level action MATH START MATH CLR START and MATH STOP will not be displayed 9 1 4 IM DR232 01E 9 3 Alarm Acknowledgment Alarm Reset Timer Reset Keylock and Message Printout Explanation Any of the following functions are executed by pressing the ENTER key After that the recorder returns to the operation mode Alarm acknowledgment ALARM ACK When the alarm display hold ALARM HOLD on page 10 8 is s
154. DR232 01E 11 1 Saving Measured and Computed Data When TRIGGER is selected as WRITE MODE Event RAM disk File 001 Event Event Event Y Y Specified data length D Start of saving End of saving When REPEAT is selected as WRITE MODE Event Event Event Event ineffective Event RAM disk File 001 File 003 Specified data length Specified datalength Specified data length Start of saving End of saving Start of saving End of saving Start of saving End of saving For TRIGGER or REPEAT one event must be set for the WR TRIG action during event action function setting For a detailed description of the event action function refer to 9 1 Setting Event Action Functions page 9 1 Data write interval WRITE SAMPLE The data write interval at which data is saved can be selected from the following INTVL Same as measurement interval Every set of measured computed data is saved min 2 min 5 min 10 min Saved at the specified interval LOGIC One piece of data per channel is saved each time the event specified by DATA WR event action function occurs For a detailed description of the event action function refer to 9 1 Setting Event Action Functions page 9 1 Data length WRITE LENGTH Used to set the number of pieces of data per channel Select one of the following options 10 20 30 40 50 100 200 300 400 500 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 10k 2
155. DV200 005 Length 5m Extension cable DV200 010 Length 10m Extension cable DV200 020 Length 20m Extension cable DV200 050 Length 50m Extension cable DV200 100 Length 100m Extension cable DV200 200 Length 200m Extension cable DV200 300 Length 300m Extension cable DV200 400 Length 400m Extension cable DV200 500 Length 500m Connecting Procedure Insert the plug of the extension cable in the connector until you hear a click Since both connectors are identical it makes no difference which connector you use Furthermore since both plugs of the cable are identical you may use either end When pulling the plug from the connector gently press the peg of the plug and pull it forward Extension cable Note When the following handling is done it is necessary to carry out system construction to operate the instrument correctly After executing system construction confirm the module information For details see page 9 16 Connection including addition or replacement removal of subunits or unit number setting see page 3 7 Mounting including addition or replacement removal of modules Points to Note when Using the Extension Cables The maximum rated temperature is 60 C Never disconnect the extension cable from the connector by pulling the cable since this might damage the signal cable Always hold the plug When wiring the extension cable through a cable duct or metal pipe or such protect the peg on top of the
156. D_TRG2 LD_TRG3 ACT EDGE FLOPY LD_TRG1 4 ACT EDGE FLOPY LD_TRG1 LD_TRG1 LD_TRG2 LD_TRG3 ACT EDGE SESE START ACT EDGE REPORT START START STOP ACT LEVL RECORD h ACT LEVL RECORD OQ ACT LEVL SPEED ACT LEVLIGR TREND G01 avo ACT LEVL GR TREND GO1 901 G02 G03 G04 G05 G06 G07 alo i ACT LEVL FLAG F01 ACT LEVL FLAG FO1 F01 02 F03 F04 F05 F06 F07 08 F09 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 4 ACT LEVL REPORT To the next page ENTER D ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER To the previous page LL ENTER ENTER ENTER From the following page IM DR232 01E 9 3 suonoung pue 4 9 1 Setting Event Action Functions Selection of event RELAY actions The MATH menu is displayed only with the DR232 1 DR242 1 and models with the M1 option The MEMRY and FLOPPY menus are displayed only with the DR232 1 DR242 1 The REPORT menu is displayed only with models with the M3 option From the previous page EVT RELAY S01 EVT RELAY 801 4 ACT EDGE ALARM ACK ACT EDGE ALARM ACK ACT EDGE ALARM RST ACT EDGE TI
157. Digital printout will be carried out for this channel The recording interval can be selected from the following For details on LOG INTERVAL refer to 10 2 page 10 6 If the instrument is equipped with the optional computation function or floppy disk drive this setting can also be made for computation channels A01 to A60 When LOG INTERVAL is set to SINGLE The recording interval is decided automatically depending on the chart speed and the columns of channels to be printed When LOG INTERVAL is set to MULTIPLE The recording interval can be selected from six timer settings The default value is 1 For details on the timer setting refer to 6 1 page 6 3 Columns selecting Refer to 10 2 page 10 5 Manual Printout Setting MANUAL PR This setting can be selected from the following The default setting is ON If the instrument is equipped with the optional computation function or floppy disk drive this setting can also be made for computation channels A01 to A60 OFF Manual printout will not be carried out for this channel ON Manual printout will be carried out for this channel IM DR232 01E suonipuoo 6 5 Setting the Alarm Printout Relevant Keys mer WESS recess ESC RECORD SET ALARM PR mee sepe GO C INS DEL gt Select Setting Parameter CHART TIAL TAG DIGITAL PR MANUAL PR ALARM PRT se
158. ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER To previous page 10 22 IM DR232 01E 10 9 Setting SET SET3 Menu Explanation Setting SET SET3 SET PARM Select the menu to be displayed by pressing the SET key whether in the SET menu or the SET3 menu The SET menu is displayed by pressing the SET key at a touch and the SET3 menu is displayed by pressing the SET key for about 3 seconds continuously Select any of the following SET displayed in the SET menu SET3 displayed in the SET3 menu OFF not displayed in either menu The default setting is as shown in the operating procedure diagram on pages 10 20 and 10 21 The last operation menu PANEL ALL ITEM is the menu that globally set all menus However the selection of INIT selects the default setting Note n order to make the set or selected contents effective the contents must be registered For details see page 10 23 To return from the SET UP menu to the operation display mode select END in the main menu For details see page 10 23 IM DR232 01E 10 23 L3S sbumes oiseg 10 10 Selecting Display Update Interval Registering Details Set Selected with SET UP Menu and Terminating SET UP Menu Relevant Keys ESC SETUP DISPLAY em rcgem GO C Operating Proc
159. ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Main menu SET S O MEMORY ENTER ENTER CH SET WRITE READ SAVE LOAD COPY DELETE INFO INIT 4 gt MEMORY 20000BYTES ENTER 4 C O INFO END Enq ESC FLOPPY ENTER gt FLOPPY INFO ENTER SAVE LOAD DELETE INFO FORMAT 4 gt VOLUME DARWIN ENTER gt MEMORY 20000 BYTES INFO END Ena ESC Displaying information in the SETUP mode Information can be displayed in the same way as the SET mode Select FLOPPY from the SETUP menu Main menu SETUP lt FLOPPY ENTER FLOPPY INFO ENTER SAVE LOAD DELETE INFO FORMAT 4 gt VOLUME DARWIN ENTER gt MEMORY 20000 BYTES INFO END Ena ESC IM DR232 01E 11 21 dn jeg pue pajndwog poinseayy 11 8 Displaying RAM Disk and Floppy Disk Information Explanation Internal RAM disk and floppy disk information is displayed Internal RAM disk Remaining memory size is displayed Floppy disk Volume name and remaining memory size are displayed 11 22 IM DR232 01E 11 9 Initializing the RAM Disk em SET MEMORY ux rece QD Ce
160. F OFF ON ON ON 8 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 9 OFF ON OFF OFF ON 0 OFF ON OFF ON OFF 11 OFF ON OFF ON ON 12 OFF ON ON OFF OFF 13 OFF ON ON OFF ON 14 OFF ON ON ON OFF 5 OFF ON ON ON ON 16 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 17 ON OFF OFF OFF ON 18 ON OFF OFF ON OFF 19 ON OFF OFF ON ON 20 ON OFF ON OFF OFF 21 ON OFF ON OFF ON 22 ON OFF ON ON OFF 23 ON OFF ON ON ON 24 ON ON OFF OFF OFF 25 ON ON OFF OFF ON 26 ON ON OFF ON OFF 27 ON ON OFF ON ON 28 ON ON ON OFF OFF 29 ON ON ON OFF ON 30 ON ON ON ON OFF 31 ON ON ON ON ON 3 17 pue uoneyyeisu 3 5 Connecting the Interface Cables Ethernet For details on connectin the RS 422 A RS 485 connector of the RS 422 A RS 485 communication interface module to a personal computer see IM DR231 11E DR231 DR232 DR241 DR242 Communication Interface User s Manual CAUTION When dis connecting the RS 422 A RS 485 cable turn OFF the power of both the personal computer and the instrument If the power is not turned OFF malfunctions may occur and the internal circuitry may be damaged ETHERNET I F Di itch Tx yellow p ON Status LINK yellow EFE OFF Indicator LED green b 1234 STS2 green 10BASE T Port Connect the RJ 45 modular jack of the twist pair cable connected to the 10BASE T network You can select the following three modes by setting the dip switch Config
161. HOLD A B or RESET A B A and B are channel numbers or computing equations These can be used once in the beginning of the computing equation Limitations in computing equations Multiple operators can be used in 1 computing equation But there are following limitations Number of characters that can be used 40 characters Total number of channel numbers and constants 16 Computation erroro ccurs when 16 exceeded and the computed result becomes OVER or OVER Computation channel numbers Computation channel numbers less than the current computation channel number can be used as variables within the computing equation Example 02 001 01 Computation channel numbers greater than or equal to A03 can not be used in this computation Statistical operators TLOG or CLOG can only be used once in 1 computing equation Computation channel A total of 60 computation channels are available A01 to A60 Constant A total of 60 constants can be set K01 to K60 Flag F01 to F16 Flags can be set in computing equations as constants 1 or 0 Flags are normally 0 but it is set to 1 when a certain event occurs according to the event action function For example if the computing equation is set to NOTFO0I TLOG SUM 001 and FLAG F01 is set as an edge action of an event action F01 becomes 1 when the event occurs This causes NOTFO1 to become 0 and the SUM of channel 001 to become 0 Computation range If the result exceeds
162. Hz is automatically switched corresponding to the power frequency of this instrument However AUTO does not function on the the subunit of the DC power supply model Selecting AUTO will set the A D integration time to 20 ms 50 Hz 50 Hz the integration time is set to 20 ms 50 Hz 60 Hz the integration time is set to 16 7 ms 60 Hz 100 ms the integration time is set to 100 ms 10 Hz The default setting is AUTO Selection of Filter FILTER Select whether the input filter is operated or not Select it from the following OFF Not operated ON Operated The default setting is OFF Note In order to make the set or selected contents effective the contents must be registered For details see page 10 23 To return from the SET UP menu to the operation display mode select END in the main menu For details see page 10 23 10 8 IM DR232 01E 10 4 Setting Operation Mode of Relay Internal Switch Relevant Keys SETUP RELAY RECORD ALARM gt Select Setting Parameter CHART RECORD ALARM A D INTG FILTER RELAY1 KEYLOCI Gz area Operating Procedure Main menu SETUP Enter the SET UP menu in the following procedure 1 When the display presents the operation display mode or a menu other than the SET UP menu first turn off the power swi
163. IEC1010 IM DR232 01E 14 23 suoneoiieds 14 7 Specifications of Digital Input Module Style Number S8 Model Number of Channels Terminal Type and Minimum Measurement Interval Model Number of Channels Terminal Type Minimum Measurement Interval DU700 11 10 Screw 0 5s Input method Floating unbalanced input each channel mutually isolated channel independent A D resolution 20000 A D integration time 20 ms 50 Hz 16 7 ms 60 Hz 100 ms 10 Hz or auto Except auto switch does not function on the stand alone DC power supply model or the subunit DS400 DS600 of a DC power supply model Minimum measurement interval Low pass filter OFF Cut off frequency 50 60Hz 10Hz Minimum measurement interval 0 56 48 Low pass filter ON Cut off frequency 50 60Hz 10Hz Minimum measurement interval 3s 12s Normal operating temperature humidity 20 to 80 RH for 10 to 40 C 10 to 50 RH for 40 to 50 C 5 to 30 RH for 50 to 60 C no condensation Magnetic field 400A m max 50 60Hz Maximum allowable input voltage CONT Contact input 10 V DC LEVEL Voltage input 60 V DC Common mode noise voltage 250 V AC rms 50 60 Hz Maximum noise between channels 150 V AC rms 50 60 Hz Action At normal operating temperature humidity Voltage input LEVEL Off for a voltage of less than 24V ON for a voltage 2 4 V or more Contact input CONT On Off of contact Contact resistance
164. IM DR232 01E 14 3 14 1 Specifications of DR232 DR242 and DS400 DS600 Data Save Load Function Media for data save load Buffer memory internal SRAM Capacity 512 KB Data backup Around 10 years backup with lithium battery at room temperature while power is off Specified data length 10 20 30 40 50 100 200 300 400 500 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 10k 20k 30k 40k and 50k data ch Total memory lengt must be within the free memory size 3 5 inch floppy disk Number of drives 1 Disk types 2HD 2DD Supported formats 1 2 MB 1 44 MB and 720 KB Applicable data Setting values measured values and computed values only possible whe optional math function is specified Method to save to the floppy disk Copies data stored in the buffer memory to the floppy disk except for setting values which can be directly saved to the floppy disk Method to load from floppy disk Copies data from the floppy disk to the buffer memory except for settin values which can be directly loaded from the floppy disk Printing and outputing loaded data Able to print captured data saved in the buffer memory or output to a communication interface Data save format Setting values ASCII Measured computed values binary except ASCII CSV Format is also possible when saving to floppy disk Data capacity Setting values Maximum about 250 kB in case when saving the setting values of an operation mode with 300ch inputs and 60ch computatio
165. Instruction DR232 DR242 DARWIN Manual Hybrid Recorder Expandable Type IM DR232 01E YOKOGAWA IM DR232 01E 8th Edition Yokogawa Electric Corporation Foreword Notes Trademarks Revisions Disk No RE04 8th Edition June 2000 YK Thank you for purchasing the YOKOGAWA Hybrid Recorder DR232 or DR242 This User s Manual contains useful information regarding the instrument s functions and operating procedures as well as precautions that should be observed during use To ensure proper use of the instrument please read this manual thoroughly before operating the instrument Keep the manual in a safe place for quick reference whenever a question arises The following manual is provided with the instrument in addition to this manual Manual Name Manual No DR231 DR232 DR241 DR242 Communication Interface IMDR231 11E DARWIN is a system comprising a number of data acquisition equipment components In the course of system growth new models software various input output modules and optional features are added to the family to enhance the systems expandability and flexibility You can check the versions of your equipment and software by referring to the style number Sn and release number Rn respectively which are shown on the nameplate of the main unit When configuring a system you must confirm that the style number of each component unit and software meets the following requirements 1 the style number of
166. Leave a clearance of at least 15 cm between the signal lines and power lines If the power lines are not shielded the operating voltage is 220V or less and the operating current is 10A or more the distance between the signal cables and power cords must be 60cm or more at least 15 cm Signal Power lines lines 2 Step 4 Lay the signal lines at right angles to the power lines If the power lines are not shielded separate the signal lines and power lines where they cross using steel sheeting at least 1 6mm thick Signal lines S N 1 1 QUO CH Lomm A Power lines Separate analog signal lines and communication cables in the same manner as from power cords When there is influence from a magnetic or electrical field an increase of impedance Step 1 Keep the noise source as far away as possible Magnetic field strength H zi 08800 a 400 A m 2n 6 Example 122 400A Mende are rzim The influence of the external magnetic field on the measuring instrument 400A m or less 3 40 IM DR232 01E 3 11 Countering Noise Step 2 Change the position of the noise source A Leakage magnetic flux of transformer E X C o lt lt ER d strong DER EC NU S Move the instrument to a location where the influence from magnetic flux is weak B Sparks strong electromagnetic radiation weak electrogmagn
167. M DR232 01E suue y pue Pbumes 8 2 Alarm Display and Printing Explanation Alarm display RECORD CHART KEYLOG Ki When an alarm status is detected and an alarm is issued the ALARM lights To display the alarm status for each channel see Section 4 4 Using the ALARM SEARCH Display on page 4 7 or Section 4 6 Using the ALARM STATUS Display on page 4 10 To display the alarm output relay or internal switch status see Section 4 7 Using the RELAY STATUS Display on page 4 11 If an alarm occurs while the alarm display hold ALARM HOLD is ON because the alarm has already been triggered the ALARM and alarm status displays flash Even after the alarm status is released the displays still flash When the alarm status hold function is ON use the alarm acknowledge function to determine the current status of the alarm To do this display the FUNC menu select ALARM ACK then press the ENTER key to use the alarm acknowledge function For details see Section 2 4 Alarm Function on page 2 15 Alarm printing For details on setting the alarm printing see Section 6 5 Setting the Alarm Printout on page 6 10 The alarms are printed after making this setting Alarm reset This function is selected from the FUNC menu when the relay hold function see page 10 11 is activated To use the alarm reset function select ALARM RST then press t
168. M Section 10 3 interval hysteresis hold Execute alarm FUNC key ALARM ACK Section 9 3 acknowledge Reset alarm FUNC key ALARM RST Section 9 3 Clear alarm buffer Press the FUNC key for about three seconds ALM BUF CLEAR Section 9 4 Procedure varies according to the menu configuration of the FUNC key see section 10 8 IM DR232 01E 13 List of Menus and Set up Data Computation Settings Parameters Procedure Selecting menu Reference Computation equation SET key SET MATH Section 12 2 Constant SET key SET CONST Section 12 3 Perform computation FUNC key MATH START Section 12 4 Clear measured data and FUNC key MATH CLR START Section 12 4 perform computation Stop computation FUNC key MATH STOP Section 12 4 Clear incomplete FUNC key MATH ACK Section 12 4 measurement status Handling of computation Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key SET UP MATH Section 12 5 error time axis setting of TLOG SUM Procedure varies according to the menu configuration of the SET key see section 10 9 Procedure varies according to the menu configuration of the FUNC key see section 10 8 Settings for Saving Loading Measured Setup Data Floppy Disk Parameters Procedure Selecting menu Reference Save Load measured dataSET key SET MEMORY Section 11 1 11 2 Save Load set up data SET key SET FLOPPY Section 11 2 11 3 of SET mode Copy measured data SET key SET MEMORY Section 11 5 between built i
169. MER RST ACT EDGE RECORD OFF ACT EDGE RECORD OFF OFF ON ACT EDGE MANUAL PR ACT EDGE DIGITAL PR ACT EDGE MSG PR 01 4 ACT EDGE MSG PR 01 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 1112131415 16 17 18 19 20 ACT EDGE MSG DISP 01 d ACT EDGE MSG DISP 01 GIP 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 1112131415 16 17 18 19 20 ACT EDGE MATH START 4 ACT EDGE MATH START START STOP CLEAR RESET I ACT EDGE FLAG FO1 n eyo ACT EDGE FLAG F01 F01 F02 F03 F04 F05 F06 F07 F08 F09 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 ACT EDGE MEMRY DATA_WR 4 exo ACT EDGE MEMRY DATA WR slay D 4 ACT EDGE FLOPY LD TRG1 4 exo ACT EDGE FLOPY LD_TRG1 LD_TRG1 LD_TRG2 LD_TRG3 ACT EDGE REPORT START V ACT EDGE REPORT START START STOP ACTzLEVL RECORD 4 ACT LEVL SPEED CHG Lo TREND Go1 ACT LEVL GR 01 G01 G02 G03 G04 G05 G06 G07 po ACT LEVL FLAG FO01 F01 F02 F03 F04 F05 F06 F07 F08 F09 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 4 ACT LEVL REPORT To the next page D To the previous page ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER DATA WR WR TRIG RD TRIG LD_TRG1 LD TRG2LD TRG3 ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER
170. NC menu MATH START Starts computation This is displayed while computation is not in progress MATH CLR START Clears computation results then re starts computation Computed data n n t Stop Clear start Start Start MATH STOP Stops computation Computation results are not cleared This is displayed while computation is in progress MACH ACK Clears status indication which is displayed in case of incomplete measurement during computation For a detailed description of the FUNC menu refer to 9 3 Alarm Acknowledgment Alarm Rest Timer Reset Keylock and Message Printout page 9 14 Starting stopping computation using the event action function The event action function can be used to carry out the following operations MATH START Starts computation MATH STOP Stops computation MATH CLEAR Clears data before the first computation is carried out BREST ee eS Computeddata Ww EE OU Be LE ve SORT uh On fO A TO DOE Se d Cue SOR ots M T Start Clear Measurement interval MATH RESET Clears data after the first computation is carried out TESTSEITE m Lap oe con 1 000 10 i Computed data Pod n Qu ey de 3 383 L Start R eset Measurement interval 12 8 IM DR232 01E 12 4 Starting Stopping Computation Event action function An example of setting the event action function is given below S
171. No 4 001 01 TREND ON gt ON 001 SERRE gt Channel No 4 001 01 TRENDzON ENTER gt 00 EERE OFF ON 4 SET OK ESC gt To the next page IM DR232 01E suonipuoo bumes 6 1 Setting the Recording Mode Engineering Unit Recording Channel and Recording Interval From the previous page TIMER ENTER TIMER 1 ENTER 123456 4 1 MODE RELATIVE ENTER 4 1 TIME 00 01 00 ENTER gt Set DD HH MM 00 C O 4 SET OK ESC 1 MODE ABSOLUTE ENTER 4 1 TIME 1h ENTER Explanation 1min 2min 3min 4min 5min 6min 10min 12min 15min 20min 30min 1h 2h 3h 4h 6h 8h 12h 24h 4 1 REF TIME 00 00 ENTER 4 SET OK ESC Recording Mode SYSTEM The following types of recording mode can be selected The default is TREND LOGGING LOGGING MODE measurement values will be printed out as digital values TREND ANALOG TREND MODE measurement values will be recorded as analog trends dot recording and printed out as digital values Selecting the recording interval This setting can only be done for the TREND mode and its default setting is AUTO FIX Recording takes place at intervals equal to the measurement period scan interval However if the measuring per
172. No 5 ON ON OFF ON OFF Adjacent side two gauge method R fixed resistor r z resistance of leadwire Rg resistance of strain gauge e output voltage developed across bridge E voltage imposed across bridge DU500 12 DU500 13 DU500 14 Jumper setup switch Rgi A No 1 No 2 B L No 3 4 5 Rg2CCV D H SSSS IE 6 OFF ON 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 No 5 ON OFF OFF Opposed side two gauge method R fixed resistor Rg1 r z resistance of leadwire Rg resistance of strain gauge e z output voltage developed across bridge E voltage imposed across bridge DU500 12 DU500 13 DU500 14 Rg2 Jumper UP switch EE Rg1 A I 0 ZOOS AR 0 9 0 No 4 fl 0 No 5 Rg2 D H 0 Rg OFF ON No 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 No 5 ON OFF ON OFF ON IM DR232 01E 3 25 pue uoneyyersu 3 7 Connecting the Signal Lines Four gauge method R fixed resistor r z resistance of leadwire Rg resistance of strain gauge e output voltage developed across bridge E voltage imposed across bridge TN B 91 ES Rg3
173. PR This enables manual printing For applicable functions see Section 2 3 Recording Functions on page 2 12 DIGITAL PR Digital printing starts in the analog trend mode The recording intervals depend on the timer setting see Section 2 8 When the event action functions are set normal digital print functions are disabled Only one function can be set in the event action functions MSG PR Prints messages For details see Section 7 3 Starting Message Printing on page 7 3 Select any message from the corresponding codes 01 to 20 MSG DISP Displays messages For details see Section 7 3 Stating Message Printing on page 7 3 Select any message from the corresponding codes 01 to 20 To cancel the message display press any key SPEED CHG Changes chart speed 1 to chart speed 2 When the recording interval is set to automatic page 6 3 the recording interval is also changed When the event is released the chart speed and recording interval return to their original positions Only one function can be set in the event action functions GR TREND This executes the recording in a channel in which the group setting page 6 17 has already been made For this set the dot recording see on page 10 4 to GROUP and start recording by key operations following the RECORD given above Select any group from G01 to 607 Only one identical group can be set in the event action functions Note If Chart End appe
174. PRINTER ZERO _ 326 ENTER pu Limit 17500 PRINTER FULL 2506 ENTER Full Limit 2400 2600 4 PRINTER SET ESC SCAN INTVL ENTER SCAN INTERVAL 0 5_ sec ENTER 051234561012 15 20 30 60 4 SCAN INTVL SET ESC IM DR232 01E 10 1 145 sbumes oiseg 10 1 Selecting Adjustment of Dot Printing Position or Scan Interval Explanation In the PRN ADJ menu three lines are dot printed according to the left and right movements of the carriage Adjustment of Dot printing Shift HYS Dots are printed in a line along the length of the chart almost in the middle following the right and left movements of the carriage If these dots shift either to the left or the right make a straight line by adjusting the HYS setting The setting range is 50 to 50 The set value 1 corresponds to about 0 1 mm of the dot printing position Adjustment of Zero Position ZERO If a line composed of printed dots shifts from the scale line at the left end of the chart have the line of dots just overlap the scale end line by adjusting the ZERO setting The setting range is 1 to 500 The set value 1 corresponds to about 0 1 mm of the dot printing position Adjustment of Full scale Position If a line composed of printed dots shifts from the scale line at the right end of the chart have the line of dots just overlap the scale end line by adjusting t
175. Room furnace temperature Hot line conduction noise Electro magnetic induction noise Electrostatic induction noise Line noise The instrument Power supply Inputs Basics of Anti Noise Measures part 1 Common Mode Noise and Normal Mode Noise Signal source resistances Normal mode noise pe 3 R CH 7 7 Floating amp Signal component i Signal ic ri voltage E 1 T R2 L P Eo 1 t AR I 1 Circuit Output 1 o common i2 2 vin Case Normal mode noise A component Common mode noise 7 cipue Common Mode Noise Ecm Noise generated between the signal source and the ground of a measuring instrument Since it is applied to both the H and L input terminals in phase with one another it is also called in phase voltage Normal Mode Noise Enm This is an unfavorable noise that is superimposed on a signal voltage Since it is a voltage between the H and L terminals it is also called the line voltage or since it is a voltage in series with the signal voltage it is sometimes called the series mode voltage IM DR232 01E 3 37 pue uoneyyersu 3 11 Countering Noise In the figure on the previous page due to common mode voltage Ecm noise currents i and i2 flow through the impedance to grounds Z and 72 and coupling impedance Z3 resulting in the g
176. SETUP O C Lower menu ih ne ee 25071 TEMP ENTER TEMP C ENTER CF 4 TEMP SET ESC IM DR232 01E 10 25 dN 145 sbumes oiseg 10 11 Selecting the temperature unit from C or F option Se lecting the temperature unit TEMP The temperature unit can be selected from the following C which is the initial value or e F Note In the User s manual all functions and operations are explained using the C unit When using the F unit replace the C unit with the F unit For the measurement range measurement accuracy and maximum resolution in case of using the F range refer to the following table as a replacement of the one on page 14 2 Measurement range Refer to the following table Measurement accuracy maximum resolution Replace the values using the following formula F C value x 9 5 32 When changing the temperature unit as descibred above other settings will be initialized at the same time and therefore all settings need to be done again This initialization will be the same initialization as described on page 9 17 In order to make the set or selected contents effective the contents must be registered For details see page 10 23 To return from the SET UP menu to the operation display mode select END in the main menu For details see page 10 23 Measurement ranges for temperature measurements when using the unit F Inp
177. Setting Event Action Functions Selection of event MATCH TIME actions The MATH menu is displayed only with the DR232 1 DR242 1 and models with the M1 option The MEMRY and FLOPPY menus are displayed only with the DR232 1 DR242 1 The REPORT menu is displayed only with models with the M3 option From the previous page EVT MATCH TIME 1 4 EVT MATCH TIME 1 123 4 ACT EDGE ALARM ACK ACT EDGE ALARM ACK ao I ACT E DGE ALARM RST ao ACT EDGE TIMER RST ao ACT EDGE RECORD OFF ACT EDGE RECORD OFF OFF ON 7 crocs NN PR C O I ACT EDGE DIGITAL PR ao PR 01 Re ACT EDGE MSG PR 01 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 111213 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 ACT EDGE DISP 01 ACT EDGE MSG DISP 01 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 111213 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 ACT EDGE MATH START 4 ACT EDGE MATH START START STOP CLEAR RESET ale ACT EDGE FLAG F01 4 ACT EDGE FLAG F01 F01 F02 F04 F05 F06 F07 F08 F09 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 ACT EDGE MEMRY DATA_WR 4 ACT EDGE MEMRY DATA_WR D To the previous page 4 ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER D ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER DATA WR WR TRIG RD TRIG LD_TRG1 LD_TRG2 LD_TRG3 ACT EDGE FLOPY LD_TRG1 4 ACT EDGE FLOPY LD_TRG1
178. T EDGE MSG DISP 01 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 ACT EDGE MATH START 4 ACTzEDGE MATH START START STOP CLEAR RESET C C V m ACT EDGE FLAG F01 ACT EDGE FLAG F01 F01 F02 F03 F04 FOS F06 F07 F08 F09 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 ACTZEDGE MEMRY DATA WR 4 yo ACT EDGE MEMRY DATA_WR DATA WR WR TRIG RD TRIG LD TRG1LD TRG2LD TRG3 ACTzEDGE FLOPY LD TRG1 4 exo ACT EDGE FLOPY LD_TRG1 LD_TRG1 LD_TRG2 LD_TRG3 ACT EDGE REPORT START 4 ACT EDGE REPORT START START STOP D ACT LEVL RECORD ACT LEVL RECORD To the next page D To the previous page ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER D ENTER ENTER ENTER From the following page IM DR232 01E 9 1 Setting Event Action Functions Selection of Event MFUNC KEY actions The MATH menu is displayed only with the DR232 1 DR242 1 and models with the M1 option The MEMRY and FLOPPY menus are displayed only with the DR232 1 DR242 1 The REPORT menu is displayed only with models with M3 option
179. TA SCL Gaetan GD Ga E EN c cranar ser Operating Procedure 2 Select set using the O amp 2 keys 1 Press the RANGE key to enter the RANGE menu 3 To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept 4 New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Main menu 001 01 VOLT 2VCO gt Select Channel No Lower menu 4 001 01 VOLT 2VD 001 01 VOLT 2V 4 gt Select Channel No 001 01 VOLT 2V ENTER 20mV 60mV 200mV 2V 6V 20V 50V SPAN 2 0000 2 0000V ENTER aly gt Span limit 2 0000 2 0000V 4 GET i 001 01 SKIP ENTER 4 alo SET OK ESC 001 01 TC R D 4 001 01 TC R ENTER RSBKEJTNWLUKP 4 SPAN 0 0 1760 0C ENTER Span limit 0 0 1760 0 C 4 GET 001 01 RTD PT1 gt 4 001 01 RTD PT1 ENTER PT1 PT2 JPT1 JPT2 PT50 NI1 NI2 NI3 CU1 CU2 PT1S PT2S JPT1S av JPT2S J263B 4 SPAN 200 0 600 0 ENTER Span limit 200 0 600 0 C 4 GET OK ESC To the next page IM DR232 01E seoulq ueds Indul ayy funes 5 1 Setting the Type of Input and Recording Span Explanation From the
180. TAG ENTER 4 O O TAG SET3 ENTER SET SET3 OFF PANEL TREND ENTER 4 Cc TREND SET ENTER SET SET3 OFF PANEL DIGITAL PR ENTER 4 OO DIGITAL 5 ENTER SET SET3 OFF PANEL MANUAL PR ENTER MANUAL PRzSET3 ENTER SET SET3 OFF PANEL ALARM PR ENTER S S ALARM PR SET3 ENTER SET SET3 OFF To next page From the following page IM DR232 01E 10 21 dN 145 sbumes oiseg 10 9 Setting SET SET3 Menu From previous page PANEL SCALE PR SCALE PR SET3 CO SET SETS OFF PANEL LIST PR LIST PR SET3 COR SET SET3 OFF PANEL LIST FMT LIST 5 SET SET3 OFF PANEL MESSAGE 4 MESSAGE SET3 SET SET3 OFF PANEL HEADER 4 HEADER SET3 SET SET3 OFF PANEL TITLE V aol SET SET3 OFF A Q A O PANEL TIMER 4 TIMER SET oI SET SET3 OFF PANEL MATCH TIME 4 MATCH TIME SET3 al SET SET3 OFF PANEL LOGIC 1 LOGIC SET al SET SET3 OFF PANEL MOVE AVE 4 MOVE AVE SET3 aol SET SET3 OFF PANEL INTERPOL 4 INTERPOL SET3 CA SET SET3 OFF PANEL GROUP 4 GROUP SET3 a SET SET3 OFF PANEL COPY 4 COPY SET am SET SET3 OFF PANEL ALL ITEM 4 ALL ITEM SET SET SET3 OFF INIT ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER
181. TER MODULE S UNITO INF SYSTEM D 012345 4 S UNITO INF SYSTEM ENTER SYSTEM REAL For GP IB interface COMM INF ENTER MODULE GP IB ENTER gt ADDR 01 For RS 232 C interface MODULE RS 232C ENTER gt RATE 19200 LENGTH 8BIT PARITY NONE gt STOP 1BIT HANDSHAKE OFF OFF RE SYSTEM ENTER gt RE SYSTEM NO ENTER 3 peu O C I RE SYSTEM YES ENTER 4 SYSTEM RESTRUCTING After about 15 seconds RAM INIT ENTER gt RAM INITZNO ENTER CSKA RAM INIT YES ENTER 4 RAM INITIALIZING M After about 10 seconds 9 1 6 IM DR232 01E 9 4 Clearing Alarm Message Buffers Displaying Module Communications Information Structuring System Modules and Initializing Information Explanation Any of the following functions are executed and displayed by pressing the ENTER key the last key of the lower menu After that the recorder returns to the operation mode Clearing the alarm buffer ALM BUF CLEAR Cancels all information in the alarm buffer see page 6 11 Clearing the message buffer MSG BUF CLEAR Cancels all information in the message buffer see page 7 3 Displaying information set in the modules MODULE INF Selection of unit numbers S UNIT Select I from the main unit or 0 to 5 from the sub unit The unit number that is not recognized for the system cannot be sele
182. TER 123456789 10 11 12 13 14 15 4 ALARM RL TIME 8 ENTER 123456789 10 11 12 13 14 15 4 ALARM HYS 0 5 ENTER 0 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 OV 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 0 4 ALARM HOLD OFF ENTER OFF ON 4 ALARM SET ESC i A D INTG ENTER S UNITO A D INTG AUTO D 4 S UNITO A D INTG AUTO ENTER cC AUTO 50Hz 60Hz 100ms A D INTG SET ESC Y FILTER ENTER FILTER OFF ENTER OFF ON 4 FILTER SET ESC 4 IM DR232 01E 10 7 145 sbumes oiseg 10 3 Select Alarm Interval Hysteresis Hold A D Converter Integration Time Filter Selection of Interval for High Limit of Rate Of Change Alarm ALARM RH TIME Set the number of measurement repeats in Interval 2 measurement interval x measurement repeats Select 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 or 15 The default setting is 8 Selection of Interval for Low Limit of Rate Of Change Alarm ALARM RL TIME The same selection method as the above Selection of Alarm Hysteresis ALARM HYS Applied to high low limit alarm Select 0 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 or 1 0 The default setting is 0 5 Selection of Alarm Display Hold ALARM HOLD Select whether the alarm display is held or not when the alarm is reset OFF hold ON not hold The default setting is OFF Selection of A D Converter Integration Time A D INTG Select each A D converter integration time for each unit Select it from the following AUTO the frequency of 50 60
183. WIN Trigger Time 96 02 14 15 05 07 Trigger date time Sample Rate Sec 2 Saving interval Start Data No 1 ASCII conversion data No Data Length 20 Data length number of data sets Ch Name TURBINE1 TURBINE2 TURBINES TURBINE7 TURBINEO 4 Channel No or tag Unit mV t Kg mm Sos mA Qon Unit YY MM DD 55 5 96 02 14 15 05 07 0 12 520 315 00 256 3 96 02 14 15 05 09 0 12 322 315 05 23 2 24 9 TS 9 96 02 14 15 05 11 0 13 724 315 20 KE 4 8U 15 96 02 14 15 05 13 0 3 220 315 127 A S 4 OM 15 8 96 02 14 15 05 15 0 13 9255 315 60 23 3 HA SOM T 15 8 96 02 T4 1570551 7200 13 227 3152550 23 31 4 9 16 0 96 02 14 15 05 19 0 132028054 315 04 23 3 1631 96 02 14 15 05 21 0 12 620 315 29 7 23 ES caro real eA et coe 96 02 14 15 05 23 0 12 643 315 0 16 4 23 2n 5 1 16 2 96 02 14 15 05 25 0 13 426 315 05 23 2W b li 16 3 96 02 14 15 05 27 0 12 227 315 42 273 2 4n 5r2n 8 1549 96 02 14 15 05 29 0 2523319 315 81 23 2 5 8 96 02 14 15 05 31 0 13 822 315 03T 7 23 2 zou 15 28 96 02 14 15 05 33 0 12 324 315 05 23 2 y 5 8 96 02 14 15 05 35 0 13 220 315 07 2322 b i 16 0 96 02 14 15 05 37 0 13 450 315 91 23528 16 3 96 02 14 15 0
184. With ZS 2 select the module number S_UNITO MODULE No 0 012345 5 Press the ENTER key Calibrating in CAL EXEC mode 6 With GS select the CAL EXEC mode ADJUST MODE CAL EXEC gt S_UNITO MODULE 0 DISPLAY CAL EXEC END 7 Press the ENTER key 8 With lt select the calibration range ADJUST RANGE 20mV gt S_UNITO MODULE 0 20mV 60mV 200mV 2V 6V 20V 50V Pt 1mA PT 9 Enter the rated value in the selected range 10 Press the ENTER key to execute calibration During the calibration the following display appears A D Adjusting gt S_UNITO MODULE 0 20mV 60mV 200mV 2V 6V 20V 50V Pt imA PT 11 After calibration is completed the following display appears CALC END gt S_UNITO MODULE 0 gt ADJUST RANGE 20mV 12 Press the ENTER key IM DR232 01E 13 9 eoueuejure y pue 13 5 Calibration Checking calibrated values in the DISPLAY mode Use this mode only for checking calibrated values In this mode you can adjust a calibrated value but if this value is invalid the instrument may be inoperative For details contact your nearest Sales representative 13 With GS 2 select the DISPLAY mode ADJUST MODE DISPLAY gt S_UNITO MODULE 0 DISPLAY CAL EXEC END 14 the ENTER key to display the calibrate
185. a voltage or current signal to the input module within the limits you set here Setting the Parameter Being Shown and Recorded A power monitor module measures the voltage or current through the respective channels The values that are shown and recorded are not those of the voltage and current being actually measured through each channel but the values of the parameters you set here A combination of parameters being measured is fixed for each group of channels 1 2 3 4 and 5 6 within the same module For example setting channel 1 to P1 active power 1 sets channel 2 to VAI apparent power 1 In addition the configurable parameters being measured varies depending on the wiring method selected See the lists on the next page for more information The respective mnemonics in the lists should be interpreted as noted below Vi i21 2 3 effective voltage Ii i21 2 3 effective current V13 V1 V3 2 I13 11 1 3 2 VO V1 V2 V3 3 IO 11 12 13 3 Pi i21 2 3 active power Vari i 1 2 3 reactive power P13 P1 P3 Var13 PF1 PF3 PO P1 P2 P3 Var 0 Varl Var2 Var3 VAi i 1 2 3 apparent power PFi i 1 2 3 power factor 13 VAI VA3 PF13 1 132 132 2 13 VAO 2 PFO PO P0 Var0 P0 V AO PHi i21 2 3 phase FREQ frequency PH13 tan Var13 P13 PHO tan 0 0 IM DR232 01E seoulq ueds Indul ay funes
186. ack red and yellowish green In the area where red and yellowish green overlap labeled as a only red dots will be recorded and in the area where black red and yellowish green overlap labeled as b only black dots will be recorded However at the locations where the recordings diverge after the connecting a horizontal line all recording colors will be recorded a b 5 x 9 x XXxXRXxX XL S x C 5 x Red Yellowish Black green IM DR232 01E 2 3 Recording Functions List Printout A list printout will show the following items Title if a title has been entered Date and time Measurement interval recording interval chart speed and recording mode Timer setting 6 Multiple and Single Match time a specific time is set and when that time is reached a preset operation will be carried out refer to event action function on page 2 17 Tags for each channel input type recording span and linear scaling values this print can be selected ON OFF Alarm this print can be selected ON OFF Group setting For each individual channel whether the trend mode is ON OFF whether interpolation is ON OFF recording zone settings partially expanded recording settings selected Timer No suonoun4 whether moving average is ON OFF alarm type and whether manual print is ON OFF this print can be s
187. age 10 23 To return from the SET UP menu to the operation display mode select END in the main menu For details see page 10 23 10 6 IM DR232 01E 10 3 Select Alarm Interval Hysteresis Hold A D Converter Integration Time Filter Relevant Keys Ge 74 eu ESC SETUP ALARM rure CJD gt Select Setting Parameter CHART RECORD ALARM A D INTG FILTER RELAY Cean C Operating Procedure Main menu SETUP cc ser enter 2 Enter the SET UP menu in the following procedure 1 When the display presents the operation display mode or a menu other than the SET UP menu first turn off the power switch 2 Turn the switch back on while pressing the DISP key and continue pressing the DISP key for about 5 seconds Select set using the O keys If exiting the following lower menu setting halfway press the MODE ESC key The display returns to the main menu to which the lower menu belongs However newly set or selected contents are canceled When setting proceeds to the display for the setting end the newly set or selected contents are established D O Lower menu ALARM ENTER ALARM RH TIME 8 EN
188. age 6 1 c CO TIMER setting the recording interval timer page 6 1 CY CO Setting computation chapter 12 c CO CONST Setting constant page 12 7 c CA MEMORY Saving reading data chapter 11 c CO FCOPY Saving reading set up data chapter 11 c Q LOGIC setting event action functions page 9 1 CSKA COPY gt Copying page 9 11 e SET3 menu SET L 2 gt Setting the chart speed page 6 4 c Q ZONE gt Setting recording zones page 6 6 C CA PARTIAL Setting partially expanded recording page 6 6 c CA TAG Setting tags page 6 8 Co CA DIGITAL PR Setting digital printout page 6 8 CY CA MANUAL PR setting manual printout page 6 8 CY CA ALARM PRO Setting alarm printout 6 10 CY CA SCALE PR Setting scale printout page 6 12 C CA LIST PRO Setting list printout page 6 12 CY CA LIST FMTosetting list format page 6 12 CY CA M ESSAGE Entering messages page 6 14 C I HEADER Entering headers page 6 14 CY I TITLE Entering title page 6 14 CY CA MATCH TIME setting match time page 6 16 C I MOVE AVE Setting moving average page 6 16 C I INTERPOL Setting interpolation page 6 16 C CA GROUP Setting groups page 6 16 IM DR232 01E Index 1 Xepu Main Menu FUNC menu ALARM ACKO Alarm acknowledgment page 9 14 coy CA ALARM Alarm reset page 9 14 c CA INIT BRANCE Executing initial balancing page5 10 c CA TIMER RESET rim
189. alarm An alarm occurs when the measured value changes in the increasing direction within a certain time rate of change alarm interval and exceeds the upper limit alarm setpoint RL Rate of change lower limit alarm An alarm occurs when the measured value changes in the decreasing direction within a certain time rate of change alarm interval and exceeds the lower limit alarm setpoint dH An alarm occurs when the difference between two channels exceeds the alarm setpoint This only applies to a channel for which interchannel differential computation is selected and can be set as a type of alarm e dL alarm occurs when the difference between two channels exceeds the lower limit alarm setpoint This only applies to a channel for which interchannel differential computation is selected and can be set as a type of alarm For details on the rate of change alarm interval setting or other basic alarm settings see Section 10 3 Select Alarm Interval Hystresis Hold A D Converter integration Timer filter on page 10 8 For details on interchannel differential computation see Section 5 1 Setting the Type of Input and Recording Span on page 5 3 Only H upper limit alarm and L lower limit alarm are available for computation channels Setting alarm values Set one alarm value for each alarm number within the following range depending on the type of input The default value is 0 zero HandL VOLT TC RTD DI and DELTA
190. alarm failure or chart end and a remote control signal for the product to be input The module can be connected to the main unit or the subunit but only one module in all units Note When the following handling is done it is necessary to carry out system construction to operate the instrument correctly After executing system construction confirm the module information For details see page 9 16 Connection including addition or replacement removal of subunits or unit number setting see page 3 7 Mounting including addition or replacement removal of modules IM DR232 01E 1 2 Product Overview Connection example Main unit DR232 DR242 10ch Universal Input module Subunit DS600 o S Extension cable Subunit DS600 Subunit DS400 Up to 6 subunits can be connected IM DR232 01E 1 3 uejs S 1 3 Names of Parts DR232 Main Unit desk top hybrid recorder Front Main display See chapter 4 Sub display 1 See chapter 4 Sub display 2 See chapter 4 Status indicator
191. alarm output points can be specified Number of alarm output points Max 300 at sub units up to 300 can be achieved by increasing the number of alarm modules Max number of alarm modules Up to 6 modules can be connected to a sub unit 4 in case of DS400 by increasing the number of sub units up to 30 modules can be connected Alarm recording Analog trend mode The occurrence release mark channel number or tag kind of alarm and alarm item number are printed in the right margin Logging mode kind of alarm is printed when the measurement data are recorded Alarm display Alarm status indication Lights or flashes when an alarm is detected Alarm acknowledge indication Indicator stops flashing by key operation Standard Computation Functions Kinds of computation Difference between channels linear scaling scaling and moving average Scaling Scalable range DC voltage TC RTD contact Scaling range 30000 to 30000 Measurement accuracy for scaling measurement accuracy for scaling digits 2 measurement accuracy digits x scaling span digits measurement span digits 2 digits Numbers below the decimal point are discarded Example Measurement accuracy when the following settings are made Measuring range 6 VDC Measurement span 1 000 to 5 000 V Scaling span 0 000 to 2 000 Measured value 5 V Measurement accuracy 4 digits 0 004 V Moving average Moving average results for between 2 to 64 scans are computed
192. all out of its guaranteed range because of the heat radiating from the power module IM DR232 01E 3 7 pue uoneyyeisu 3 3 How to Connect the Input Output Modules Location and Location Number Channel Number Alarm Output Relay Number DIDO Number The location numbers correspond to channel numbers for locations where the input module is connected to alarm output numbers for locations where the alarm module is connected and to DI DO numbers for locations where the DI DO module is connected Modules are mounted on a unit in slots The number of each module is the same as that of the slot As shown below input output location numbers are assigned related to the unit number see the previous page the main unit number is fixed at I and module location Module 0 Location numbers 101 to 110 Main unit DR232 DR242 Input modules cannot be connected Unit 1 Module 5 Location numbers 051 to 060 Module 4 Location numbers 041 to 050 Module 3 Location numbers 031 to 040 Module 2 Location numbers 021 to 030 Module 1 Location numbers 011 to 020 Module 0 Location numbers 001 to 010 6 Subunit 05600 Unit No 0 Module 3 Location numbers 131 to 140 Module 2 Location numbers 121 to 130 Module 1 Location numbers 111 to 120 Module 0 Location numbers 101 to 110
193. annel 004 constant K10 1 equal to when channel 004 gt constant K10 0 Specified channel statistical operators Type Operator Example Description Maximum value TLOG MAX TLOG MAX 001 Obtain the maximum value of the measured data of channel 001 Minimum value TLOG MIN TLOG MIN 002 Obtain the minimum value of the measured data of channel 002 Max min value TLOG P PQ TLOG P P 003 Obtain the value of the measured data of channel 003 Total value TLOG SUM TLOG SUM 004 Obtain the total value of the measured data of channel 004 Average value TLOG AVEQ TLOG AVE 005 Obtain the average value of the measured data of channel 005 Statistical computation of the measured data from the start of the statistical computation until it is stopped When combining with each of the operators MAX MIN SUMO AVEC the value that can be specified inside the is limited to the input channel number or the computation channel number refer to next page Example TLOG MAX A01 IM DR232 01E 12 1 uoneinduio Bunnoox3 IPPON LIN ejqerreAv 12 1 Overview of the Computation Function Statistical operators within the group Type Operator Example Description Maximum value CLOG MAX CLOG MAX GOI Obtain the maximum value of the measured data of group G01 Minimum value CLOG MINQ CLOG MIN G02 Obtain the minimum value of the measured data of group G02 Max m
194. ar ejdsig epo 101u0Jy Dunes 4 2 Using the MANUAL Display Relevant Keys Operating Procedure DISP MODE GSS RECORD ESC FUNC PRINT 0 FEED INS DEL RANGE ALARM CP M FUNC 1 CHART SET enter mrunc2 MANUAL Display for the Main Display 1 Select the main display using the DISP key 2 Select MAN using the MODE key Sub display 1 002 0 0034V 003 0 0920V AMAN 3 Select the required channel using the GS keys Main display 001 0 0057 V MANUAL Display for Sub display 1 1 Select sub display 1 using the DISP key 2 Select MAN using the MODE key Sub display 1 002 0 0422V 003 0 0726V MAN 3 Select the right or left channel using the C keys A dash will appear below the unit number of the selected channel 4 Select the required channel using the SW keys Sub display 1 006 0 0892V 003 0 0726V MAN MANUAL Display for Sub display 2 1 Select sub display 2 using the DISP key 2 Select MAN using the MODE key Sub display 1 005 0 0931V 006 0 0092V WMAN 3 Select the right or left channel using the CJ O keys A dash will appear below the unit number of the selected channel 4 Select the required channel using the keys Sub display 2 009 1 0075V 008 0 0154V
195. ar Var0 Power factor 1 00 to 1 00 1 00 to 1 00 1 00 to 1 00 1 00 to 1 00 PFi i 1 2 3 13 0 Phase 80 0to 80 0 deg 80 0 to 80 0 deg 80 0 to 80 0 deg 80 0 to 80 0 deg PHi i 1 2 3 13 0 Frequency 45 00 to 65 00 Hz 45 00 to 65 00 Hz 45 00 to 65 00 Hz 45 00 to 65 00 Hz FREQ DR232 01E 14 17 14 4 Specifications of Power Monitor Module Ranges of Indication Measured Data Item 25 V 0 5A 25 V 5 A 250 V 0 5 A 250 V 5 A Effective voltage Vi G 1 2 3 13 0 0 00 to 26 25 V rms 0 00 to 26 25 V rms 0 0 to 262 5 V rms 0 0 to 262 5 V rms Effective current Ii i 2 1 2 3 13 0 0 0000 to 0 5250 V rms 0 000 to 5 250 V rms 0 0000 to 0 5250 V rms 0 000 to 5 250 V rms Active power 13 75 to 13 75 W 137 5 to 137 5 W 137 5 to 137 5 W 1375 to 1375 W P1 P2 Active power 21 50t0 27 50 W 275 0 to 275 0 W 275 0 to 275 0 2750 to 2750 W P13 Active power 41 25 to 41 25 W 412 5 to 412 5 W 412 5 to 412 5 W 4125 to 4125 W PO Apparent power 0 00 to 13 75 0 0to 137 5 VA 0 0 137 5 0to 1375 VA VAI VA2 VA3 Apparent power 0 00 to 27 50 0 0t0275 0 VA 0 0 275 0 VA 0to2750 VA 13 Apparent power 0 00 to 41 25 0 0 10 412 5 VA 0 0 0 412 5 0to4125 VA VAO Reactive power Varl Var2 Var3 0 00 to 13 75 Var 0 0 to 137 5 Var 0 0 to 137 5 Var 0 t
196. arm item number Set the alarm item number for each channel as follows Select any number from among 1 2 3 and 4 Alarm numbers 1 to 4 can be set for one channel For details on setting the alarm printout see Section 6 5 Setting the Alarm Printout on page 6 10 Note f SKIP is selected for the input type or if the computation channels are OFF alarms cannot be set f the following cases the alarm is set to OFF f the input type or measuring range in the related channel is changed If computation channels are turned ON OFF or the computation equation is changed f the recording span for the linear scaling or linear scaling values is changed or f the standard channel for differential computation between channels is changed Setting the alarm or relay including internal switches gives more functions to this recorder For details see Section 9 1 Setting Event and Action Functions on page 9 1 IM DR232 01E 8 1 suue y pue Pbumes 8 1 Setting Alarms and Relays including internal switches Selecting the type of alarm Select an alarm type for each alarm number from among the following OFF default set No alarm is set H Upper limit alarm An alarm occurs when the measured value exceeds the upper limit alarm setpoint L Lower limit alarm An alarm occurs when the measured value exceeds the lower limit alarm setpoint RH Rate of change upper limit
197. ars counter actions such as RECORD ON are not executed Actions such as RECORD or SPEED CHG may operate later than an event occurrence For example with RECORD set in the action setting if an alarm occurs the measured values in that condition are not recorded This is because recording operations are delayed due to an action operation 9 1 0 IM DR232 01E 9 1 Setting Event Action Functions MATH available if the instrument is equipped with the MATH function or floppy disk drive START Starts computation STOP Stops computation RESET Resets computation channel data at the end of completion of the first computation in case an event takes place CLEAR Resets computation channel data immediately in case an event takes place e RST 01 to RESET 07 Resets the computing channel data registered in the specified group number to 0 This is invalid for measuring channels The timing for resetting the data is as follows Not reset Computed value 9 9 2 9 x Start computing Event Reset here If MATH is selected as a level action computation will be carried out while an event is present Computation will stop when the event is cleared MEMORY available with the DR232 1 DR242 1 equipped with the floppy disk drive DATA WR Saves a data item each time an event occurs until the specified data length is reached WR TRIG Saves measured computed data on the buil
198. at page 10 27 O ALARM Selecting alarm interval hysteresis hold page 10 7 C A AID selecting A D converter integration time A Q page 10 7 FILTER Selecting filter page 10 7 CY CO RELAY Setting operation mode of relay internal switch AIO page 10 9 BURN OUT Setting burn out page 10 12 c CO JC Setting reference junction compensation page 10 12 lt COLOR Setting recording colors page 10 14 C A Lock Setting keylock page 10 15 CY CO FUNC PARM setting FUNC FUNC3 menu page 10 17 C A SET PARMcCSsetting SET SET3 menu page 10 20 O DISPLAY Ssiecting display update interval page 10 24 O2 ENDC Registering details set selected with set up menu and terminating set up menu page 10 24 Index 2 IM DR232 01E INDEX A ABSOLUTE Absolute 2 8 6 3 AC adaptere DD DE E 6 3 32 ACGESSORIGS c oe ce tette eder 5 6 setting 1 ERR 9 9 9 10 Additional printouts eese 2 12 A D converter integration 2 4 10 8 Alarm acknowledgment of 2 15 9 15 Search 2 1 4 7 4 8 Status Display MERE 2 1 4 10 See also Copying 9 13 Clearing eee exte eres 9 17 Difference high low ee 2 13 8 2 high limit upper limit eene 2 13 8 2 low limit lower limit 2 13 8 2 See als
199. ata when an event takes place with different recording spans One event must be set for the LD TRIGI LD TRIG2 and LD TRIG3 actions during event action function setting For a detailed description of the event action function refer to 9 1 Setting Event Action Functions page 9 1 Confirming the set up data To confirm the read set up data for the SETUP mode specify SETUP STORE in the same way as the SETUP mode setting Note f set up data saved on another instrument DR series recorder is loaded and does not match this instrument s configuration settings which do not comply with the configuration cannot be made No reading is allowed during computing The communication function remains disabled during reading 11 14 IM DR232 01E 11 5 Copying a Data File Relevant Keys SET MEMORY gt Select Setting Parameter CHART SYSTEM UNIT MATH CONST MEMORY FLOPPY TRI kevuoc Operating Procedure Press the SET key to enter the SET menu Select set using the CS 2 keys although new settings selections will not be kept SET Main menu Ce MR m To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear New settings selections will be kept when you
200. ation dual current dual voltage measurement power monitor modules for three phase use only A SOURCE LOAD ne AN Zt Three phase Three wire Configuration triple current triple voltage measurement power monitor modules for three phase use only SOURCE R Three phase Four wire Configuration power monitor modules for three phase use only SOURCE LOAD IM DR232 01E 3 23 pue uoneyyersu 3 7 Connecting the Signal Lines Wiring Strain Input Signal Lines Please apply the optional DV450 001 strain conversion cable when using a bridge box or strain gage without sensor line Wiring Diagrams Model with Built in Bridge Jumper setup switches Slo olo I I foel I Wr T T I I 0 UE cue I lii T o 1 I 0
201. ation channels x 4 6 x specified data length For instance if the number of channels is 10 number of computation channels is 5 and specified data length is 5k the data size can be calculated as follows Data size 576 64 x 10 5 10 x 2 5 x 4 6 x 5k 231 536 bytes Status display during saving The following status symbols are displayed in the sub display 2 lowest display section Y Saving is in progress Awaiting a trigger Restrictions during saving The following settings can not be made while saving is in progress Settings relating to media except for saving stop setting Measuring range Computation equation constant Group IM DR232 01E 11 2 Reading Measured and Computed Data Relevant Keys Operating Procedure Gai OS recess SET MEMORY rcgem GO Cree INS DEL Select Setting Parameter SYSTEM UNIT MATH CONST MEMORY FLOPPY TR kevLoc cuart set Press the SET key to enter the SET menu Select set using the CS keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Reading measured computed data immediately from the RAM disk
202. ay update interval is 2 seconds Bargraph Mode This mode can be set for sub display 1 Measurement values which are shown on the main display will be shown as a bargraph The display update interval is the same as the interval of the main display Alarm Status Mode This mode can be set for sub display 1 and 2 The display will show per channel whether or not an alarm occurred refer to page 2 13 On one display the alarm status of a maximum of 30 channels can be monitored depending on the number of input channels The display update interval is 0 5 seconds Relay Status Mode This mode can be set for sub display 1 and 2 The display will show the operating status of internal switches alarm output relays refer to page 2 13 On one display a maximum of 30 relay statuses can be monitored The display update interval is 1 second Clock Mode This mode can only be set for sub display 2 The current date and time are shown Displaying the Selected Mode To the right of sub display 1 the currently selected display mode is shown for a specific display Status Display Indicators at the right side of the display will light up to show that recording is in progress refer to page 2 5 alarms are occuring refer to page 2 13 keys are locked refer to page 2 17 and chart needs to be replaced refer to page 2 18 Remote Local Status Display The status of remote local control will be show on sub display 2 Keys cannot be operated in remote
203. be counted from the point of turning the power switch ON or of resetting the timer Each time the preset length of time is reached and thus when time is up recording will start Absolute time A reference time is set and from that time recording will start at preset time intervals each time when time is up SINGLE The logging interval is decided automatically depending on the chart speed and the number of columns for digital printouts Recording interval in logging mode This recording interval can be selected from MULTIPLE or SINGLE MULTIPLE Same as for the analog trend mode SINGLE From the above mentioned six preset recording intervals the interval set as Timer 1 will become the recording interval Resetting the Recording Interval Timer Reset This function will reset the elapsed time of the above mentioned MULTIPLE recording interval to zero Usually recording will start according to the recording intervals but when you reset the elapsed time using this function the results are the same as for time up IM DR232 01E 2 3 Recording Functions Recording Span Starting Stopping Recording The maximum value and the minimum value of the measurement range are decided when setting the type of input The difference between the minimum value and maximum value which will be recorded within this measurement range is called the recording span The value on the left and right side of the recording are called the left spa
204. ble code eos 2 3 3 1 3 29 3 31 3 32 oru 1 2 1 3 3 33 1 3 3 30 3 31 Power supply voltage sese 2 4 3 29 to 3 35 Pte ATI S SOL xcci REESE REPERI RO RENE Me seine 11 5 PRINT k6y 7 2 Printing pitch iur teet HI 2 1 10 5 Printout printing Additional trt UR Re S 2 12 Priority for recording colors 2 2 2 10 Protective grounding sse See grounding Pulse input module eene 1 2 3 26 5 14 Q R Rack mount kit rack mounting eee 6 3 3 RANGE KY merat Chapter 5 RATE for partially expanded recording 2 10 6 7 IM DR232 01E Index 5 xepu INDEX Recording SOLES cus D See also priority 2 8 10 14 direction horizontal or vertical printing 2 7 10 5 example nn at Rees 2 6 2 7 2 11 f nctiobis R 2 5 to 2 12 Interval aai a See Interval GL MNT ERE RN 2 5 6 2 Normal NORMAL 2 9 10 4 Partially expanded sse 2 10 6 7 2 9 5 3 widen 2 9 7 1 to 7 4 9 10 2 6 2 7 10 5 See also Zone 2 9 6 7 7 1 See Alarm reflashing Reference
205. ce release mark message channel No or tag and time of occurrence release will be printed on the right side of the chart Logging Mode f an alarm occurs the type of alarm will be printed together with the measured value f an alarm occurs or is canceled the alarm occurrence cancellation mark channel No TAG the type of alarm time when the alarm occurs cancels and messages are printed after all the measured values Displaying Alarm Information Alarm Indicator ALARM Indicator When at least one alarm occurs the ALARM indicator at the right of the display will light Display per Channel In sub display 1 or 2 the alarm statuses of a maximum of 30 channels according to the specifications can be displayed refer to page 2 1 Besides when the measurement value of a channel where an alarm occurred is being displayed the type of alarm will appear between the channel number and the measurement value Channel No Type of alarm Measurement value 001 H 10 000mV Alarm Display Hold Function This function allows the alarm display to remain even when the alarm has already been released This function can be selected ON or OFF and applies to all alarms When the function is set to ON if an alarm occurs the alarm display flashes Alarm Acknowledge Function This function only resets the display and therefore allows you to verify the current alarm status on the display When the alarm display hold function is ON sele
206. ch is also called as overvoltage category 2 Polution degree is the level of foreign body adhesion such as the solid liquid and gas which decrease the wuthstanding voltage 2 means general indoor atmosphere 14 8 IM DR232 01E 14 1 Specifications of DR232 DR242 and DS400 DS600 Effect of Operating Conditions Ambient temperature Variation for a temperature change of 10 C within 0 196 of rdg 1 digit 0 2 of span 1 digit for Cul0Q Voltage variation within 1 digit over the range of 90 to 132 or 180 to 250 VAC for AC power supply frequency 50 60Hz 10 to 32 VDC for the subunit of a DC power supply model External magnetic field variation with respect to AC 50 60Hz and DC magnetic fields of 400 A m within 0 1 of rdg 10 digits Except for power monitor module within 15 of range Signal source resistance variation with respect to signal source resistance 1 k change 1 voltage 2 V range or below within X10uV 6 V range or above within 0 1 of rdg 2 thermocouple within 10uV however it must be within 100UV when burnout is specified 3 RTD Variation with respect to change of 100 per wire when all wires have the same resistance value Indication within 0 1 of rdg 1 digit Variation in indication with respect to a difference of 40mQ in the resistance between conductors max difference between 3 wires approx 0 1 C in case of Pt100 Mounting position Variation when the unit is mounted horizontally
207. containing measured computed data must be copied from the floppy disk to the RAM disk However data in ASCII format cannot be copied It is not possible to change the file name when copying the file 11 16 IM DR232 01E 11 6 Copying in ASCII Format em SET MEMORY ux rece QD Ce Select Setting Parameter CHART SYSTEM UNIT MATH CONST MEMORY FLOPPY TR set enter Operating Procedure Press the SET key to enter the SET menu Select set using the GS keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Main menu SET gt gt gt gt gt 5 MEMORY ENTER MEMORY COPY ENTER CH SET WRITE READ SAVE LOAD COPY DELETE INFO INIT 4 COPY MODE TO FDD ENTER TOFDD FROM FDD 4 COPY TYPE DATA ENTER DATA PANEL 4 COPY FILE AAA ENTER AAA BBB CCC DDD 4 COPY CONVERT ON ENTER ON OFF 4 COPY CH 001 A05 D gt Select Channel No 4 COPY CH 001 A05 ENTER gt Select Channel No 4 COPYDAT 1 200 gt Start limit 1 200000 4 COPY DAT 1 200 ENTER Start limit 1 200000 4
208. cording Trend recording on alarm occurrence trigger level Group trend recording Auxiliary printing functions During analog trend recording and logging setting information and comments and such will be printed Chart speed mm hour x analog trend recording interval must not exceed 3000 Printout items Engineering unit channel number TAG alarm scale title message Event Action function Recording can be started or the chart speed changed by alarm output status remote control signal chart end signal timer or key operation Relation between the chart speed and recording interval analog trend mode however chart speed mm hour x analog trend recording interval must not exceed 3000 Chanel No ini Alarm scale Digital print Chart speed TAG message 1 9mm h Record enabled Record disabled Record enabled 10 1500mm h Record enabled Record enabled Record enabled Recording interval for digital printout and chart speed When the logging interval is SINGLE however chart speed mm hour x analog trend recording interval must not exceed 3000 Unit hour Chart speed Number of digital print rows 1 row 2 row 3 row 4 row 10 24mm h 24 12 8 6 25 49mm h 8 4 4 2 50 99mm h 4 2 2 1 100 1500mm h 2 1 1 1 When the logging interval is MULTIPLE Set by timer IM DR232 01E 14 1 Specifications of DR232 DR242 and DS400 DS600 Other functions Manual printout One scan s worth of data
209. cording Channel and Recording Interval Setting the Recording Interval TIMER of the Digital Printout for the Logging and Analog Trend Mode TIMER No You can set up to six recording intervals A recording interval can be set for each channel individually Refer to 6 4 on page 6 9 for details TIME MODE The following two modes can be selected The default is RELATIVE RELATIVE the number of days hours minutes can be set to any value between 00 days 00 hours 01 minute to 31 days 23 hours and 59 minutes in one minute steps The default setting is 00 days 01 hours and 00 minutes ABSOLUTE the time interval can be selected from the following settings The default setting is 1h 1 min 2min 3min 4min 5min 6min 10min 12min 15min 20min 30min 1h 2h 4h 6h 8h 12h and 24h The reference time is set by the hour and minutes The default value is 00 hrs 00 min IM DR232 01E suonipuoo bumes 6 2 Setting the Chart Speed Relevant Keys mer WEBS recess RECORD ESG SET CHART suce C INS DEL Select Setting Parameter css CHART CLOCK CD ser enter Operating Procedure Setting Chart Speed 1 1 Press the CHART key to enter the SET menu 2 Select set using the GS keys 3 To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear
210. cores Personal computer i cm Ferrite core m E Function grounding terminal IM DR232 01E 3 44 4 1 Using the AUTO Display Relevant Keys Operating Procedure DISP MODE KS RECORD ESC FUNC PRINT O FEED INS DEL RANGE ALARM oe M FUNC 1 CHART SET ENTER MFuNc2 AUTO Display for the Main Display 1 Select the main display using the DISP key Direct the arrow mark on the Sub display upward 2 Select AUT using the MODE key Sub display 1 008 0 0045V 004 0 0931V AAUT AUTO Display for Sub display 1 1 Select sub display 1 using the DISP key Direct the arrow mark on the Sub display leftward 2 Select AUT using the MODE key Sub display 1 004 0 0926V 005 0 0824V AUT AUTO Display for Sub display 2 1 Select sub display 2 using the DISP key Direct the arrow mark on the Sub display downward 2 Select AUT using the MODE key Sub display 1 005 0 8210V 006 0 0095V WAUT IM DR232 01E 4 1 Aejdsiq epo 101u0Jy ay Dunes 4 1 Using the AUTO Display Explanation AUTO Display for the Main Display Channel No The first three characters are used for displaying the channel number Delete The first character always displays 0 will be displayed in th
211. ct s turn on make and turn off break times on 1 off 0 over the last one second interval of measurement Note The computing function computational expression TLOG PSUM XXX should be used when integrating an every second count or turn on time maximum count turn on time 99999999 Input Range 0 to 6 000 pulses or 0 to 10 pulses if the filter is on for voltage free input Ratio of make at input 35 to 65 at the maximum frequency ratio of make closed contact time closed contact time open contact time x 100 Minimum input pulse width 60 us whether the contact is closed or open Measuring Accuracies As described below under the following operating conditions Ambient temperature 23 2 C ambient humidity 55 10 RH power supply voltage 90 to 250 VAC AC power supply 10 to 32 VDC the subunit of a DC power supply model only power supply frequency 50 60Hz within 1 AC power supply warm up time 30 minutes or more vibrations and others not affecting instrument operation Count 1 pulse for integration 1 scan 1 second at the start of measurement and 1 scan 1 5 seconds at the end of measurement Turn on time 100 ppm accuracy for judgment of one second interval sampling for integration 1 second 1 scan at the start of measurement and 100 ppm of rdg 1 5 seconds 1 scan at the end of measurement Module to module error 3 seconds 1 pulse for count and 200 ppm 3 seconds
212. ct the on off states by means of any variations occurring in the instantaneous value every second Once you connect the pulse input module you can sum up values without the need for the computing function Skipping Input Channels This function allows skipping measurement recording and display of channels you are not using Measurement recording and display will not be done for the skipped channels Reference Junction Compensation RJC This function is to be used when measuring temperatures using thermocouples The voltage generated by a thermocouple depends on the temperature of the spot of measurement and the reference junction temperature Reference junction compensation is a function which compensates the temperature at the side of the measurement instrument to 0 degrees C To compensate for the environmental temperature an internal circuit can be selected or compensation by a fixed compensation voltage value external can be set IM DR232 01E suonoun4 2 2 Measurement Input Functions Scan Interval A D Integration Time Input Filter The duration of time one scan in which the measurement of all channels is carried out is called the scan interval This interval can be set to any value from 0 5 second to 60 seconds The shortest is 300 ch 500 ms varies with the shortest measurement period of the input module This instrument measures the input signal after putting it through an A D converter In order to min
213. cted Module information INF Displays the information in the module installed in the slot SYSTEM Displays the information recognized as the system module REAL Displays the real module information when the recognized system module is replaced by another one or removed f the SYSTEM displays information different from that of REAL module the following system must be configured Otherwise an operation error may occur or the recorder may display measured values incorrectly The information on individual modules is displayed as follows Module Display ID inside the display Description Input module INPUT 00 to 3F DI DO module REMOTE 57 Alarm module RELAY 5C to 5F Communication module COMM 48 to 4F Module not installed FF Invalid module installed Module error XXXXXX Displays error code 80 to FF Displaying communications information COMM INF When the communication module is recognized as a system module communications information is displayed For details on the communication information see Section 3 5 Connecting the Interface Cables on page 3 14 or the separate DR231 232 DR241 DR242 Communication Interface User s Manual publication number IM DR231 11E System configuration RE SYSTEM Modules are recognized as system modules for this recorder NO Modules are not recognized as system modules YES Modules are recognized as system modules It takes about 15 seconds to recogn
214. cting the ALARM ACK menu results the alarm display changing from flashing to lit and will turn off when the alarm is released This setting applies to all alarms Alarm Reset You can reset the internal switches and alarm output relays and the corresponding displays The previously mentioned alarm acknowledge function has the same function as resetting the alarm display here Resetting the internal switches and alarm output relays when the relay hold function is set to ON has the following affects and depends on the alarm status when alarms occur continuously the internal switches alarm output relays will turn to their non operative status for a short period but soon change into their operation status when alarms are released the internal switches alarm output relays turn to their non operative status IM DR232 01E 2 15 suonoun4 2 5 Standard Computation Functions Standard computations such as difference between channels and linear scaling can be set with measurement input settings A moving average computation is also available Difference between Channels Linear Scaling Moving Average This function conputes the difference between the measurement values of a selected channel reference channel and any other channel destination channel This can be applied to each channel in the same unit The computation formula is as follows Result of difference between channels computation measurement value of destination
215. d starting with the data acquisition systems DA series which performs data logging For example using a printer as the output device the equipment becomes a hybrid recorder DR series Two models are available in the DR series the DR230 and DR240 The DR 230 is a desk top hybrid recorder and the DR240 is a panel mount hybrid recorder component type Personal computer Subunit Input output FD modules E E a Extension cables max length 500m E E IM DR232 01E uejs S 1 2 Product Overview This product is a hybrid recorder which can record and measure from small scale 10 ch data up to widely distributed 300 ch multi point data The number of measurement points can be expanded up to a maximum of 300 ch by connecting up to six subunits DS400 DS600 to a main unit DR232 242 Using dedicated extension cables between units interconnections can be extended up to 500 m Since measured objects scattered over a wide area can be wired fast and with a minimum of wiring a flexible extensive measurement system can be configured The input modules to be incorporated in the DR232 242 or DS400 600 can be selected from the following to suit your measurement conditions Universal input module and DCV TC DI input module Temperature DC voltage and contact signals can be measured but cannot be connected to the main unit mA input M
216. d the Recording Span Relevant Keys esr 77 recens ESC 001 10 SCL VOLT 2V QD Ca gt CHART SKIP VOLT TC RTD DI DELTA SCL cuart ser 2 Operating Procedure 1 Press the RANGE key to enter the RANGE menu 2 Select set using the O keys 3 To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept 4 New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Main menu 001 01 VOLT 2V gt Select Channel No Lower menu 4 001 01 VOLT 2VO O 001 01 VOLT 2V gt Select Channel No OQ L 001 01 SCL VOLT 2V 001 01 SCL VOLT 2V 4 001 01 SCL VOLT 2V 20mV 60mV 200 2V 6V 20V 50V 4 SPAN 2 0000 2 0000V Span limit 2 0000 2 0000V a 4 SCL 0 00 100 00 4 GET OK 001 01 SCL TC R D 4 001 01 SCL TC R ENTER RSBKEJTNWLU KP 4 SPAN 0 0 1760 0C ENTER gt limit 0 0 1760 0 C 4 SCL 0 00 100 00 ENTER 4 SET OK ESC To the next page 5 4 IM DR232 01E 5 2 Setting Linear Scaling and the Recording Span Explanation From the previous page 001 01 SCL RTD PT1 D 4 001 01 SCL RTD PT1 ENTER PT1 PT2 JPT1 JPT2 PT50 NI1
217. d value display items The following shows where the universal input modules are calibrated The calibrating procedures for DC V TC DI input modules are those except RTD in universal input modules 15 The calibrated values are displayed as follows 20mV ZERO 1 gt S_UNITO MODULE 0 gt 16 Press the ENTER key 17 Display the calibrated value display items in the following order Repeat steps 15 and 16 above 20 mV SPAN gt 60 mV ZERO gt 60 mV SPAN gt 200 mV ZERO 200 mV SPAN gt 2 ZERO 2 V SPAN gt 6 V ZERO gt 6 V SPAN gt 20 V ZERO gt 20 V SPAN gt 50V ZERO 50 V SPAN 9 Pt 1 mA ZERO 9 Pt 1 mA SPAN gt Pt 2 mA ZERO 9 Pt 2 mA SPAN Pt 1 mA H SPAN gt Pt 2 mA H SPAN gt Cu 2 mA ZERO gt Cu 2 mA SPAN For a mA input module show the calibrated values in the order 20 mA ZERO and 20 mA SPAN For a strain input module show the calibrated values in the following order 2k ZERO 2k SPAN 20k ZERO 20k SPAN 200k ZERO and 200k SPAN For a digital input module show the calibrated value in the following order 60mV ZERO 60mV SPAN 6V ZERO 6V SPAN 18 After checking the Cu 2 mA SPAN calibrated value in the above calibrated value display items press the ENTER key DISPLAY END gt 5 UNIT MODULE No 0 gt 19 Press the ENTER key 13 10 IM DR232 01E 13 5 Calibration Explanation Completing the selected module calibration with
218. ding zone is 150mm or more scaled values at each 20 interval of the recording span will be printed at positions at 20 intervals of the zone e when the recording zone is 50mm to 149mm scaled values at 0 and 100 of the recording span will be printed at 0 and 100 positions of the zone ON2 Scaled values at 0 and 100 of the recording span will be printed at 0 and 100 positions of the zone ON3 when the recording zone is 100mm or more scaled values at 0 50 and 100 of the recording span will be printed at 0 50 and 100 positions of the zone e when the recording zone is 50mm to 99mm scaled values at 0 and 100 of the recording span will be printed at 0 and 100 positions of the zone When Partial Expanded Recording is ON OFF Scaled values will not be printed ONI ON2 ON3 when the recording zone is 100mm or more scaled values at 0 100 of the recording span and at the boundary value will be printed at 0 100 and boundary value positions of the zone when the recording zone is 50mm to 99mm scaled values at 0 and 100 of the recording span will be printed at 0 and 100 positions of the zone List Printout LIST PR This setting can be assigned to each channel individually The default setting is ON Starting a list printout can be done at the PRINT menu refer to 7 2 on page 7 2 If the instrument is equipped with the optional computation function or floppy disk drive this setting can also be made for comp
219. ditions For DS400 DS600 in order to cut down on unnecessary radio interference attach a clamp filter accessory near the power cord plug as shown below Make a loop with the power cord and clamp it in the clamp filter Rated supply voltage 100 to 240 V AC free power supply operating voltage 90 to 250 V AC Rated supply voltage frequency 50 60 Hz Power consumption DR232 About 130 VA max DS400 About 55 VA max DS600 About 70 VA max Use a three pole power outlet provided with a protective ground terminal DR232 DS400 DS600 Power connector AC outlet Auxiliary for DS400 DS600 SAM Power switch Power cord IM DR232 01E 3 29 pue 3 9 Connecting the Power Cord and Turning the Power ON OFF When Using an Adapter for Direct Wiring to the Power Supply AN DR242 DS400 DS600 when connecting wires to screw terminals This applies only to products with power inlet W suffix code Follow the warnings below to avoid electric shock or damaging the instrument Connect the power wires after checking that the power supply is turned off to prevent electric shock To prevent fire use 600 V PVC insulated wire AWG18 for both power and ground wiring cross section of 0 83 or thicker anti galvanic corrosion finish insulation thickness more than 0 8 mm insulation resistance more than 50 MQ km at 20 C approved EN60 320 VDE0625 or equivalent cables
220. ds SET MANUALPR Section 6 4 Alarm print Press the SET key for about three seconds SET ALARM PR Section 6 5 Channel to print scale Press the SET key for about three seconds SET SCALE PR Section 6 6 values Channel to list print Press the SET key for about three seconds SET LIST PR Section 6 6 Items to list print Press the SET key for about three seconds SET LIST FMT Section 6 6 Message Press the SET key for about three seconds SET MESSAGE Section 6 7 Header Press the SET key for about three seconds SET HEADER Section 6 7 Title Press the SET key for about three seconds SET TITLE Section 6 7 Interpolation Press the SET key for about three seconds SET INTERPOL Section 6 8 Adjust dot printing position Recording format Dot print color Turn ON power while pressing Turn ON power while pressing Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key the DISP key the DISP key SET UPZPRN ADJ SET UP RECORD SET UP COLOR Section 10 1 Section 10 2 Section 10 6 Procedure varies according to the menu configuration of the SET key see section 10 9 Parameters Procedure Selecting menu Reference Switch display DISP key and MODE key Chapter 4 Display update interval Turn ON power while pressing the SET UP DISPLAY Section 10 10 DISP key Parameters Procedure Selecting menu Reference Alarm alarm output ALARM key 001 01 1 OFF Section 8 1 relay Alarm Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key SETUP ALAR
221. e Computation equation constant Group Copying with RANGE COPY set to on IM DR232 01E 12 9 IPPON LIN ejqerreAv uoneinduio Bunnoox3 12 4 Starting Stopping Computation Main menu ite SET MATCH TIME m Examples of Setting Using the Event Action Functions Sum the values measured on channel 001 from 8 00 to 9 00 every day Setting the MATCH TIME field Configure the DR recorder so events occur at 8 00 and 9 00 every day Submenu items ENTER MATCH TIME No 1 Main menu item SET LOGIC ENTER 123 4 1 TIME 00 08 00 gt Set Day amp Time DD HH MM 00 4 SET OK configuration complete i MATCH TIME No 2 123 4 1 TIME 00 09 00 gt Set Day amp Time DD HH MM 00 i SET OK configuration complete Setting the EVENT ACTION fields ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER Selects match timer no 1 Sets the date to 00 and time to 8 00 Selects match timer no 2 Sets the date to 00 and time to 9 00 Configure the DR recorder so it uses the match time as the event to clear computed values and then start computing at 8 00 and ends computing at 9 00 Submenu items LOGIC BOX No 1 01 to 30 4 EVT MATCH TIME 1 4 ACT EDGE MATH CLEAR J OK configuration complete LOGIC BOX No 2 01 to 30 EVT MATGH TIME 1
222. e DR recorder adds Y to the time on a printout provided upon recovery from a power failure It does not print the character however if it has been more than 12 hours since the power failure occurred The DR recorder excludes data occurring during a power failure from its reports If the DR recorder recovers from a power failure after the time to make a report it makes a report immediately after the recovery In an application where the REPORT PRINT menu item is set to on for automatic printing the DR recorder prints a report only immediately after it recovers from a power failure if the power failure time is less than 12 hours and the recorder has recovered after the preset time for report printing In an application where the REPORT PRINT menu item is set to on for automatic printing the DR recorder prints a report at the scheduled time for report printing if a power failure time is less than 12 hours and the recorder has recovered before the preset time for report printing If a power failure time is longer than 12 hours the DR recorder stops report making even if the power is restored The recorder prints a report for data acquired up to the power failure however immediately after it recovers from the power failure If a power failure time is longer than 12 hours the DR recorder does not print a report even if the menu item for automatic printing is set to on In that case you can print a report from the FUNC menu or send data to a com
223. e case of optional computation channels If you selected TAG at the channel No TAG setting in the set up mode refer to 10 2 on page 10 4 the assigned tag will appear for each channel The first 7 characters of the TAG setting will be displayed If the TAG setting consists of only spaces the channel number will be displayed instead If the first character of the TAG setting is a space the 2nd to 8th character will be displayed Difference between Channels delta One character is used to let you know that difference between channels delta is displayed However it will not be displayed in the case of optional computation channels Only if you selected the difference between channels delta as the input type d will be displayed here Alarms Two characters are used for displaying alarms One channel is used in the case of optional channels When an alarm occurs the kind of alarm will be displayed When in one channel several alarms occur at the same time the priority of display becomes H L dH dL RH RL For details on H L dH dL RH and RL alarms refer to page 8 2 Measurement Values Seven characters are used for displaying the measurement values The decimal point uses up one character Nine channel is used in the case of optional computation channels When a measurement value does not reach the following value will be displayed DC voltage a minimum value of the measuring
224. e last channel cannot be smaller than the number of the first channel When both channel numbers are equal settings will only apply to that particular channel When you have set the first channel number and you move the cursor to the last channel setting the channel number of the first channel setting will appear here IM DR232 01E 5 1 Setting the Type of Input and Recording Span Selecting the Type of Input The following types of input can be selected The default setting is VOLT SKIP Measurement recording and display except for page display will not be carried out Measurement recording and display will be carried out for the next channel whose input type is not set to SKIP VOLT DC voltage This input type can be selected from 20mV 60mV 200mV 2V 6V 20V and 50V Refer to chapter 14 for the measurement range of each setting The default setting is 2V TC thermocouple This input type can be selected from R S B K E J T N W L U and KP KPvsAU7Fe Refer to chapter 14 for the measurement range of each setting The default setting is R RTD resistance temperature detector This input type can be selected from PT1 Pt100 1mA PT2 Pt100 2mA JPT1 JPt100 1mA JPT2 JPt100 2mA PT50 Pt50 2mA Ni100 1mA SAMA ND 1100 1mA DIN Ni120 1mA CUI 10 GE CU2 Cu10 L amp N Cu10 WEED CU4 Cul0 BAILEY PTIS Pt100 1mA high resolution PT2S Pt100 2mA high resolution JPT1S
225. e many restrictions on this use and perfect shielding is impossible Therefore use of a twisted pair is preferable Voltage em induced by the coil is proportional to the area of the coil The smaller the area of the coil becomes the smaller the noise becomes Coil em 01 N Magnetic field If the directions of coils 1 and 2 are reversed by twisting as shown if the areas of the two coils are equal the induced voltages of the coils offset each other and total induced voltage em becomes zero em coil 1 coil 2 The above two principles are combined as a twisted pair Even though a shielded twisted pair is used a proper grounding method is still important Signal source Wisted pair shield Connected equipment If the signal source is not grounded Power na source Wlsted pair shie connected equipment Ground the signal cable shields collectively but separately from the power line ground If the separation of grounds is impossible use the guard terminal 3 42 IM DR232 01E 3 11 Countering Noise Insertion of noise filter and noise killer If the influence from noise cannot be eliminated by the methods described before use noise filter or noise killer Power line noise rejection Step 1 Insert an isolation transformer into the power line Increasing impedance to high frequency Power supply 1 6 3 E The Most of the noise is instrume
226. e onto the sub unit The module cannot be mounted to the DR recorder itself Wire the extension module to the extension base with an extension cable You can wire a maximum of three extension bases to one extension module at the same time It is not possible however to wire extension bases in such a manner that the total sum of modules already mounted on the sub unit and the extension bases being wired exceeds the maximum number of modules four for the DS400 sub unit and six for the DS600 sub unit allowed for mounting on the sub unit Either a 10 channel universal input module DU100 11 or DU100 12 or a 10 channel DCV TC DI module DU200 11 or DU200 12 can be mounted onto each extension base Extension module DV100 011 2 Sub unit DS400 600 e Extension Extension cable cable lot number setup switch Select an unused slot number 9 ole B Terminator on off switch pisse xs Set this switch to ON for the last extension m T E E base in the connection ey Either 10 channel universal input module ERO DU100 11 or DU100 12 or a 10 channel ae DCV TC DI module DU200 11 or DU200 12 aid ile J Extension base DV100 012
227. e or the DI DO module is mounted and recognized as the system of this instrument Also there are menus which cannot be set to the internal switches Setting Re failure or Re alarm REFLASH This is a menu which canot be displayed unless the alarm module or the DI DO module is mounted and recognized as the system of this instrument Setting for the internal switches cannot be done REFLASH setting is available for up to six relays Selection of REFLASH number Select from 1 to 6 Setting of REFLASH relay OFF not set Setting with numerals for 3 characters The first character is the unit number For the second and third characters a number from 01 to 60 can be set but the effective setting range is as shown in the following examples Check which what slot the alarm module or the DI DO module is mounted in using the model number of mounted modules and their mounted positions Slot numbers are set in the order of slot 0 slot 1 facing the front Ex 1 When the alarm module is mounted in slot 3 31 to 40 Ex 2 The DI DO module is mounted in slot4 41 to 42 The default setting is OFF After REFLASH setting when the alarm module or the DI DO module becomes unrecognized as the system of this instrument the relay setting becomes OFF Setting AND OR AND This can be set either to the relays or the internal switches However the relay cannot be set unless the alarm module or DI DO module is mounted and recognized as t
228. e same time the DR recorder prints them while giving priority to a data item with a smaller number among the numbers noted above Notes on daylight savings time When the function to shift the time scale between standard time and daylight savings time is specified the report for the day to shift from standard time to the daylight savings time seemingly includes data for only a 23 hour day and at the same time the report for the day to shift daylight savings time to standard time seemingly includes the data for a 25 hour day If you specify the time to make a report at the same time as the shift from standard time to daylight savings time or vice versa the report will be generated based on the time scale after the shift 10 34 IM DR232 01E 11 1 Saving Measured and Computed Data Procedure for Saving Data When saving measured computed data on a floppy disk save them first on the DR recorder s built in RAM disk and then copy them to the floppy disk You can save the data on the built in RAM disk in three ways as summarized in the following table Menu Item Method for Starting Saving Number of Files Saved DIRECT Immediately starts saving when the setting is complete One TRIGGER Starts saving when an event occurs as set using the One event action functions REPEAT Starts saving when an event occurs as set using the More than one event action functions The DR recorder continues to save an array of files of the specifi
229. e terminals Always make sure to re apply the terminal cover The thermal capacity of the wiring should be small cross sectional area of less than 0 5mm Minimize outside temperature fluctuations as much as possible To prevent noise make sure to ground each unit at the grounding function terminal below the power switch together at one point Refrain from wiring the input signals parallel However if you do then the following considerations are necessary Ground all equipment at the same point Do not turn the power of other equipment ON OFF during operation Do not use the burnout function 3 20 IM DR232 01E 3 7 Connecting the Signal Lines Wiring Input Signal Lines to Universal DCV TC DI and Digital input modules Terminals Screw type terminal Clamp type terminal DC voltage 1 There are no RTD contact b B A RTD 9 CH1 CH2 CH2 SSS CH4 SSS SSS lee ev et Jem e Jio lt gt e SSS CH10 SSS CH10 Wiring Diagra
230. e the span 06 Attempted to make range setting during Stop making range setting computation 10 Syntax error for computation constant Set the constant correctly 11 Out of constant setting range Set the constant within the range 20 Floppy disk not inserted or not formatted Insert a formatted floppy disk into the drive 21 Insufficient memory Delete unnecessary files 22 Incorrect file name or volume name Set the correct file name or volume name 23 Attempted to make settings which are not Stop making the settings Delete unnecessary files Select data which has been saved by DR DA or reading of measured data 31 RAM disk error or floppy disk is ejected while bein accessed being saved or read 32 Attempted to format the disk while a file is open 34 Set up data saving error 35 Internal data error 36 Incorrect copy channel 37 Computation is started while set up data is 27 Attempted to save data in a write protected file Cancel write protection 28 No event action has been set Set the desired action 30 Incorrect channel found during saving Set the correct channel Clear the error and attemt the same operation or contact your nearest sales represantative Close the file Set the correct copy channel Stop Computation 38 Floppy disk error Use another floppy disk 39 Other media related error 40 Sub units selected which are not connected Specify correct sub units or the power is not supplied 41 Disconn
231. eakage current at OFF state 0 25mA max Duration of input signal one second or longer input signal detection internal approx 0 5 seconds 14 28 IM DR232 01E 14 10 Communication Interface Module Type Type Description DT300 11 GP IB DT300 21 RS232 C DT300 31 RS 422 A RS 485 DT300 41 Ethernet General Specifications GP IB Module RS 232 C Module Power consumption Included in the main unit or the subunit to which the module is to be installed Normal operating temperature humidity 20 to 80 RH for 0 to 40 C 10 to 50 RH for 40 to 50 C no condensation Style Number S4 Electrical and mechanical specifications conform to IEEE Standard 488 1978 Code ISO ASCII code Address 0 to 15 Functions Talker functions Output of measurement values ASCII binary output of setting parameters ASCII Listener functions Setting of measurement conditions control sof starting and stopping measurement specifying causes of interrupts excluding setting and control of power ON OFF Causes of interrupts Syntax error chart end completion of A D conversion operations of internal timer end of data saving reading incomplete measurement during computation External dimensions Approx 57 W x 137 H x 54 D mm Weight 0 3kg Style Number S8 Electrical and mechanical specifications conform to standard EIA RS 232 C Connection method point to point Communication method half dupl
232. ecause no change takes place on the computed data If you want the start of computing and report making enabled at the same time use the event action functions to assign both of these instructions to the same event as actions Time Relationship Between the Settings of the REPORT START STOP Menu Items and Report Making The following figure shows the time relationship between the settings of the REPORT START STOP menu items and report making Report n Report 3 Report 2 EF 1 d A y oH Report 1 7 a4 400 Start of report Stop of report making making A A A Time to make report Time to make report Time to make report A denotes the point in time a report is created Data items included in the first round of report making after the start of report making are fewer in number than those included in the second and subsequent rounds of report making The DR recorder samples data before stopping report making The report created when the DR recorder stops making reports thus includes those data If the time when report making is started coincides with the time the report is created the start of report making precedes Thus no report is created The data sampled at the same time report making started are included in first round of report making The report created when the DR recorder stops making reports thus includes those data If you have defined timer and match time signals as
233. ected 3 Hold the input unit so that the male part of the connector at the back side of the input unit matches the female part of the receiving connector Then connect the unit 4 Fasten the input unit by fastening the two accessory M3 screws Cover Switch for setting the 5 SN unit number T e J settable from 0 to 5 s p a 96 Input 2 the unit numbei P Screws to fasten the module Modules Which Can be Used Not more than one DI DO module can be connected to all units Main unit DR232 DR242 Alarm module DI DO module and communication interface module Note The input module cannot be connected Number of modules that can be connected 1 Subunit DS400 DS600 Input module alarm module and DI DO module Number of modules that Dqn be connected 4 for DS400 6 for DS600 up to 300 DS400 Input module alarm module DI DO module max four DS600 Input module alarm module DI DO module max six Note No alarm module or DI DO module can be connected to the right side of an input module since the rise in temperature would hinder the measurement accuracy Verify the type of module by the seal on the top side Do not connect the universal input module and the power monitor module in slots next to eachother Keep them at least slot apart If you mount the power module immediately beside the universal module the measuring accuracy of the universal module may f
234. ected modules were selected Specify correct modules 43 Modules selected which cannot be calibrated Specify correct modules 44 Calibration done improperly Check electrical connections Calibrate again If the same error occurs again contact your nearest Sales representative 45 Hardware becomes faulty during calibration Turn off the power and then on Calibrate again If the same error occurs again contact your nearest Sales representative 70 The IP address does not belong to any of the Set the correct IP address classes A B or C 71 There is a hole in the mask or the host Set the correct subnet mask address section is not released 72 The net address section including the subnet Set the correct net address does not match the subnet section of the IP address 73 The host address section of the IP address is Set the correct IP address either all zeroes or all ones ROM ERROR System ROM error Contct your nearest sales representative ROM ERROR System ROM error Contct your nearest sales representative RAM ERROR Main memory error Contct your nearest sales representative RAM DISK ERROR RAM disk error Contct your nearest sales FLOPPY ERROR Floppy disk error MAIN NV READ ERROR MAIN NV WRITE ERROR Internal nonvolatile memory read error Internal nonvolatile memory write error representative Contct your nearest sales representative Contct your nearest sales rep
235. ecutive channel When the input type of all channels is set to SKIP then depending on the display settings as described below NO ALARM will be displayed When the main display is set to ALARM SEARCH display then this will be displayed on the main display regardless the settings of sub display 1 and 2 When sub display 1 is set to ALARM SEARCH display and the main display is set to any other mode than ALARM SEARCH then this will be displayed on sub display 1 regardless the setting of sub display 2 e When sub display 2 is set to ALARM SEARCH display and the main display is set to any other mode than ALARM SEARCH and sub display 1 to any other mode than ALARM SEARCH then this will be displayed on sub display 2 When on any of the main sub displayl or sub display 2 NO ALARM appears other displays which may have been set to ALARM SEARCH will turn blank Only the selected display mode on sub display 1 and the status display on sub display 2 will appear 4 8 IM DR232 01E 4 5 Using the BARGRAPH Display Relevant Keys Operating Procedure Explanation Disp MODE C RECORD ESC FUNC PRINT CO FEED INS DEL RANGE ALARM O2 M FUNC 1 CHART SET enter 2 1 Select the sub display 1 using the DISP key 2 Select BAR using the MODE key Display 003 0 0172V 1 5000
236. ed and Computed Data mesisan nieis a E e EEG RATES 11 1 11 2 Reading Measured and Computed Data essere nete 11 7 11 3 Saving Set up Data e diets enam eite 11 10 1144 Readings Setup ee eee aee cea e 11 12 LI5 Gopyinga Data Eie o pedem ere EE eR 11 15 11 6 Copying m ASCHE Format 2 cte tee eee Retirer eter 11 17 IM DR232 01E Contents 11 7 11 8 11 9 11 10 Deleting a Data onere tape ne E 11 20 Displaying RAM Disk and Floppy Disk Information eese 11 21 Initializing the RAM Disk incondita e Ui ee peer E oce Dyer e epe YDG 11 23 Formatting Floppy Disk eerte eee teen gne EE EAE ETE Eee eK aeos saleby 11 24 Chapter 12 Executing Computation Available with the M1 Model 12 1 12 2 12 3 12 4 12 5 Overview of the Computation Function eeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeenen 12 1 Setting a Computation Equation esee eterne nennen ennt tree eterne nne 12 4 Setting a Constant Starting Stopping Computation Setting Actions to be Carried out in Case of Computation Error and Setting the Time Axis for TLOG Chapter 13 Trouble shooting and Maintenance A 13 1 13 2 13 3 13 4 13 5 Periodic Maintenance and Recommended Parts Replacement Period sss 13 1 Replacing the reo HDD eet ede e e E et n dr ede d s 13 2 Troubleshooting 5 noH ea di
237. ed inside the front door See page 3 22 Rear Vacant slot with cover for communication interface alarm or DI DO modules Failure output terminals Chart end output terminals Heat sink fins Power fuse A See page 13 2 located in the main unit r AC outlet Auxiliary for DS400 DS600 A See page 3 30 Power terminals with a cover See page 3 30 Function grounding terminal IM DR232 01E 1 5 uejs S 1 3 Names of Parts Subunit DS400 Subunit DS600 Input modules Module connector Lid covering the extension Switch to set the gt cable connector unit number S BESS holes for 3 module installation Status indicator Installation holes Power switch Function grounding terminal below power switch Power connector Feet Holes for fastening the feet Installation holes Module connector Lid covering the extension cable i connector Screw holes for module installation Switch to set the unit number Status indicator Power switch Function grounding terminal below power switch Power connector Feet Holes for fastening the feet 10 ch Universal input module DU100 11 DU100 12 DU100 11 DU100 12 Clamp terminal Screw terminal
238. ed size until the built in RAM disk becomes full Flow of Operation The following paragraphs show the flow operation for a case where a measured data file is saved using the occurrence of an alarm as a trigger 1 Setting an Event Action Menu Item Setting LOGIC in SET menu LOGIC BOX No EVENT ALARM ACT EDGE MEMORY WR TRIG 2 Selecting a Channel Whose Data Are Saved Menu Item Setting MEMORY in SET menu MEMORY CH SET 001 01 CH SET ON Allowed to set the consecutive numbers of channels 3 Selecting a Method and Condition for Saving Menu Item Setting MEMORY in SET menu MEMORY WRITE WRITE TRIGGER WRITE file File name If new press ENTER leaving the name blank WRITE SAMPLE Interval between file savings WRITE LENGTH Size of file being saved WRITE PRE TRIG Pre trigger not configurable if MEMORY DIRECT 4 Copying Files Saved on Built in RAM Disk to Floppy Disk Menu Item Setting MEMORY in SET menu MEMORY COPY COPY MODE TO FDD COPY TYPE DATA COPY FILE Name of file being copied COPY CONVERT OFF Saved as binary data file ejeg dn 1es pue pounseayy See the following pages for more information on how to configure these menu items IM DR232 01E 11 1 11 1 Saving Measured and Computed Data Relevant Keys meros PB ESC RECOR
239. edure Main menu INS DEL gt Select Setting Parameter CHART i COLOR LOCK FUNC PARM SET PARM DISPLAY eawer arann ser 2 Enter the SET UP menu in the following procedure 1 When the display presents the operation display mode or a menu other than the SET UP menu first turn off the power switch 2 Turn the switch back on while pressing the DISP key and continue pressing the DISP key for about 5 seconds Select set using the CS keys If exiting the following lower menu setting halfway press the MODE ESC key The display returns to the main menu to which the lower menu belongs However newly set or selected contents are canceled When setting proceeds to the display for the setting end the newly set or selected contents are established SETUP eae e C O Lower menu DISPLAY ENTER AUTO INTERVAL 2 ENTER 22345 4 DS AUTO INTVL SET ESC fu 2 END ENTER SETUP ABORT ESC ABORT STORE ENTER SET UP end Explanation Selection of Display Update Period DISPLAY Select the display update interval when the operation display mode in the display is AUTO Select 2 3 4 or 5 seconds The default setting is 2 seconds Registration Abortion of Setting Selection Details and Termination of SET UP menu END In order to make the details set selected in the SET UP menu effective a
240. el 00220 0 when channel 001 nonzero and channel 00220 0 when channel 00120 and channel 002 nonzero 0 when both channel 001 and channel 002 are nonzero 1 Logical sum OR 0010 002 when channel 001 20 and channel 00220 0 when channel 001 nonzero and channel 00220 1 when channel 00120 and channel 002 nonzero 1 when both channel 001 and channel 002 are nonzero 1 Exclusive OR XOR 001XORO002 when channel 00120 and channel 00220 0 when channel 001 nonzero and channel 00220 1 when channel 00120 and channel 002 nonzero 1 when both channel 001 and channel 002 are nonzero 0 Logical negation NOT NOT001 when channel 001 0 1 when channel 001 nonzero 0 Relational operators Type Operator Example Description Equal EQ 001 EQ 002 when channel 001 channel 002 1 when channel 001 channel 002 0 Not equal NE 002 NE 001 when channel 001 z channel 002 1 when channel 001 channel 002 0 Greater than 003 GT K1 when channel 003 gt constant K1 1 when channel 003 lt constant K1 0 Less than 004 LT K10 when channel 004 lt constant K10 1 when channel 004 gt constant K10 0 Greater than or GE 003 GE K1 when channel 003 2 constant constant K1 1 equal to when channel 003 lt constant K1 0 Less than or LE 004 LE K10 when ch
241. elected ON OFF Headers only when input is applied Contents of up to 20 messages Settings related to event action function Selections related to this list printout IM DR232 01E 2 11 2 3 Recording Functions Manual Printout Header Printout Additional Printouts Set Up List Printout Match Time Function One scan of measurement values of selected channels will be recorded as digital values together with the date and time This printout can be executed by key operation or by event action function refer to page 2 17 Refer to page 2 6 for a recording example A header can consist of up to 80 characters for each to up to 5 lines and recording can be executed by key operation While recording analog trends it is possible to have engineering units tags scales alarm title messages etc printed along with the measurement values and the date time Engineering units these will be printed in comb
242. eled If you have made changes to any item executable with the FUNC key information on initial balancing may not appear on the display Performing Initial Balancing Main menu item ALARM ACK cC INIT BALANCE ENTER BALANCE CH 001 010 ENTER Select Channel No 4 BALANCE MODE EXEC ENTER ABORT EXEC INIT 4 Balancing 4 gt CHANNEL 001 60 ENTER Operating status gt OKm OO NENENEEENENN OKN 031 Initializing the Strain Input Channels Main menu item ALARM ACK DO INIT BALANCE ENTER BALANCE CH 001 010 ENTER gt Select Channel No 4 BALANCE MODE INIT ENTER Operating status ABORT EXEC INIT Indication of the Status of Initial Balancing If you have performed initial balancing the DR recorder shows whether the initial balancing is successful or not in the following format Using the and keys you can change the unit number for which you want the status shown gt CHANNEL 001 60 gt eu jb LII gt 031 Starting channel Module by module status indication successful end of initial balancing unsuccessful
243. elow to avoid electric shock or damaging the instrument A Connect the power cord only after confirming that the voltage of the power supply matches the rated electric power voltage for this instrument Connect the power cord after checking that the power switch of this instrument is turned off To prevent electric shock or fire always use the power cord supplied by Yokogawa Always use protective grounding to prevent electric shock Connect the power cord of the instrument to a three pole power outlet which has a protective ground terminal Do not use the function grounding marked terminal under the power connecting part as the protective ground terminal Never use an extension cord that does not have protective grounding otherwise the protection feature will be negated An AC outlet auxiliary for the D8400 DS600 should be used to supply power to the DS400 DS600 using a power cable DV400 051 separately available Do not use this AC outlet to supply power to the other equipments nor use other cables for the power connection Otherwise the current flowing through the AC outlet will exceed the permissible current thereby resulting in the fuse blowing overheating or burning may occur Connecting Procedure 1 Check that the power switch is turned off 2 Connect the plug of the accessory power cord to the power connector 3 Plug the other end of the power cord into a power outlet that satisfies the following con
244. end of initial balancing Note This function is disabled during making a report The following operations are stopped when this function is performed Recording Saving data to the memory and reading data from it Computing 5 12 IM DR232 01E 5 6 Configuring the Pulse Input Channel E Gam 001 01 PULSE RATE IE Ie GO Ca PAN cr KE PULSE E ser Operating Procedure Press the RANGE key to enter the RANGE menu Using and select and or enter a value for each of the shaded fields shown below To exit any of the following menu items during the procedure press the MODE ESC key This returns to the first item of the menu Note however that your new settings and selections are canceled Reaching the step showing the message SET OK confirms the latest settings selections Main menu item 001 01 SKIP C5 Submenu items 4 001 01 SKIP O gt 001 01 SKIP i 2259 OK contiguration complete ESC L 001 60 PULSE RATE D 4 001 60 PULSE RATE ENTER RATE GATE 0 30000 2m limit 0 to 30000 ENTER SCL 0 30000 gt SPAN 0 30000 ENTER FILTER ON ON OFF ENTER 4 SET OK configuration complete ESC
245. eneration of normal mode noise between input terminals and L Like this common mode noise is converted to normal mode noise The amp is equipped with a built in filter and in case of output Eo the normal mode noise will be eliminated This rate of conversion is called the common mode rejection ratio and expressed by the following equation Common mode rejection ratio CMRR 20Log Fo dB Since the actual CMRR is expressed using the ratio of error component output caused by common mode noise to common mode noise it contains the normal mode rejection ratio NMRR expressed by the following equation NT Normal mode rejection ratio NMRR 20Log dB Enum The NMRR is a value that shows the ability to reject the output error normal mode noise component by normal mode noise Thus this is also a very important value which shows the resistance to noise characteristics of the measuring instrument Basics of Anti Noise Measures part 2 Decreasing and Increasing Impedance As described in the previous section conversion of common mode noise into normal mode noise causes an error in the measured output In other words prevention of such a conversion is the key to anti noise measures As can be understood from the previous section it is important to take the following measures to reduce normal mode noise reduce the wiring resistances R and Ro including the resistance of the wires increase the co
246. enu SET Lower menu H ZONE ENTER 001 01 ZONE 0 to 250mm Select Channel No 4 001 01 20 _0 to 250mm gt Select Channel No 4 001 01 20 20 to 250mm O gt Left limit 0 to 245mm 4 001 01 20 _0 to 250mm ENTER gt Right limit 5 to 250mm 4 SET OK ESC PARTIAL ENTER 001 01 PARTIAL OFF D gt ONW 001 e 4 001 01 PARTIAL OFF D gt 001 4 001 01 PARTIAL OFF ENTER 4 SET OK ESC 001 01 PARTIALZON ENTER 4 RATE 50 0 0000V D gt Rate Limit 1 to 99 4 RATE 50 _0 0000V ENTER gt Boundary Limit 1 9999 to 1 9999V 4 GET 5 DR232 01E 6 3 Setting Recording Zones and Partially Expanded Recording Explanation Setting Recording Zones ZONE This setting specifies the recording zones for each channel The set left and right position of the zone correspond to the left and right span set at the SPAN menu recording span The left value of the ZONE menu corresponds to the value of the left position of the zone whereas the right value of the ZONE menu corresponds to the value of the right position of the zone Zones can be set in 1mm steps and cannot exceed the recording range i e 250mm The left position setting ranges from 0 to 245mm whereas the right position setting ranges from 5 to 250mm
247. eplacement 13 2 G GP IB interface Loco a ORARE ERE RD ae 2 2 19 3 10 GP IB 2 0 43 0 02 0 1610 00 4 1 5 3 10 Graphic ete ote aee See Bargraph display Grounding protective grounding sees 7 3 20 3 29 3 30 3 38 3 43 3 44 Group setting 2 11 6 17 10 4 Group trend recording 2 9 9 10 10 4 H T a AR AAA TT 3 15 14 30 Handle for carrying esses See Carrying handle Header printout printing esses 2 12 6 15 7 2 Heat sink fins 1 2 1 3 High limit alarm See alarm High resolution RTD cec 14 2 HOLD NON HOLD eee 2 14 10 11 Horizontal or vertical printing See Recording direction Hysteresis nanira nini ise eb e eicit 2 13 10 8 l InitializatiO cei ere eet R EE rere Er Ee 9 17 Input channel o ete 2 1 2 1 3 nl eens See filter terminals 1 4 3 20 to 3 26 Index 4 IM DR232 01E Integration time See A D converter integration time Internal illumination eee 2 19 Internal rie args See RJC Internal switches ues ie trot rentrer 2 13 8 3 10 9 to 10 11 Interpolation eR Re Ee ES 2 10 6 17 Interval Display
248. er Data indicates xxxxxx Input module connected improperly Connect input properly Recorder does not work even with operation key pressed Key lock not released Disable key lock functions in setup mode Recorder set in remote mode Set recorder in local mode Other cause Contact Yokogawa Engineering Service aoueusjUule pue DR232 01E 13 3 13 4 Error Codes If servicing is necessary or if the recorder does not operate correctly even though the following corrective actions have been taken contact your nearest Sales representative Addresses may be found on the back cover of this manual Error Code Error Corrective Action 001 System error Contact your nearest representaive 002 Set data out of range Set numeric data correctly 003 Time set incorrectly Set time correctly 004 Channels set incorrectly Set channels correctly 005 Invalid setting function parameter Set parameter correctly 006 Invalid character string Set character string correctly 007 Invalid type of input for input module Set the type of input correctly 008 Invalid range setting for input module Set range correctly 009 Numeric values out of range Set numeric values correctly 011 Attempted to do manual header list or Install new chart paper setup list printout at the end of chart paper 030 There may be a module that cannot be set
249. er cord is damaged contact your dealer for replacement Refer to page 2 for the part number when placing an order General Handling Precautions Never place anything on top of the instrument Never place another instrument or any objects containing water on top of the instrument Otherwise a failure may occur When moving the instrument First turn off the power of the equipment being measured and disconnect the measurement leadwires and the communication cable Then turn the power switch of this instrument OFF and unplug the power cord from the outlet When carrying the instrument securely hold the instrument with both arms and take care not to drop it Ventilation openings Do not block the ventilation openings in order not to raise the internal temperature Electrically charged objects Don t bring electrically charged objects near the input terminals The internal circuitry might be damaged Chemicals Do not pour volatile agents on the case nor leave the case in contact with rubber or PVC products for a long period The case is made of a thermoplastic resin so take care not to let anything hot such as a soldering iron touch the case Cleaning When cleaning the case or any other part of the instrument first remove the power cord from the receptacle and in case of direct connection disconnect the power lines Do not use volatile chemicals since this might result in dis coloring etc Always use a dry soft cloth for cleaning When
250. er reset page 9 14 coy CA MATH START starting computation page 12 8 C gt Re starting computation after MATH CLR START clearing computed data page AIO ino MATH STOP gt Stopping computation page 12 8 c CO MATH Clearing incomplete measurement status AICO indication page 12 8 REPORT START Starting report making page 10 32 c CA REPORT STOP stopping report making page 10 32 c RECALL STARTO starting report printing WD page 10 31 REP PRINT STOP Stopping report printing page 10 IO Ji LOCK gt page 9 14 c CA MSG PRINT gt starting message printing page 7 3 FUNC3 menu S U LIST STARTO Printing set up lists page 7 4 C e ALM BUF CLEAR clearing alarm buffer WO page 16 MSG BUF CLEARO clearing message buffer page 9 cl CO 16 MODULE gt Displaying module information page 9 C O 2 COMM INF Displaying communications information ao egeo RE SYSTEM Structuring system modules eye ee RAM gt initializing RAM page 9 16 e SET UP menu SETUP PRN ADJ Selecting adjustment of dot printing page 10 1 CY CA SCAN INTVL Selecting scan interval page 10 1 CY CA RECORD setting recording format page 10 3 CSKA ATH Setting action to be carried out in case of computation AIO error and setting the units for TLOG SUM page 12 12 FLOPPY Saving reading set up data chapter 11 CY CO REPORT setting report form
251. es Cul0 GE 119 9 to 338 0 F Cul0 L amp N 103 0 to 302 0 F Cul0 WEED 4 0 to 482 0 F Cu10 BAILEY 4 0 to 482 0 F 10 26 IM DR232 01E 10 12 Working with the Report Function Relevant Keys Cy econo ESC SETUP REPORT oop B Ga 1 5 DEL Select Setting Parameter CORD MATH FLOPPY REPORT ALARM A D ser Operating Procedure To enter the SETUP menu follow the steps below 1 If the DR recorder is in the OPERATION DISPLAY mode or shows a menu other than the SETUP menu turn off the power switch once 2 Turn on the power switch while pressing down the DISP key and then keep holding the key down for approximately five seconds Using A To exit any of the following menu items during the procedure press the MODE ESC key select and or enter a value for each of the shaded fields shown below This returns to the first item of the menu Note however that your new settings and selections are canceled Reaching the step showing the message REPORT SET or REPORT SET confirms the latest settings selections Sending the Instantaneous Value and Average to a Report Output Main menu item SET UP ___
252. es ideal value 20000 ZERO calibration 1 29491 21000 32768 20000 29491 19000 Values in are for strain input modules SPAN calibration When calibrating the DC TC or DI input module you need not calibrate an RTD END mode storing a calibrated value in the internal nonvolatile memory Select one of the following two STORE Stores data in the internal nonvolatile memory ABORT Cancels the storage of data in the internal nonvolatile memory 13 12 IM DR232 01E 14 1 Specifications of DR232 DR242 and DS400 DS600 Style Numbers DR232 DR242 S8 DS400 DS600 S8 Connecting Subunits to the DR232 DR242 Types of Subunits Subunit DS400 four modules Subunit DS600 six modules Number of Subunits which can be connected Up to six units can be connected either DS400 or DS600 Connection method Using dedicated cables Available Modules Main Unit Communication interface modules Selectable from GP IB and RS 232 C DI DO modules Alarm 2 ch output transfer contact fail output module chart end output and input signal for remote control 12 points Alarm modules 4 ch output transfer contact or 10 ch output make contact Number of modules which can be connected 1 Communication module DI DO module alarm module not more than one Subunit DS400 DS600 Input modules universal DC voltage thermocouple RTD contact DCV TC DI Alarm modules 4 ch output transfer contact or 10 c
253. ese numbers when contacting the dealer IM DR232 01E 3 Checking the Contents of the Package Input Modules Check that the model code given on the name plate is according to your order Model Codes Model Description DU100 11 10 channel universal input module screw type terminal DU100 21 20 channel universal input module screw type terminal DU100 31 30 channel universal input module screw type terminal DU100 12 10 channel universal input module clamp type terminal DU100 22 20 channel universal input module clamp type terminal DU100 32 30 channel universal input module clamp type terminal DU200 11 10 channel DCV TC DI input module screw type terminal DU200 21 20 channel DCV TC DI input module screw type terminal DU200 31 30 channel DCV TC DI input module screw type terminal DU200 12 10 channel DCV TC DI input module clamp type terminal DU200 22 20 channel DCV TC DI input module clamp type terminal DU200 32 30 channel DCV TC DI input module clamp type terminal DU300 11 10 channel mA input module with screw terminals DU300 12 10 channel mA input module with clamp terminals DU400 12 Power monitor module for single phase use DU400 22 Power monitor module for three phase use DU500 12 10 channel strain input module with 120 Q bridge resistors DU500 22 10 channel strain input module with 350 Q bridge resistors DU500 32 10 channel strain input module with NDIS terminals DU600 11 10 channel
254. ese relays will be operated when an alarm occurs For details concerning their settings and their relation with alarms refer to page 2 14 2 15 Fail Output One transfer contact in the DI DO module is used for fail output This relay will change to the de energized status when a failure of the recorder occurs Usually In case of failure In case of power OFF NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC Chart End Output One transfer contact in the DI DO module is used for chart end output When the chart has only 2cm or less paper the CHART indicator at the right of the display will light and recording will stop The relay will change to the energized status Usually In case of Chart end In case of power NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC Controlling Recording Functions by Remote Control The recording functions can be controlled by inputting up to 12 contact signals to the DI DO module You can choose one of the following operations for each of the 12 signals The remote control function can be one of the events of the event action function described on the previous page Alarm acknowledge Alarm reset Timer reset Recording start stop Manual printout Digital printout Message printout Message display Change of chart speed recording interval Group trend recording IM DR232 01E 2 6 Other Functions Communication Interface Communication module required Either GP IB interface module the RS 232 C interface module or RS 4
255. essage buffer clear function is available for canceling stored printout messages see page 9 17 Logging mode Up to 5 message printouts can be stored in memory nformation exceeding 5 message printouts will be discarded f 6 message printouts exceeding the allowed number of 5 are entered an asterisk will be printed at the top of the message when 5 message printouts are executed The message buffer clear function is available for canceling stored printout messages see page 9 17 IM DR232 01E H Dunnooex3 7 4 Printing Set up Lists Relevant Keys ESC S U LIST START m QD C INS gt Select Function item HART S U_LIST START ALM BUF CLEAR MSG BUF CT ser Enter 2 Press and hold the FUNC key for three seconds to enter the FUNC3 menu s LIST START ENTER Printing the set up list S U LIST START Prints a list of the settings made in the SETUP menu For details of the settings and their values see Chapter 10 Press the ENTER key to start printing the set up list After printing starts the operation display mode appears During list printing the S U LIST STOP menu appears During list printing if the FUNC3 menu is displayed to select the S U LIST STOP and the ENTER key is then pressed the list printing stops
256. et the event action function if you want to reset the results after computation is carried out for a certain period of time then resume computation 1 Set TIMER RST for the MFUNC KEY 1 event 2 Set MATH START for the same MFUNC KEY 1 event 3 Set MATH RESET for TIMER 1 event 4 Set the mode for TIMER No 1 to RELATIVE and TIME to 00 01 00 After the above settings have been made press the MFUNCI key Timer 1 will be reset according to the above steps 1 and 2 then computation starts After elapse of one hour computation results will be reset according to step 3 but computation will still continue When a further hour elapses computation results will be reset The above operations will be carried out repeatedly until computation is stopped For a detailed description of the event action function refer to 9 1 Setting Event Action Functions page 9 1 Refer to pages 2 9 6 2 and 6 3 for a description of timers Status display during computation The following status symbols are displayed in the sub display 2 lowest display section Computation is in progress Incomplete measurement has occurred If this status occurs frequently reduce the number of equations or reduce the measurement period The number of equations may be too large for computation to be carried out within the specified measurement period Restrictions during computation The following settings cannot be made while computation is in progress Measuring rang
257. et to ON the alarm acknowledgment menu appears For the alarm display hold functions see Section 2 4 Alarm Function on page 2 15 Alarm reset ALARM RST When the relay hold function on page 10 11 is set to ON the alarm reset menu appears For the alarm reset functions see Section 2 4 Alarm Function on page 2 15 Timer reset TIMER RESET For the timer reset functions see Section 2 3 Recording Functions on page 2 8 Computation start MATH START Starts computation For details refer to Chapter 12 Executing Computation Computation clear start MATH CLR START Clears computation results then re starts computation Computation stop MATH STOP Stops computation Clearing Incomplete Measurement Status MATH ACK Clears the status indication displayed due to incomplete measurement which occurred during computation Keylock function KEY LOCK ON For the keylock functions see Section 2 6 Other Functions on page 2 17 The KEY LOCK ON is displayed after selecting the keylock see page 10 16 Enter a password A CODE NUMBER and then press the ENTER key to actuate the keylock functions The KEY LOCK OFF menu then appears Enter the FUNC menu select KEY LOCK OFF and then enter a password A CODE NUMBER Press the ENTER key to release the keylock functions The menu returns to KEY LOCK ON To set a password see page 10 16 When the keylock functions are actuated the
258. etic radiation Move the instrument to a location where the influence from electro magnetic radiation is weak Grounding a decrease of impedance The grounding method is the point of common mode noise suppression Equipment under measurement EUM The instrument lt Q T The difference the potential to the ground between EUM and the instrument may cause a ground current resulting in noise Equalize the potentials to the ground so that the common mode noise becomes zero One point grounding Potential equalization EUM The instrument EUM The instrument if grounding is difficult The basic means to obtain stable measurement is to set the circuit potential with proper grounding Thus potential equalization is the means to be adopted only when grounding is impossible IM DR232 01E 3 41 pue uoneyyersu 3 11 Countering Noise Shielded and twisted pair prevention of electromagnetic coupling an increase of impedance If it is difficult to keep the noise source away from the measuring instrument due to space limitations the use of a shielded twisted pair is effective electrostatic coupling can be completely cut off by shielding for a magnetic field shielding with a magnetic material iron permalloy etc can be employed However there ar
259. ex Synchronization mode Start stop synchronization synchronized by a start and a stop bit Baud rate 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 bps Start bit Fixed at 1 bit Data length 7 or 8 bits selectable Parity Selectable from even odd or none Stop bit 1 or 2 selectable Transmission distance 15 D sub 25 DR232 01E 14 29 14 10 Communication Interface Module RS 422 A RS 485 Handshaking hardware transmission and reception control by DTR RTS CTS signal enabled Software transmission control by XON and XOFF enabled Capacity of receiving buffer 200 bytes Escape sequence for reception only Functions Talker functions Output of measurement data ASCII binary and setting parameters ASCII Listener functions Setting of measurement conditions control of measurement start and stop excluding the setting and control of power on off specifying causes of ESC S output of a status byte Contents of status Syntax error chart end completion of A D conversion operations of internal timer end of data saving reading incomplete measurement during computation External dimensions Approx 57 W x 137 H x 54 D mm Weight 0 3kg Style Number S8 Electrical amp mechanical specs Conform to the EIA RS 422 A and EIA RS 485 Standard Connection format Multi drop 1 n n 16 for RS 422 A n 31 for RS 485
260. ey The display returns to the main menu to which the lower menu belongs However newly set or selected contents are canceled When setting proceeds to the display for the setting end the newly set or selected contents are established Main menu SETUP i EI C O Lower menu f RECORD ENTER CH OR TAG CHANNEL ENTER CHANNEL TAG 4 TAG PRINT LEN 7 7891011121314 15 16 4 TREND MODE NORMAL ENTER NORMAL ALARM1 ALARM2 GROUP 4 SPEED CHANGE PR ON ENTER OFF ON 4 ON OFF MARK PR ON ENTER OFF ON 4 DIGITAL PR CLMN 1 ENTER 1234 4 CHANNEL PITCH 5 0mm ENTER OFF 5 0mm 12 5mm 4 TITLE PITCH 1500mm ENTER OFF 600mm 1500mm 4 SCALE TIC PR OFF ENTER OFF ON 4 LOG FORMAT HORIZON ENTER HORIZON VERTICAL 4 LOG INTERVAL SINGLE ENTER SINGLE MULTIPLE 4 RECORD SET ESC IM DR232 01E 10 3 145 sbumes oiseg 10 2 Setting Recording Format Explanation Selection of Channel Number or Tag CH OR TAG Select the call name for printing or displaying the measured values of either CHANNEL or TAG Select either CHANNEL or TAG However if the TAG setting includes all spaces vacant the channel is printed or displayed regardless of selection The default setting is CHANNEL For the TAG setting see Section 6 4 Setting Tag Digital Printout and Manual Printout page 6 8 Selection of Number of TAG
261. f rdg 5digits 60mV 60 00 to 60 00mV 0 05 of rdg 2digits 100 200mV 200 00 to 200 00mV 0 05 of rdg 2digits 10 2V 2 0000 to 2 0000V 0 05 of rdg 2digits 100uV 6V 6 000 to 6 000V 0 05 of rdg 2digits ImV 20V 20 000 to 20 000V 0 05 of rdg 2digits 50 50 00 to 50 00V 0 05 of rdg 2digits 10mV TC R 1 0 0 to 1760 0 C 0 05 of rdg 1 C Note that Accuracy However R S 0 to 100 3 7 of reference junction 100 to 300 C 1 5 C compensation is not S 1 0 0 to 1760 0 C B 400 to 600 C 2 C accuracy considered B 1 0 0 to 1820 0 C less than 400 C is not specified K 1 2200 0 to 1370 0 C 0 05 of rdg 0 7 C However K attains an accuracy of 0 1 C 0 05 of rdg 1 C within the range between 200 to 100 C E 1 200 0 to 800 0 C 0 05 of rdg 0 5 C J 1 2200 0 to 1100 0 C However J and L attain an accuracy of T 1 200 0 to 400 0 C 0 05 of rdg 0 7 C within the L 2 200 0 to 900 0 C range between 200 to 100 U 2 200 0 to 400 0 C N 3 0 0 to 1300 0 C 0 05 of rdg 0 7 C W 4 0 0 to 2315 0 C 0 05 of rdg 1 C KPvsAu7Fe 0 0 to 300 0K 0 05 of rdg 0 7K 0 1K RTD Pt100 1mA 5 200 0 to 600 0 C 0 05 of rdg 0 3 C Pt100 2mA 5 200 0 to 250 0 C JPt100 1mA 5 200 0 to 550 0 C JPt100 2mA 5 200 0 to 250 0 C 50 2 s 200 0 to 550 0 C 0 05
262. ff 2 Remove the cover protecting the power terminals 3 Connect the power supply wires and the protecting ground wire to the power terminals 4 Replace the cover In order to cut down on unnecessary radio interference attach a clamp filter accessory near the power cord plug Make a loop with the power cord and clamp it in the clamp filter Rated supply voltage 100 to 240 V AC free power supply operating voltage 90 to 250 V AC Rated supply voltage frequency 50 60 Hz Power consumption DR242 About 130 VA max DS400 See previous page DS600 See previous page e DR242 DS400 DS600 AC outlet Auxiliary for DS400 DS600 Power terminals QD Protective ground wire Power supply wires Power supply wires 3 30 IM DR232 01E 3 9 Connecting the Power Cord and Turning the Power ON OFF DS400 DS600 when using DC power supply connecter This applies only to products with power supply 2 suffix code Follow the warnings below to avoid electric shock or damaging the instrument Connect the power wires after checking that the power supply is turned off to prevent electric shock To prevent fire use wires with cross sectional area of 0 3mm 22AWG or more CAUTION If you connect the and terminals in reverse on the DS400 DS600 the internal fuse will be blown You cannot replace the fuse by yourself The instrument needs servicing in this case If there is a possibility of rever
263. field Configure the DR recorder so an event occurs every hour with reference to the hour 00 00 Main menu item SET Submenu items TIMER ENTER TIMER 1 ENTER 123456 4 1 TIMER MODE ABSOLUTE ENTER Absolute time 4 1 TIME 1h ENTER One hour interval 4 z Sets the n REF TIME 00 00 ENTER reference time SET OK configuration complete Setting the EVENT ACTION fields Configure the DR recorder so it clears computed values at the time set on the timer Main menu item SET Submenu items LOGIC ENTER LOGIC No 1 ENTER 01 to 30 4 EVT TIMER 1 ENTER Selects timer 1 4 Resets the CLEAR ENTER computed value SET OK contiguration complete ENTER Computation equation CALC TLOG SUM 001 To start computing press the FUNC key and select MATH START from the FUNC menu The values and the behaviors of the event action functions when computing is done with the above configuration are as follows Lr eL seb of computing 8 00 9 00 10 00 11 00 00 00 13 00 14 00 15 00 16 00 17 00 1 l End of setting Reference time Start of computing Resetting of computed value IM DR232 01E 12 11 IPPON LIN ejqerreAv uoneinduio Bunnoox3 12 5 Setting Actions to be Carried out in Case of Computation Error a
264. g consists of a chart speed and recording interval Depending on the Event Action function refer to 9 1 on page 9 1 the chart speed and recording interval will change into chart speed 2 and its corresponding interval Chart speed 2 setting This setting is the same as for chart speed 1 and its default setting is 1OOmm h Recording interval This setting specifies the recording interval for the digital prinout in the logging and analog trend recording mode One type of recording interval can be set The setting is done the same way as described on page 6 3 although only one type can be set IM DR232 01E suonipuoo bumes 6 3 Setting Recording Zones and Partially Expanded Recording Relevant Keys SET ZONE Gai AS Gaz ESC gt Select Setting Parameter CHART2 ZONE PARTIAL TAG DIGITAL PR MANT RECORD repr GS Cre INS DEL anesan LEA KEYI EnreR w ruwc 2 Operating Procedure 1 Press the SET key for three seconds to enter the SET3 menu 2 Select set using the CS keys 3 To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept 4 New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Main m
265. g the FUNC key whether in the FUNC menu or the FUNC3 menu The FUNC menu is displayed by pressing the FUNC key at a touch and the FUNC3 menu is displayed by pressing the FUNC key for about 3 seconds continuously Select any of the following e FUNC displayed in the FUNC menu FUNC3 displayed in the FUNC3 menu OFF not displayed in either menu The default setting is as shown in the operating procedure diagram on pages 10 17 and 10 18 The last operation menu amp PANEL ALL ITEM is the menu that globally set all menus However the selection of INIT selects the default setting The COMM INF menu is displayed if the communication module is mounted and recognized as the system of this instrument see page 9 16 Note n order to make the set or selected contents effective the contents must be registered For details see page 10 23 To return from the SET UP menu to the operation display mode select END in the main menu For details see page 10 23 IM DR232 01E 10 19 dN 145 sbumes oiseg 10 9 Setting SET SET3 Menu e SETU P SET PARM MAE Func Feen 1 5 Select Setting Parameter CHART i OUT RJC COLOR LOCK FUNC PARM SET PARM1 Eas Cean QQ ser mFunc2 Operating Procedure Enter the SET UP menu in the following procedure 1 When the
266. ght when facing the front of the instrument is M4 of 20 mm long and the left screw is M4 of 16 mm long Appropriate tightening torque is 1 4 to 1 5 14 to 15 f another instrument is to be mounted under this instrument in an ANSI EIA rack remove the prong or brackets designated with 2 and 3 in the figure below because they may interfere with both instruments 438 30 207 63 6 TA Rack Mounting Dementions 482 6 1 Panel face 30 Em Tt I C I Cao a lt 265 9 1 37 7 is 41 T 1 1 i i i i sel 1 1 1 amp 2 Removed IM DR232 01E 3 3 pue uoneyyersu 3 2 How to Install DR242 Panel mounting Use steel plates 3 mm thick or more for panel mounting The external and panel cutting dimensions for the DR242 are shown below The panel cutting dimensions include the cutting interval for multiple mounting on the same panel The DR242 weighs about 12 kg so a shelf should be provided to support the DR242 behind the panel Insert the instrument from the front face of the panel Insert the blocks of the mounting brackets as accessories into the rectangular holes after removing seals on right and left sides of the instrument push the brackets toward the rear and engage the blocks with rectangular holes When a screw attached on each bracket is turned cloc
267. gn channels 001 002 003 004 006 and 008 to group 01 as shown below SET GROUP GROUPNo G01 G01 001 004 006 008 Define the computational expression that computes the average of group 1 as shown below CALC CLOG AVE G01 Computation on Pulse Input Channels For pulse input channels you can define the operator TLOG PSUM XXXX where the DR recorder does not have the optional MATH function M1 option The type of computation is the integration of the count if the measurement mode is set to RATE instantaneous count mode or the integration of the turn on time if the measurement mode is set to GATE instantaneous turn on time mode In either case the integrated value is the sum of values measured every second For this reason even if you set the measurement interval to 0 5 second the DR recorder retains the same value for one second Set the maximum count and turn on time using SPAN The maximum configurable value is 99999999 Set the interval of summation integration interval as a relative or absolute time by setting the event to TIMER with the event action functions Set the action to TIMER RESET See Section 9 1 Setting Event Action Functions on page 9 1 for details on how to configure the event action functions If the computational expression is written as TLOG PSUM XXX in the system reconfiguration where the PULSE INPUT MODULE filed is set to not installed the computational expression alarm settings and partial
268. gt reco INS DEL SPAN 20000 20000 10 CHART Select Channel Number Keno CA Operating Procedure cuart ser w ruwc 2 Press the RANGE key to enter the RANGE menu Using and select and or enter a value for each of the shaded fields shown below To exit any of the following menu items during the procedure press the MODE ESC key This returns to the first item of the menu Note however that your new settings and selections are canceled selections Setting the Measuring Range and Recording Span Main menu item 001 01 STRAIN 200k D gt Select Channel No 4 001 01 STRAIN 200k D gt Select Channel No 001 01 STRAIN 200k D 4 001 01 STRAIN 200k ENTER 2k 20k 200k 4 SPAN 20000 20000 ENTER Span limit 20000 to 20000 10 ue 4 SET OK configuration complete ESC Setting Linear Scaling Main menu item 001 01 STRAIN 200k C Select Channel No Submenu items 4 001 01 STRAIN 200k gt 001 01 5 200 gt Select Channel No ale L 001 01 SCL STRAIN 200k Reaching the step showing the message 5 OK confirms the latest settings Press twice um 001 01 SCL STRAIN 200k 2k 20k 200k SPAN 20000 20000 gt Span limit 20000 to 20000 10pe 4 SCL 100 00 _100 00 4 SET OK configuration complete ENTER ENTER
269. h output make contact DI DO modules Alarm 2 ch output transfer contact fail output module chart end output and input signal for remote control Number of modules which can be connected to one DS400 4 Input module alarm module DI DO module max four Number of modules which can be connected to one DS600 6 Input module alarm module DI DO module max six Only one DI DO module can be connected to one system Input Measurement range Refer to 14 2 on page 14 7 Measurement interval Selectable from 0 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 10 12 15 20 30 60s max 500ms 300ch with sub unit connected filter OFF A D integration period of 20ms or 16 7ms A D integration time Selectable from 20ms 50Hz 16 7ms 60Hz 100ms 10Hz selectable or automatically switched between 50 60Hz Except auto switch does not function on the subunit DS400 DS600 of a DC power supply model Selecting AUTO will set the A D integration time to 20 ms 50 Recording Recording method Raster scan method 10 color wire dot recording Number of recording points Measurement results Max 300 points Recording paper Ordinary recording chart Z fold chart total width 342 5mm length 30m Effective recording width 250mm for dot recording Recording colors Analog trend mode Dot recording purple red green blue brown black navy blue yellowish green redish purple orange can be specified for each channel Digital printout black Alarm pr
270. he ENTER key to use the alarm reset function For details on the alarm reset see Section 2 4 Alarm Function on page 2 15 IM DR232 01E 9 1 Setting Event Action Functions Relevant Keys DISP MODE RECORD ESC SET LOGIC pu GO Cre INS DEL Select Setting Parameter CHART MM SYSTEM UNIT TREND TIMER LOGIC COPY Ems E cuart ser Operating Procedure Press the SET key to enter the SET menu Select set using the O amp 2 keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Selection of the logic box and event NONE Main menu SET L 1 ao Lower menu vU LOGIC ENTER LOGIC BOX 01 ENTER 01 30 4 m EVT NONE SET OK ESC CX To the next page From the following page IM DR232 01E 9 1 suonoung pue 4 uonoyue 3 9 1 Setting Event Action Functions Selection of event REMOTE actions The REMOTE menu is displayed only with the models with DI DO module The MATH menu is displayed only with the DR232 1 DR242 1 and models with the M1 option The MEMRY and FLOPPY menus are displayed on
271. he FULL setting The setting range is 2400 to 2600 The set value 1 corresponds to about 0 1 mm of the dot printing position Selection of Scan Interval SCAN INTVL Select 0 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 10 12 15 20 30 and 60 seconds as the interval The default setting is 0 5 seconds The shortest selectable scan interval varies with the setting of the number of input channels A D converter integration time or filter ON OFF For details see chapter 14 Note In order to make the set or selected contents effective the contents must be registered For details see page 10 23 To return from the SET UP menu to the operation display mode select END in the main menu For details see page 10 23 10 2 IM DR232 01E 10 2 Setting Recording Format SETUP RECORD GO Co INS DEL gt Select Setting Parameter Gu PRN ADJ SCAN INTVL RECORD ALARM A D INT lt ser mruncz Operating Procedure Enter the SET UP menu in the following procedure 1 When the display presents the operation display mode or a menu other than the SET UP menu first turn off the power switch 2 Turn the switch back on while pressing the DISP key and continue pressing the DISP key for about 5 seconds Select set using the O amp 2 keys If exiting the following lower menu setting halfway press the MODE ESC k
272. he settings should be as follows baud rate 2400 to 19200bps data length 8 bit parity ODD stop bit 1 3 15 pue uoneyyersu 3 5 Connecting the Interface Cables Connecting the RS 232 C cable For details on connecting the RS 232 C connector of the RS 232 C communication interface module to a personal computer see IM DR231 11E DR231 DR232 DR241 DR242 Communication Interface User s Manual CAUTION When dis connecting the RS 232 C cable turn OFF the power of both the personal computer and the instrument If the power is not turned OFF malfunctions may occur and the internal circuitry may be damaged Note To reduce noise use ferrite cores e g ZCAT 3035 1330 from TDK for the interface cable as shown below Two ferrite cores should be installed near both ends of the interface cable If the noise is particularly bad use several ferrite cores in series Use a shielded cable for the interface cable and make a one point grounding at the ground terminal of this instrument together with the functional ground terminal of the personal computer Personal computer Ferrite core Function C grounding terminal I RS 422 A RS 485 ON 02 swi F off 12 3 4 L L Data length Baud rate ON BH SW2 m m
273. he system of this instrument Selection of Internal Switch Relay S internal switch is set I 0 to 5 relay is set The default setting is S Setting AND OR The relays or the internal switches are set to AND in up to the set range and set to OR in the range exceeding the set range For internal switches set from 01 01 to 01 60 For one alarm module 01 01 to 01 60 can be displayed However if this option is installed in slot 4 01 41 to 01 50 is the effective setting range For one DI DO module 01 01 to 01 60 can be displayed However if this option is installed in slot 5 01 51 to 01 52 is the effective setting range For two alarm modules 01 01 to 01 60 can be displayed However is one module is installed in slot 3 and an other is installed in slot 5 01 31 to 01 60 is the effective setting range No relay is in the range from 01 41 to 01 50 neither case above if all are to be set to OR or reset set NONE The default setting is NONE 10 10 IM DR232 01E 10 4 Setting Operation Mode of Relay Internal Switch Setting Energizing Deenergizing ENERG This is a menu which canot be displayed unless the alarm module or the DI DO module is mounted and recognized as the system of this instrument Relay Setting Set the object relays from one number relay first relay to another number relay end relay Set it under the condition that the first relay number lt end relay number First rela
274. hen setting recording conditions such as the recording mode channels recording interval chart speed recording span and recording format Chapter 7 Executing Recording Explains how to start and stop recording Chapter 8 Setting Displaying and Recording Alarms Explains how to set an alarm and what to do when an alarm occurs Chapter 9 Event Action Function and Other Functions Explains how to operate the event action function how to copy recording information how to reset alarms how to reset the timer how to use the key lock and how to use the external in output function Chapter 10 Basic Settings SET UP Explains functions which usually do not need to be changed and how to set Chapter 11 Saving Reading Measured Computed and Set up Data Explains how to save measured data computed data and set up data to the internal RAM disk or floppy disk and read them into the instrument Chapter 12 Executing Computation Available with the M1 Model Explains the computation function optional Chapter 13 Trouble Shooting and Maintenance Explains maintenance procedures error messages and calibration procedures Chapter 14 Specifications Explains specifications for all features of DR Index Gives the index in main menu and alphabetic order IM DR232 01E Conventions Used in this Manual Used Symbols The following symbol marks are used t
275. hen the computation becomes too difficult to be processed every measured interval in which case an alarm is generated Significant digits during computation 10308 Significant digits of the computed result 9 999 999 to 4 99 999 999 Decimal point can be set to have 1 to 4 digits on the right of the decimal point Input from communication interface Digital value ASCII numerical array input from the communication interface can be handled as computational data Computation start stop Can be controlled by communication commands M FUNC key operation and event action function such as M FUNC key operation remote control signal timespecified and alarm status Other functions included in the math function Remote RJC Input type Thermocouple TC Accuracy Twice the measurement accuracy of the standard thermocouple input temperature difference between the terminal of the remote terminal section and thermocouple section for measuring the remote terminal temperature Thermocouple burnout not selectable IM DR232 01E 14 5 14 1 Specifications of DR232 DR242 and DS400 DS600 Report Function feature of the suffix code M3 available with models with style number 5 or higher Report Channels 60 channels from R01 to R60 Types of Reports Hourly report Hourly every hour statistical information Daily report Statistical information for a day starting at a specified time Monthly report Statistical information
276. ied channel measurement or computation channel in a format predetermined for a preset time date or month or send out the results to a communication line The types of computations are averaging mean value maximum and minimum instantaneous value calculation and summation sum cumulative sum IM DR232 01E 2 19 suonoun4 3 1 General Precautions for Installation Safety Precautions Read the safety precautions Make sure to read the safety precautions described on page 6 before using the instrument for the first time Do not remove any covers from the instrument For internal inspection or adjustment contact your nearesst sales representative Addresses may be found on the back cover of this manual In case of malfunctioning Never continue to use the instrument if there are any symptoms of malfunctioning such as unusual sounds smell or smoke coming from the instrument Immediately turn OFF the power and unplug the power cord When using an adapter for direct wiring to the power supply immediately turn OFF the power supply Also disconnect the power to the equipment under measurement Contact your sales representative or nearest service center Addresses may be found on the back cover of this manual Power Cord Nothing should be placed on the power cord it should also be kept away from any heat sources When unplugging the power cord from the outlet never pull the cord itself Always hold the plug and pull it If the pow
277. ifications of Strain Input Module Model Code Number of Input Channels Terminal Configuration Shortest Measurement Interval and Values of Built in Resistors Model Code Number of Input Terminal Shortest Measurement Built in Channels Configuration Interval Resistor 0500 12 10 Clamp 0 56 1200 DU500 13 10 Clamp 0 5 s 350 Q 0500 14 10 NDI 0 5 s External Requires the space of two slots Recommended by the Japanese Nondestructive Inspection Association Method of Input Non balanced floating input with isolation between channels separated channels Resolution of A D Conversion Equivalent to reading on 20000 full scale Integral Time of A D Conversion Manual or automatic selection between 20 ms 50 Hz 16 7 ms 60 Hz and 100 ms 10 Hz Except auto switch does not function on the subunit DS400 DS600 of a DC power supply model Selecting AUTO will set the A D integration time to 20 ms 50 Hz Types of Input Signals from strain gauge or strain gauge sensor Connection Methods Single gauge opposed side two gauge adjacent side two gauge or four gauge configuration Configured with built in DIP switches for DU500 12 and DU500 13 Applicable Gauge Resistance 100 to 1 000 Q DU500 12 and DU500 13 modules contain 120 Q 350 Q resistors respectively Bridge Voltage Fixed to 2 V DC 45 accuracy with a correction function Gauges 2 00 with scaling capability Balancing Automatic Range of
278. imize the noise imposed on the input signal specific integration times exist The integration time can be selected from 20ms 50Hz 16 7ms 60Hz and 100ms 10Hz When AUTO is selected the integration time will be automatically decided according to the 50 60Hz frequency of the power supply AUTO does not function if the instrument is the subunit DS400 DS600 of the DC power supply model Selecting AUTO will set the A D integration time to 20 ms 50 Hz If you are using the instrument on a 60 Hz power supply set the A D integration time to 16 7 ms 60Hz A filter can be set ON OFF to reduce normal mode noise Effects on normal mode noise are as follows depending on the filter being ON OFF theoretical values Frequency 1Hz 10Hz 50Hz100Hz 300Hz m eR i qi ERN RN 20dB Slope 20dB dec 5 40dB Filter ON gt Filter OFF 60dB g amp 80dB Slope 60dB dec 100dB IM DR232 01E 2 3 Recording Functions Chart Speed Recording Mode The speed at which the chart moves when performing trend recording can be selected from any value between 1 to 1500mm h Two types of chart speeds can be set When you are not using the Event Action function which will be described later on in this manual chart speed 1 will be valid When the Event Action function is being used you can select whether chart speed 1 will change to speed 2 according to the event status Two types
279. in value CLOG P P0 CLOG P P G03 Obtain the value of the measured data of group G03 Total value CLOG SUMQ CLOG SUM G04 Obtain the total value of the measured data of group G04 Average value CLOG AVE CLOG AVE GO5 Obtain the average value of the measured data of group GOS Statistical computation of the measured data of the input channel within the same group measured at the same time every specified interval Special operators Type Operator Example Description Previous value PRE PRE 001 Obtain the previous measured data of channel 001 Hold HOLDO HOLD 001 TLOG SUM 002 When the measured value of channel 001 changes from 0 to a nonzero value maintain the displaying integrated value of the measured data of channel 002 while the measured value of channel 001 is nonzero Reset RESET RESET 001 TLOG SUM 002 When the channel 001 nonzero reset the integrated value of the measured data of channel 002 Previously measured data or computed data In the case of computed data the value is set to 0 when the computation is reset At the start of the computation if the computation was reset the value is 0 If it was not reset the value is the last value of the previous computation The value that can be specified inside the is limited to the input channel number 001 to 060 or the computation channel number A01 to A60 Each computing equation can be used once When specifying
280. ination channel to be copied Sets a channel to which the setting data in the source channel are copied When the COPY RANGE COPY ALARM and COPY OTHER are set to ON individual set data are copied For the setting of a destination channel number see Section 5 1 Setting the Type of Input and Recording Span on page 5 2 tis not possible to copy data between measurement channels and computation channels Copying Data from a Computation Channel When copying from an optional computation channel is carried out the following data will be copied When COPY RANGE is ON Computation equation tag When COPY ALARM is ON Alarm When COPY OTHER is ON Zone partial compressions trend ON OFF digital printing ON OFF alarm printout ON1 ON2 OFF scale value printout ON OFF manual printing ON OFF list printout ON OFF interpolation ON OFF IM DR232 01E 9 13 suonoung pue 4 uonoyaue 3 9 3 Alarm Acknowledgment Alarm Reset Timer Reset Keylock and Message Printout Relevant Keys TIMER RESET Mi oboce Select Function item C ser runes Operating Procedure Press the FUNC key to enter the FUNC menu To enter the FUNC menu from the RANGE ALARM CHART or SET SET3 menu press the DISP key Select set using the GS keys To escape from a lower menu press the MO
281. ination wiht the linear scaling function refer to page 2 16 Channel No or tag a preset tag can be printed for each channel the selection whether to print the channel No or the tag refer to page 2 7 can also be done Scale printout values corresponding to the scales will be printed refer to page 2 9 Alarm printout alarm information refer to page 2 15 will be printed upon occurrence or release of an alarm You can also set a message to appear upon occurrence of an alarm Title printout A title of up to 32 characters can be printed Furthermore the title can be set to be printed at regular intervals refer to title pitch on page 2 7 Message printout Recording of messages of up to 16 characters can be executed by key operation or event action function Time will also be printed together with the message Up to 20 different messages can be entered Each item as described in Ch 10 will be printed You can preset a time when you want recording to start stop using the event action function refer to page 2 12 When this time is reached recording in the analog trend or logging mode will start stop IM DR232 01E 2 4 Alarm Function Type of Alarms This function will show an alarm on the display or generate an alarm output signal when the measurement conditions of a channel exceed fall below preset values Up to four alarms can be set for each channel Alarms can be set up to 4 items per channel change low lim
282. ing terminal 4 Function grounding terminal This terminal should not be used as a Protective grounding terminal Make sure to comply with the following safety precautions Not complying might result in injury death of personnel or damage to the instrument WARNING Power Supply Ensure the source voltage matches the voltage of the power supply before turning ON the power Power Cord and Plug To prevent an electric shock or fire be sure to use the power cord supplied by YOKOGAWA The main power plug must be plugged in an outlet with protective grounding terminal Do not invalidate protection by using an extension cord without protective grounding Protective Grounding Make sure to connect the protective grounding to prevent an electric shock before turning ON the power Necessity of Protective Grounding Never cut off the internal or external protective grounding wire or disconnect the wiring of protective grounding terminal Doing so poses a potential shock hazard Defect of Protective Grounding and Fuse Do not operate the instrument when protective grounding or fuse might be defective Do not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable liquids or vapors Operation of any electrical instrument in such an environment constitutes a safety hazard Fuse To prevent a fire make sure to use fuses with specified standard current voltage type Before replacing the
283. intout red however alarm release mark blue IM DR232 01E 14 1 suoneoiieds 14 1 Specifications of DR232 DR242 and DS400 DS600 Logging mode purple Recording accuracy Dot recording 0 1 of recording span measurement accuracy Max recording resolution Dot recording 0 1 Recording interval Dot recording interval for analog trend recording FIX Min 2s and same as measurement interval skipped recording in case of 0 5 1s scans AUTO Min 2s and linked to measurement interval and chart speed Digital printout interval for analog trend recording MULTIPLE Specify for each channel from 6 kinds of intervals SINGLE Determined automatically from the chart speed and the number of channels used to print digital values Digital value printing interval in the logging mode MULTIPLE Specify for each channel from 6 kinds of intervals SINGLE Common to all points Recording interval change 2 kinds changes by event action function Recording modes Analog trend mode and logging mode Chart paper feed Chart speed 1 to 1500 mm hour Chart speed change 2 kinds changes by event action function Chart feed method by pulse motor Chart feed accuracy 0 1 of length when recording is performed continuously for at least 1000mm does not include elongation or shrinkage of paper Recording start stop Usually starting and stopping of recording is done by means of key operation However this can also be done by the event action function Normal re
284. iod is 0 5 or 1 second the recording interval is fixed to 2 seconds The measured data during the excess period is ignored AUTO recording takes place at intervals automatically decided by measurement interval and chart speed Engineering Unit UNIT An engineering unit of up to six characters can be assigned to each channel The default setting is all spaces The characters numbers can be selected by cursor from the displayed row on sub display 1 An engineering unit can only be assigned to channels to which linear scaling is applied For details concerning entering characters numbers refer to page 6 15 If the instrument is equipped with the optional computation function or floppy disk drive make sure that channel Nos are set between A01 and A60 when specifying the measurement units for computation channels Setting the Channels to be Recorded TREND Dot Recording Recording can be set ON OFF per channel The default setting is ON ON recording will take place OFF recording will not take place The display will show for channels set to ON and L for channels set to OFF Refer to page 4 10 on which channel is being displayed If you are installing optional computation channels channel Nos must be set to A01 to A60 Digital Printout in the Analog Trend Mode Refer to 6 4 Setting Tag Digital Printout and Manual Printout on page 6 9 IM DR232 01E 6 1 Setting the Recording Mode Engineering Unit Re
285. ions Extender base ariete ede ier re Eee en PRG Extender module hee cett External in output nerit etes External RIC EXT eet eee tete F Fail failure output FEED Key utenti eet Feed recording paper enitn tiii 7 1 Fenite CORB Wa QU BI Rd 3 10 3 12 3 42 Filter Floppy disk Handling 1 11 Formatting iecore e ee 11 14 BEtoft dOOf tiat el ree CH Fe REDI o Ene 1 2 1 3 FUNC key iocis p RE E ERN E ERES 5 12 7 3 7 4 9 14 9 16 10 29 10 31 10 32 12 8 12 11 Functions Action Alarme E E EE Alami display hold eere 2 15 10 8 COMPAN oseere e E EA eee e ede 2 16 Display E EAE AAE 2 1 Event action 2 17 9 1 to 9 10 External 1n OUtput zer mb ttis 2 18 ette etm etes 2 10 6 17 Key lock keylock 2 17 9 15 10 15 10 16 Match Time Tunetlon uso aeree oo treo ER 2 12 6 17 9 9 Measurement input essere 2 3 2 4 Recording eee eg 2 5 to 2 12 Relay hold See also HOLD NON HOLD 2 15 10 11 Function Grounding Terminal function ground terminal 4 3 10 3 12 3 44 lel Ree 10 2 EUSG io hence orte i ae e ER 5 3 31 hn c 13 2 r
286. ir terminals As the measuring leadwires use wires 0 2 to 2 5 mm2 AWG14 to 25 thick so they can be fastened securely with the wire clips The power monitor module is a product belonging to Installation Over voltage Category CAT Il Diagram of Terminal Block Single phase Model Three phase Model Wire clip Wire clip B o Zu Og Eel Zn Zu Og B Wire clip Strip 9 mm of insulation off the leadwire ALWAYS clamp the leadwire with the wire clip The recommended torque for fastening the wire clip screw is 0 4 to 0 5 Nem 3 22 IM DR232 01E 3 7 Connecting the Signal Lines Wiring Diagrams Single phase Two wire Configuration A CN S SOURCE LOAD SOURCE Iw LOAD HB Single phase Three wire Configuration power monitor modules for three phase use only A RE SOURCE LOAD A SOURCE N 7 LOAD FUSE as ANZ x Three phase Three wire Configur
287. it on rate of change difference high limit and difference low limit Interval for Rate of Change Alarms In case of high low limit on rate of change alarms variation is measured over a preset interval and if the variation exceeds a preset value an alarm occurs This interval can be set and applies to all channels High limit on rate of change Low limit on rate of change Six types of alarms are available namely high limit alarm low limit alarm high limit on rate of t2 t1 12 11 Measured variation Measur x Measur ement 12 z ement Ee et variation viue Set variation value T h T 2 1 Y M Measured variation 0 Time t Time Set interval Set interval Alarm Hysteresis 1V You can set the width between the value of alarm occurrence and its release This setting prevents frequent alarm occurrences releases in an unstable environment Hysteresis values can be set in the 0 1 percentage range of the recording span The hysteresis setting is used for high and low limit alarms High limit alarm Alarm occurrence Set alarm value Hysteresis Approx 0 5 Measurement values Alarm release 1V Low limit alarm Measurement values Hysteresis Approx 0 5 Alarm release Alarm occurrence L Set alarm value Internal Switches
288. ize system modules Note After completing the system configuration if you attempt to do the following and then configure the system again the setting information for the corresponding module position slot will be initialized Install modules with different model codes style numbers into slots Remove modules Add modules When you attempt the following you should first configure the DR232 242 system to operate the instrument correctly After executing the system configuration check the module information Sub unit connections including additions and replacement removal unit number setting Installation including additions and replacement removal of modules If the installed modules are not recognized in the system configuration check that the same unit number is not used or that the setting is out of range number of modules does not exceed the allowed number modules and units are connected properly and power supply is operating properly Initialization RAM INIT This initializes information other than the basic information set in Chapter 10 or calibration set in Chapter 11 For details on initial setting see the appropriate sections and explanations AII the files in the internal RAM disk will be lost when the RAM is initialized NO Initialization not executed YES Initializes the information It takes about ten seconds to initialize the information IM DR232 01E 9 17 suonoung p
289. kwise the entire brackets are pushed against the panel rear Tighten the screws to securely fix the instrument to the panel Proper screw tightening torque is 0 8 to 1 2 N m 8 to 12 kgf cm The brackets can be used for panels of 3 to 26 mm thick 444 203 64 8 1 a 1 8 N du a F Panel cutting dimensions At least 520 mm E E e 6 9 Er E N 425 IM DR232 01E 3 2 How to Install DS400 DS600 The subunit DS400 DS600 can be used on a desk top installed on the floor directly panel mounted mounted on DIN rails or rack mounted Always mount the instrument vertically If the power terminals of the unit are screw terminals directly mount the unit on the panel to prevent electric shock Desk top use or installed on the floor Extend the legs on the bottom of the unit forward as shown below and place the unit vertically If the unit could fall when wired use the through holes of the legs to fix the legs with the attached four 4 mm screws Direct panel mounting Following the figure below fix the unit at six places using the attached screws length 16 mm Mounting on DIN rails For the mounting procedure see the instruction manual for DIN rail mounting fitting IM DR232 01E pue uoneyyersu 3 2 How to Install
290. l basis plus information on the result of computing given at each preset time Monthly reports the results of computing configured on a report channel basis plus information on given simultaneously with the preset time for making each report The following shows the format of daily reports 00 Time to make report Starting time 9 o DAILY REPORT Jan 03 97 00 00 START Jan 01 97 00 00 o RCH CH TAG MODE UNIT 03 00 00 MIN TOTAL MAX Jan 02 01 00 Jan 02 02 00 Jan 03 00 00 R01 TAG 001CH__ AVE V 1 0000 2 0000 1 0000 2 0000 2 0000 2 0000 3 RO2 002 INST V 10 000 9 000 9 000 10 000 03 003 SUM 1 2 400000 01 4 800000E 01 1 000000 0 1 000000E 00 1 000000 00 R04 2 R05 R06 TAG A01CH AVE unit06 20000 000 10000 000 30000 000 10000 000 10000 000 10000 000 c R07 02 INST 200000 00 9999 99 9999 99 200000 00 3 R08 A03 SUM 2 400000E 01 4 800000E 01 1 000000 0 1 000000E 00 1 000000 00 R09 EN Enhanced format section of report R60 list of the result of computing at respective preset times Standard format section of report results of computing on a report channel basis IM DR232 01E 10 29 10 12 Working with the Report Function Time to Make Report START TIME Set the time to make a report in the format day of month time Define the day of month field within a 01 28 range and the time field within a 00 23 range Hourly reports The DR recorder makes reports every hour on the hour
291. l the holder in place Note The fuse is located in the subunit This fuse may not be replaced by the customer For replacement contact your nearest representative For AC power supply model the fuse ratings are 250V2A time lag fuse certified by IEC VDE For DC power supply model the fuse ratings are 250V6 3A time lag fuse certified by UL CSA 13 2 IM DR232 01E 13 3 Troubleshooting If an error code appears on the display see Section 13 4 Error Codes If servicing is necessary or if the instrument is not operating correctly though the following corrective actions have been taken please contact Yokogawa Engineering Service Corporation Addresses may be found on the back cover of this manual Problem Probable Cause Corrective Action Recorder does not operate The recorder carriage and chart do not move Power switch is off Turn on the power Power supply is not connected properly Connect properly Supplied power does not meet powerrequirements Use power meeting its requirements Fuse blown Replace fuse If the fuse blows immediately after turning on the power servicing will be required Output beyond its limits Fluctuating indication Carriage swung over Input specifications are not correct Correct input specifications Incorrect measuring range or recording span Change measuring range or recording span
292. l two or more times in one group causes an error For example if you configure G01 as 003 001 010 an error will result because 003 is included in this range The default setting is 001 The group setting is used with the event action function Refer to 9 1 on page 9 1 for details IM DR232 01E 6 17 suonipuoo Pumes 7 1 Starting Dot Printing Digital Printing and Printing in Logging Mode Relevant Keys Operating Procedure Explanation DISP MODE RECORD ESC Er runc C C INS DEL RANGE ALARM M FUNC 1 EOG CHART SET ENTER 2 To start recording Press the RECORD key The status display RECORD lights To stop recording Press the RECORD key once again The status display RECORD turns off To feed the recording paper Press the FEED key Starting dot printing digital printing and recording in logging mode See Chapter 6 Setting Event action functions can also be used to perform the above printing and recording see Page 9 1 Feeding the recording paper Press the FEED key to feed the recording paper Even if the FEED key is pressed while recording the paper is fed without stopping the recording Notes on starting recording The carriage will stop temporarily at the left or right
293. layed recording in case of computation error Time axis scale for TLOG SUM TLOG TIME SCALE For TLOG SUM of time series data is added at each measurement interval However in the case of an input having unit of s min or h like flow rate the computation result will differ from the actual value if addition of data is carried out In this case setting TLOG TIME SCALE according to the unit of the input will cause the data measured at measurement intervals to be processed according to the unit of the input For instance if the measurement interval is 2s and input value is 100 m min the computation result will be 30000 after the elapse of one minute since 100 is added every 2 seconds Setting TLOG TIME SCALE to min will cause the measured data to be multiplied by 2s 60s at each measurement interval thus making the result close to the actual input value If this function is set to OFF simple addition of data will be carried out Process of abnormal data during TLOG or CLOG TLOG CH ERROR Used to select the process method for abnormal data obtained during TLOG or CLOG ERROR Abnormal data is processed as a computation error SKIP Abnormal data is ignored and computation is continued Process of overflow data during TLOG or CLOG TLOG CH OVER SUM or AVE Used to select the process method for overflow data obtained during TLOG or CLOG ERROR Overflow data is processed as a computation error e SKIP Overflow data is ignored a
294. lication Measuring Ranges Voltage 25 or 250 Vrms Current 0 5 or5 A In three phase measurement or single phase three wire measurement the current voltage ranges are identical between the respective phases or lines the current voltage ranges are set in common between the respective channels Measured Frequency Range 45 to 65 Hz Wiring Methods DU400 12 Single phase two wire DU400 22 Single phase two wire single phase three wire three phase three wire dual voltage dual current three phase three wire triple voltage triple current and three phase four wire Measured Data Items For each module a maximum of six data items can be selected from the effective voltage effective current active power apparent power reactive power frequency power factor and phase angle The selected data items can then be assigned to channel numbers xx1 to xx6 to show them on the display as well as record them Restrictions apply to the combination of selectable data items however depending on the method of input wiring Conditions of Measurement Measuring range for current and voltage inputs 10 of the measuring range lt current and voltage inputs lt 100 of the measuring range Vi range is monitored in frequency measurement All measurements are done relative to the frequency on a channel for V1 and therefore the results of measurements are not guaranteed if the V1 input is out of the range noted above If the input apparent power falls below 10
295. ly with the DR232 1 DR242 1 The REPORT menu is displayed only with models with the M3 option From the previous page EVT REMOTE 1 4 EVT REMOTE 1 1234567891011 12 ACT EDGE ALARM ACK 4 ___ ACT EDGE ALARM ACK AOL I ACT EDGE ALARM RST ACT EDGE TIMER RST OQ ACT EDGE RECORD OFF 4 aro ACT EDGE RECORD OFF OFF ON NN PR ao I ACT EDGE DIGITAL PR ao p PR 01 4 ACT EDGE MSG PR 01 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 1112131415 16 17 18 19 20 ACT EDGE MSG DISP 01 4 ACT EDGE MSG DISP 01 CP 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 111213 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 ACT EDGE MATH START 4 ACT EDGE MATH START START STOP CLEAR RESET ACT EDGE FLAG F01 ACT EDGE FLAG F01 F01 F02 F03 F04 F05 F06 F07 F08 F09 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 WR ACT EDGE MEMRY DATA WR DATA WR WR TRIG RD TRIG LD TRG1 LD TRG2 LD TRG3 B ACT EDGE FLOPY LD_TRG1 4 avo ACT EDGE FLOPY LD_TRG1 LD_TRG1 LD_TRG2 LD_TRG3 ACT EDGE REPORT START 4 ACT EDGE REPORT START START STOP ACT LEVL RECORD 4 c ACT LEVL RECORD ACT LEVL SPEED CHG ao B ACT LEVL GR TREND G01 4 ACT LEVL GR TREND G01 G01 G02 003 004 005 006 007 ACT LEVL MATH ao po 4 ACT LEVL FLAG F01 F01 F02 F03 F04 F05 F06 F07 F08 F09 F10 E F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 4 ACT LEVL REPORT To the next page To the previous page ENTER ENTER ENTER
296. m DC voltage input DI input contact DC input TC input RTD input b E amp amp Compensation lead 10Q max leadwire Three wire resistances should be approx equal 100 max for Pt100Q and Pt50Q 10 max for Cu100 Wiring DC current Input Signal Lines mA input Module Diagrams of Terminal Block and Wiring Model with Screw Terminals Model with Clamp Terminals SSS CH cH2 CH2 5 5 CH4 SSS SSS Jie e evi lt 5 SSS SSS SSS CH10 CH9 amp amp fy CH10 input terminals on the DCV TC DI and Digital input module 2 There is no clamp type terminal for Digital input module E CH1 CH3 CH9 Shunt resistor DC current input Note For 4 to 20mA input shunt resistance value should be 2500 0 1 A IN 1 DC current input IM DR232 01E 3 21 pue uoneyyersu 3 7 Connecting the Signal Lines Wiring AC Input Signal Lines Power Monitor Module For hazard prevention ALWAYS pr
297. module Display for alarm Display for DI DO module module Not used 0111 Alarm relay 20 Alarm relay No in units of 1 Slot No Unit No racc Alarm relay 22 Alarm relay 21 Relay status of alarm output relay 13 Relay status of alarm output relay 12 Relay status of alarm output relay 11 4 12 IM DR232 01E 4 8 Using the CLOCK Data amp Time Display Relevant Keys Operating Procedure Explanation DISP MODE C RECORD ESC FUNC PRINT CO FEED INS DEL RANGE ALARM CP M FUNC 1 SET enter 2 1 Select the sub display 2 using the DISP key 2 Select CLK using the MODE key Sub display 1 and 2 005 0 8210V 006 0 0095V wCLK Dec 30 95 13 16 19 Clock Display The date and time can be displayed on sub display 2 According to the set time in 3 9 Setting the Date and Time see page 3 23 the current date and time is displayed The display shows the month day year and hour minute second in this sequence IM DR232 01E 4 13 ejdsig epo 101u0Jy Dunes 5 1 Setting the Type of Input and Recording Span Relevant Keys 001 10 VOLT 2V SPAN 2 0000 2 0000V SKIP VOLT TC RTD DI DEL
298. munication output Time Intervals for Printing of Report Printing Format Number of Columns Chart Length Printing Time Hourly report Standard TI 20 cm approximately 4 minutes Daily report Standard 71 20 cm approximately 4 minutes Enhanced 437 114cm approximately 22 minutes Monthly report Standard TI 20 cm approximately 4 minutes Enhanced 542 141 cm approximately 27 minutes The printing time is maximum when you print an hourly report and a daily report each in the standard format and a monthly report in the enhanced format all at the same time Required printing time 4 4 27 35 minutes Format of Output via Communication Binary IM DR232 01E 14 7 14 1 Specifications of DR232 DR242 and DS400 DS600 Communication Function Power Supply Communication interface is possible by GP IB RS 232 C RS422 A RS 485 or ethernet Rated supply voltage AC power supply 100 to 240 VAC freely selected DC power supply 12 to 28 VDC only for the subunit DS400 DS600 of a DC power supply model Operating supply voltage AC power supply 90 to 250 VAC DC power supply 10 to 32 VDC only for the subunit DS400 DS600 of a DC power supply model Rated supply frequency 50 60 Hz Power consumption Main unit max approx 130 VA Sub unit DS400 max approx 55 VA AC power supply max approx 25 VA DC power supply Sub unit DS600 max approx 70 VA AC power supply max ap
299. n RAM disk and floppy disk Convert data and copy SET key SET MEMORY Section 11 6 Initialize built in RAM SET key SET MEMORY Section 11 9 disk Initialize floppy disk SET key SET MEMORY Section 11 10 Save Load set up data Turn ON power while pressing the DISP SET UP FLOPPY Section 11 3 11 4 of SET UP mode key Procedure varies according to the menu configuration of the SET key see section 10 9 Perform Printing Parameters Procedure Selecting menu Reference Perform manual print PRINT key MAN PR START Section 7 2 Perform list print PRINT key LIST START Section 7 2 Perform header print PRINT key HEADER START Section 7 2 Perform message print FUNC key MSG PRINT Section 7 3 Perform setup list print Press the FUNC key for about three S U LIST START Section 7 4 Procedure varies according to the menu configuration of the FUNC key see section 10 8 Other Settings Parameters Procedure Selecting menu Reference Timer SET key SET TIMER Section 6 1 Event Action SET key SET LOGIC Section 9 1 Copy between channels SET key SET COPY Section 9 2 Match time Press the SET key for about three seconds 5 TIME Section 6 8 Group Press the SET key for about three seconds SET GROUP Section 6 8 Relay internal switch Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key SET UP RELAY Section 10 4 operation mode Burnout Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key SET UP BURN OUT Section 10 5
300. n and right span respectively Usually starting stopping movement of the chart and trend recording is carried out by pressing the appropriate key on the operation panel But movement of the chart and trend recording can also be started stopped upon alarm occurrence or by remote control event action function Recording Method of Trend Recording Chart movement can start by either key operation or event action function and selected channels Recording Zone Scale Values will thus be recorded as trend recording Normal Recording Selected channels will all be recorded regardless of the below mentioned occurrence release of alarms or group settings Recording will start when the chart starts moving Trend Recording upon Alarm Occurrence Trigger Recording All channels where an alarm occurred will be recorded Even when the alarm is released recording will continue Level Recording AII channels where an alarm occurred will be recorded When the alarm is released recording will stop Group Trend Recording Channels can be clustered in a group and only those channels will be recorded The recording span of measurement values on the chart is called recording zone For each channel you can set between what locations on the chart the measurement values will be recorded It is possible to assign zones so that the analog trend recordings of each individual channel will not overlap This setting is only valid for trend recordings in
301. nalog Trend eee 2 5 2 7 2 15 6 2 6 3 Display eie MER GRE ERE EROR 2 1 4 1 to 4 13 Logging LOGGING esee 2 5 6 2 Monitor Display eese 2 1 Opera OM ee tatere e Ie ere 2 14 10 9 to 10 11 Recording ce ERG RERO PE HRS 2 5 6 2 TIME mode eet bee ROC BY 6 3 MODE Key eene Chapter 4 to Chapter 12 Model and Suffix Codes sussies 3to5 Module information essent 9 17 Monitor Display Mode sess 2 1 Mounting brackets eset tnt 6 3 4 Moving average functions essere number of samples for MULTIPLE o pee pa pP REEL N Names of parts sssini iaeiaiai 1 2 to 1 5 3 5 to 3 8 O Operating conditions reference 2 14 2 Operation panel 1 2 1 3 Operan Modeen iiei rerit See mode Optional modules pte eer eens 4 1 5 ERR E RE 3 15 3 17 14 10 Partially expanded display sss See Display 13 1 Password eccessi inatit eth ea ave eee sea ra a rare deca 9 15 2 17 Periodic maintenance eese 13 1 uir See printing pitch IgE n 3 5 Position marks when installing the chart and ribbon cassette 3 6 Power connector 1 2 3 29 3 32 ca
302. nce Junction Compensation Relevant Keys SETUP BURN OUT Cue CE Ge ALARM INS DEL Operating Procedure Main menu SETUP 71 D O BURN OUT ENTER gt 001 01 BURN OUT OFF D RJC ENTER 001 01 RJC INT D C O RJC SET ESC 001 01 RJC EXT ENTER Select Setting Parameter GIANT iD ALARM A D INTG FILTER RELAY BURN OUT Eus ser Enter 2 Enter the SET UP menu in the following procedure 1 When the display presents the operation display mode or a menu other than the SET UP menu first turn off the power switch 2 Turn the switch back on while pressing the DISP key and continue pressing the DISP key for about 5 seconds Select set using the CS keys If exiting the following lower menu setting halfway press the MODE ESC key The display returns to the main menu to which the lower menu belongs However newly set or selected contents are canceled When setting proceeds to the display for the setting end the newly set or selected contents are established Lower menu gt Select Channel No i 001 01 BURN OUT OFF D gt Select Channel No J 001 01 BURN OUT OFF ENTER OFF DOWN UP 4 BURN OUT SET ESC Select Channel No 4 001 01 RJC INT D gt Select Channel No 4 001 01 RJC INT ENTER INT EXT 4
303. nd Setting the Time Axis for TLOG SUM Relevant Keys Gait 7 Gea ESC RECORD SETU P MATH mE Func 5 _ Feen gt Select Setting Parameter CA PRN ADJ SCANINTVL RECORD MATH ALARM AT ease lanes ser enter 2 Operating Procedure Carry out the following steps to enter the SET UP menu 1 If the SET UP menu is not currently displayed turn the power OFF 2 While holding the DISP key turn the power ON Make sure you still continue to hold down the DISP key for approximately another five seconds Select set using the GS keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept Main menu SETUP MATH ENTER MATH ERROR OVER ENTER 4 OVER OVER 4 TLOG TIME SCALE SEC ENTER OFF SEC MIN HOUR 4 TLOG CH ERROR SKIP ENTER ERROR SKIP 4 TLOG CH OVER ERROR ENTER ERROR SKIP LIMIT 4 TLOG PSUM OVER OVER ENTER OVER ROTATE MATH SET End of setting ESC 12 12 IM DR232 01E 12 5 Setting Actions to be Carried out in Case of Computation Error and Setting the Time Axis for TLOG SUM Explanation Displaying recording in case of computation error MATH ERROR Used to determine whether OVER or OVER be disp
304. nd computation is continued e LIMIT Overflow data is treated as the next data for computation Measurement channels to which linear scaling is applied Specified scaling upper lower limit Measurement channels to which no linear scaling is applied Upper lower limit of the measuring range Computation channels Specified LEFT RIGHT value Processing of the results of TLOG PSUM computation OVER If the result of a separate calculation of TLOG PSUM XXXX exceeds 99999999 the DR recorder goes into an overflow ROTATE If the result of a separate calculation of TLOG PSUM XXXX exceeds 99999999 the DR recorder resets the value subsequent to 99999999 to 0 and continues computing The process is effective only when a pulse input module is installed IPPON LIN ejqerreAv uoneinduio Bunnoox3 IM DR232 01E 12 13 13 1 Periodic Maintenance and Recommended Parts Replacement Period Periodic maintenance Check the recorder s operation periodically to keep it in good operating condition Especially check the following items and replace consumable parts as needed Do not use a lubricant for periodic maintenance Are display and recording functioning properly Are there blurred or broken sections of the recording or printout characters When replacing the ribbon cassette refer to Section 3 4 Installing the Chart and Ribbon Cassette s the chart paper feeding properly When replacing the ribbon cassette see
305. new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Main menu SET L__ av Lower menu COPY ENTER COPY RANGE ON ENTER OFF ON 4 COPY ALARM ON ENTER OFF ON 4 COPY OTHER ON ENTER OFF ON 4 COPY 001 002 10ch 4 COPY 001ch TO 002 10ch COPY 001ch TO 002 10ch ENTER 4 SET OK ESC 9 12 IM DR232 01E 9 2 Copying Explanation Selecting range copying COPY RANGE ON Copies the type of input measuring ranges recording spans linear scaling engineering units and tags set OFF The copying of ranges is disabled Selecting alarm copying ON Copies the type of alarm alarm values and relay internal switch setting OFF The copying of alarms is disabled Selecting copying of other items COPY OTHER ON Copies setting recording zones partial compressions dot recording ON OFF digital printing ON off manual printing ON OFF alarm printout ON1 ON2 OFF scale value printout ONI ON2 ON3 OFF list printout ON OFF average numbers in moving averages interpolation ON OFF and measured data saving ON OFF OFF The copying of other items is disabled Setting a copy source channel Sets a copy source channel with up to three characters For details on these characters see Section 4 1 Using Auto Display on page 4 2 Setting a dest
306. ng channel you want to include in your configuration Starting Channel Number The first three digits on the main display constitute the starting channel number The first digit is the unit number The second digit denotes the module number slot number The configurable range depends on the location where the power monitor module is connected See page 3 8 for more information Ending Channel Number The two digits that follow the starting channel number constitute the ending channel number Normally the starting channel number and the ending channel number should be the same If you want to skip any consecutive number of channels enter the range of those channel numbers When you move the cursor from the starting to the ending channel number the ending channel number becomes the same as the last two digits of the starting channel number Setting the Wiring Method Select from the following methods Single phase two wire 1Ph2W Single phase three wire 1Ph3W three wire input modules only Three phase three wire 2 Voltage 2 Current 3Ph3W 2I three wire input modules only Three phase three wire 3 Voltage 3 Current 3 three wire input module only Three phase four wire 3Ph4W three wire input modules only Setting the Input Range Select from the following ranges 250V 0 5A 250V 5A 25V 0 5A 25V 5A This setting is common to all channels Any change to this setting also changes the settings of the rest of the channels Impose
307. ng the Date and Time Si ih Counters t e et e aee edes Chapter 4 Setting the Monitor Mode Display Usngthe AUTO Displ y ee ates ie A es 4 1 4 2 Using the MANUAL Display 5 enenatis tite eee erts 4 4 4 3 Using the PAGE Display eee EORR Dee ee tag eue a dice dire Pcr edt 4 6 4 4 Using the ALARM SEARCH Display sees 4 7 4 5 Using the BARGRAPH Display eene trennen eterne tete etre 4 9 4 6 Using the ALARM STATUS Display sese 4 10 47 Using the RELAY STATUS Display 4 11 4 8 Using the CLOCK Data amp Time Display seen nennen 4 13 Chapter 5 Setting the Input Type Recording Span Linear Scaling 5 1 Setting the Type of Input and Recording Span esee 5 2 Setting Linear Scaling and the Recording Span 5 3 Configuring the Input Range and Recording Span or the Linear Scaling of a Power Monitoring Ch nnel EE AA eve Eti Ue LEN e ad te Lis ttc e ERA eA 5 6 5 4 Configuring the Measuring Range and Recording Span or the Linear Scaling of a Strain Input Clhi nnel oie AU Robur 5 10 10 IM DR232 01E Contents Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Chapter 10 Chapter 11 5 5 Performing Initial Balancing Initialization on a Strain Input Channel ess 5 12 5 6 Config
308. ng the contents of the file SET Main menu gt CK MEMORY ENTER gt MEMORY READ ENTER CH SET WRITE READ SAVE LOAD COPY DELETE INFO INIT 4 READ INFO ENTER DIRECT TRIGER STOP INFO 4 INFO FILE AAA ENTER AAA BBB CCC DDD gt MODEL EXPAND ENTER gt 96 07 07 00 00 00 LENGTH 20000 gt SAMPLE 10 Sec TRIGDATANo 1 4 gt CHANNEL 201 60 ENTER ONM 2010000000008 oo000 0000000000 gt ON 2310000000008 LICILI 0o00 4 INFO END End of setting ESC Assigning the read data to a computation channel to display or record the data SET Main menu T CO MATH ENTER 01 30 D gt Select Channel No 4 A01 01 MODE ON gt Select Channel No 4 A01 01 MODE ON ENTER OFF ON 4 CALC MO001 ENTER a 23456789 AM LEFT 3000 000Kg ENTER om limit 9999 999 99999 999Kg RIGHT 3000 000K g ENTER gt Span limit 9999 999 99999 999Kg 4 SET OK End of setting ESC IM DR232 01E 11 2 Reading Measured and Computed Data Explanation Measured computed data is read from the internal RAM disk Reading methods READ MODE The following two methods are available DIRECT Data is read at the measurement intervals immediately after setting has been completed TRIGGER The event action function is used to read data at the measurement intervals when an event takes place This function is useful when you want to compare data before an event with data after an event Displaying the
309. ng time the ribbon may become wavy and move out of the dot printing range of the printer head If this happens replace the ribbon with a new one Load the Ribbon Cassette into the DR242 1 Open the front door and open the display door The ribbon cassette can be loaded without removing the chart cassette from the main unit 2 When the chart cassette is removed press the red lever 1 at the bottom of the carriage When the chart cassette is not removed pull forward the red lever 2 then the ribbon cassette holder moves to the right Ribbon cassette holder Red lever 1 3 Turn the ribbon cassette rotating knob in the direction of the arrow counterclockwise to take up the ribbon slack 4 Fit the projection of the holder into the slot of the ribbon cassette and insert the cassette fully into the holder IM DR232 01E 3 4 Installing the Chart and Ribbon Cassette 5 Push the ribbon cassette to the left until the latch engages Check that the three white lines of the printer head are not visible when viewed from the front If the white lines can be seen the ribbon cassette is not properly loaded Push the cassette to the left again 6 Turn the ribbon cassette rotating knob once more in the direction of the arrow counterclockwise to take up the ribbon slack 7 Feed the chart paper by pressing the FEED key on the operation panel to prevent a delay in starting the chart paper feed Note Check that the ribbon ca
310. nge channel 1000 0 C in the type T thermocouple channel A type T thermocouple has a measuring range from 200 0 to 400 0 C so an error results For details on the decimal point positions in individual measuring ranges see Chapter 14 Specifications 8 2 IM DR232 01E 8 1 Setting Alarms and Relays including internal switches Setting Relays Internal Switches Set which alarm output relay or internal switch should be triggered when an alarm occurs Select the desired alarm output relay or internal switch from among the following The default setting is OFF OFF Alarm output relays and internal switches remain OFF S01 to S60 60 internal switches are provided UMN U Unit number for an alarm module or a DI DO module M Slot number for an alarm module or a DI DO module N Number 0 to 9 For details see page 3 8 OM1 to 0M2 R1 option M Slot number for a DI DO module Two relays are provided For the model with both A4 and R1 options both the above can be selected simultaneously Multiple alarm setpoints can be set for one alarm output relay or internal switch The operation mode in the alarm output relay or internal switch can be set when an alarm occurs For details see Section 10 4 Setting Operation Mode of Relay Internal Switch on page 10 9 When the alarm module on the DI DO modules are not recognized as system modules the relay is st to OFF For the system recognition see page 9 17 I
311. ngle 9 Voltage 50Hz noise CJ e Load DAN 60Hz Thyristor 7 x Current Unit heaters etc gt phase angle Thyristor waveform When the thyristor turns ON or OFF a pulse noise is superimposed on commercial power supply and its pulse width is approximately lus Accordingly thyristor noise can be defined as follows thyristor noise commercial power supply pulse noise Inverter Commercial power supply is converted to direct current by a rectifier sometimes the thyristor is used as the rectifier to stabilize direct current and then modulated by a switching transistor and finally converted into alternating current at the desired frequency from tens to hundreds of Hz to drive a motor for example If the load to be driven is a fluorescent lamp the frequency is tens of kHz Accordingly inverter noise can be defined as follows Inverter noise commercial power supply pulse noise high density variable low frequency noise Since the density of pulse noise is high compared to that of a thyristor and in addition there is variable frequency noise it is difficult to consider a countermeasure for inverter noise Commercial power supply Rectifier output DC output Inverter output Commercial power supply Rectifier myles DC filter Inverter Motor ep n Principle of inverter IM DR232 01E 3 35 pue uoneyyersu
312. nit of value arising between computed values depending on the measurement interval applied INTVL no conversion S results of computing sec converted to the sum of input in seconds results of computing x measurement interval min converted to the sum of input in minutes Y results of computing x measurement interval 60 hour converted to the sum of input in hours Y results of computing x measurement interval 3600 day converted to the sum of input in days results of computing x measurement interval 86400 Time to Make Report Reference dates 1st to 28th days of a month Reference times 00 00 to 23 00 Output Ranges of the Results of Computing for Reports AVE 9999999 to 99999999 with the position of the decimal point dependent on the measurement and computing channels assigned as report channels INST 9999999 to 99999999 with the position of the decimal point dependent on the measurement and computing channels assigned as report channels SUM seven digits for the mantissa and two digits for the exponent Processing of Faulty Data AVE Faulty data are excluded from computing Data of positive and negative overflows however are included in the computing of the maximum and minimum INST Faulty data are included in computing SUM Faulty data are excluded from computing 14 6 IM DR232 01E 14 1 Specifications of DR232 DR242 and DS400 DS600 Information on and Process in Case of Power Failure Th
313. ns soe ce i ER Eb c Re Pede 9 1 9 223 9 12 9 3 Alarm Acknowledgment Alarm Reset Timer Reset Keylock and Message Printout 9 14 9 4 Clearing Alarm Message Buffers Displaying Module Communications Information Structuring System Modules and Initializing Information 9 16 9 5 Fail Chart End Output and Remote Control Signal 9 18 9 6 Summer Winter TIME PH EE HUS ERE 9 19 Basic Settings SET UP 101 Selecting Adjustment of Dot Printing Position or Scan Interval 10 2 Setting Recording REED REB EI RR eee 10 3 Select Alarm Interval Hysteresis Hold A D Converter Integration Time Filter 10 7 10 4 Setting Operation Mode of Relay Internal Switch seen 10 5 Setting Burn out Reference Junction Compensation 10 6 Setang Recordmig Colors ense RUE RR 10 7 Setang Key LOCK 5 sten Ro TE Hs 105 Setting FUNG PUNC3 Men une er E HY E atr EH 10 9 Setting SET SET3 Menu 10 10 Selecting Display Update Interval Registering Details Set Selected with SET UP Menu and Terminating SET UP Menu ete ie e tere tee den ete 10 24 10 11 Selecting the temperature unit from C or F option eese 10 25 10 12 Working with the Report Function Saving Reading Measured Computed and Set up Data 11 1 Saving Measur
314. ns Measured values Binary data 2 bytes 1 data ASCII data 12bytes 1 data Computed values Binary data 4 bytes 1 data ASCII data 12 bytes 1 data Equation to calculate the total data capacity 576 64 x number of measured ch number of computation ch number of measured ch x 2 number of computation ch x 4 6 x specified data length Save interval of measured computed values Measurement interval of the recorder or select from 1 min 2 min 5 min 10 min By combining with the event action function it can also sample 1 data at a time e g at each M FUNC key or remote control signal input Selection of the saving method of measured computed values WRITE MODE Direct Start saving the data when key operation occurs After saving specified length of data stop the saving process Trigger single Start saving the data when the trigger condition is met After saving a specified length of data stop the saving process Trigger repeat Start saving the data when the trigger condition is met Repeat the process of saving a specified length of data to 1 file until there is no more area in the memory Trigger condition AII Trigger conditions are configured with the event action function Trigger condition when saving the measured computed values Event actio function such as key operation remote control signal alarm status and chartend Trigger condition when loading the measured computed values from buffe memory Event action function
315. nt high frequency noise 100V AC with shield which is grounded Step 2 Insert a power line noise filter available on the market High frequency noise is divided by decreasing impedance to ground through C and increasing impedance through L Power L supply mm CQ E instrument 100 W wy Note 1 Ground the noise filter and the recorder in common Note 2 Since insertion of a noise filter increases the by pass current regarded as leakage current make sure that the leakage current is within the specified value When the noise contains wide frequency components While one point grounding is effective at a low frequency it sometimes forms a loop and has an adverse effect on a high frequency Ex Connecting a power meter and the recorder grounded at one point to an inverter lt AC t One point Noise source lt power meter High frequency noise grounding inverter etc The instrument lt _ reverse flow The power meter leaks the high frequency noise component to the ground and that noise flows back to the DA100 side 2 Noise Noise source AG power meter inverter etc blocking of reverse flow y The instrument 9 1 Ferrite beads EA high impedance at high frequency Reverse flow of high frequency to the recorder is thus suppressed
316. nts will replace these in turn after which the average will be calculated each time 2 16 IM DR232 01E 2 6 Other Functions Event Action Function Following the occurrence of an event such as remote control signal 12 alarm internal switch chart end signal out of paper timer match time or key operation any of the following actions can occur Alarm acknowledge refer to page 2 15 Alarm reset refer to page 2 15 Timer reset refer to page 2 8 Recording start stop According to the recording mode and recording format recording will start stop Manual printout refer to page 2 12 Digital printout refer to page 2 6 Message printout refer to page 2 12 Message display A preset message will be displayed on the main display Change of chart speed recording interval Chart speed 1 and recording interval 1 will change to chart speed 2 and recording interval 2 and analog trend and logging recording will be carried out Usually recording will be carried out using chart speed 1 set at the menu displayed after having pressed the CHART key and with recording interval 1 set at the menu displayed after having pressed the SET key at a touch Upon the occurrence of an event recording will be carried out using chart speed 2 and with recording interval 2 set at the menu displayed after having pressed the SET key for three seconds Group trend recording refer to page 2 9 Saving and reading of
317. o 1375 Var Reactive power 0 00 to 27 50 Var 0 0 to 275 0 Var 0 0 to 275 0 Var 0to 2750 Var Var13 Reactive power 0 00 to 41 25 Var 0 0 to 412 5 Var 0 0 to 412 5 Var 0to4125 Var Var0 Power factor 1 00 to 1 00 1 00 to 1 00 1 00 to 1 00 1 00 to 1 00 PFi i 1 2 3 13 0 Phase 89 0to 89 0 deg 89 0 to 89 0 deg 89 0 to 89 0 deg 89 0 to 89 0 deg i 1 2 3 13 0 Frequency 41 00 to 69 00 Hz 41 00 to 69 00 Hz 41 00 to 69 00 Hz 41 00 to 69 00 Hz FREQ Output Data Items of Each Wiring Method Output Data Item Single phase Two wire Single phase Three wire Effective voltage V V1 V1 V3 V13 V1 V3 2 Three phase Three wire Dual voltage Dual current V1 V3 V13 V1 V3 2 Three phase Three wire Triple voltage Triple current Three phase Four wire V1 V2 V3 V13 V1 V3 2 V0 V14 V2 V3 3 V1 V2 V3 V0 1 2 3 3 Effective current I mB 13 11 13 2 IL I3 113 11 13 2 I1 I2 I3 113 11 13 2 10 11 12 13 3 12 13 I0 11 12 13 3 14 18 Active power Pl 2 2 P13 P1 P3 P13 P1 P3 P13 P1 P3 PO P1 I2 P3 Apparent power VA VAI VAI VA3 VAI VA3 VAI VA2 VA3 VAI VA2 VA3 13 VA1 VA3 13 VA1 VA3 VAI3 VAI VA3 0 VA1 VA24 VA3 Reactive power Var Varl Varl Var3 Varl Var3 Varl Var2 Var3 Varl Var2 Var3 Varl
318. o Trend ecording upon occurrence 2 6 2 13 to 2 15 output output relays sees See also Alarm module 2 13 to 2 15 2 18 3 26 4 11 4 12 8 3 9 9 10 9 to 10 11 printing recording eee ertet ee Ie es 2 6 2 15 rate of change high low limit of 2 13 8 2 REFLASH Reflashing eene 2 14 10 10 felease coacto IRE RENTE CR Us 2 13 to 2 15 sce ane T setting trend recording upon occurrence 222 2 9 10 4 TY DG ai t ma I i IC ERE NER RO Rr FE upper limit high limit ALARM key Alarm modules nio i a RR ERR DES See also Alarm output 2 3 1 5 3 26 4 12 8 3 9 17 ALL SKIP arrio ne E E eee eoe 4 2 4 3 Ambient temperature and humidity esses 3 2 for specifications effect 14 8 for reference conditions sse 14 2 Analog Trend Mode sess 2 5 2 7 2 15 6 2 6 3 AND OR ERR RERUMS 2 14 10 10 ASCH conversion eese 11 17 to 11 19 Asterisk for the meaning of excess of alarm or message records 6 11 7 3 EUSEB MOS 2 4 AUTO for recording interval See also Display 2 8 6 2 Averaging See Moving average B Backup of set values eet 3 34 14 10 Bargraphr Display teste ere ies 2 1 4 9 Basic Setting SET UP sese Chapter 10 Baud Tale
319. o attract the operator s attention Affixed to the DR232 242 indicating that for safety the operator should N refer to the appropriate User s Manual For a list of the User s Manuals refer to page 1 WARNING Describes precautions that should be observed to prevent the danger of injury or death to the user Describes precautions that should be observed to prevent damage to the CAUTION DR232 242 Note Provides information that is important for proper operation of the DR232 242 Relevant Keys 2 the relevant panel keys and indicators to carry out e operation i The procedure is explained by a flow diagram For the Operating Procedure meaning of each operation refer to the example below The operating procedures are given with the assumption that you are not familiar with the operation Thus it may not be necessary to carry out all the steps when changing settings Explanation Describes settings and restrictions relating to the operation IM DR232 01E Contents Foreword 1 Checking the Contents of the Package sss 3 Safety Precautions s pe oie ed emp e ed EHE ene 7 How to Use this Manual sss eren enne tnnt enne tenen enne nnne 8 Conventions Used in this 222222 2 224 2 2 20 40 200 000042 00000060 00000000013 9 List of Menus and Set Up Data sss ener trente nenne
320. odule This module can directly measure DC currents ranging from 20 mA to 20 mA since it contains shunt resistors It cannot be connected to a system s main unit Power Monitor Module This module can measure the effective voltage effective current active power reactive power apparent power frequency power factor and phase angle for an AC voltage or AC current input It is available in either a single phase or three phase model This module cannot be connected to a system s main unit Strain Input Module This module can measure strain It is available in either a model with built in 120 or 350 0 bridge resistors or a model with NDIS terminals where bridge resistors are connected externally The module cannot be connected to a system s main unit Pulse Input Module This module can measure pulses It cannot be connected to a system s main unit Digital input module This module can measure contact signals It cannot be connected to a system s main unit Communication interface module This module is necessary when communicating with a personal computer Measurement conditions can be set and data acquired via the communication interface GP IB RS 232 C etc of this dule This module can only be connected to the main unit Alarm module This module can output alarm signals as contact signals The module can be connected to the main unit or the subunit DI DO module This module allows a signal to be output in the case of
321. of recording modes are available analog trend and logging mode The default setting is analog trend mode Analog Trend Mode refer to the next page for a recording example Trend Recording Dot recording The recording principle is that according to measurement data and recording conditions the correct position on the chart will be decided and on that position the dot will be printed Trend recording conditions consist of the following chart speed channels to be recorded recording color refer to page 2 8 recording interval refer to page 2 8 recording span refer to page 2 9 recording zone refer to page 2 9 partially expanded recording refer to page 2 10 interpolation function refer to page 2 10 Digital Printout Measurement data will be printed as numerical values Digital printout conditions consist of the following channels to be recorded recording interval refer to page 2 8 the number of channels to be recorded on the same line refer to page 2 7 Logging Mode In this mode measurement data are only printed as numerical values Logging recording conditions consist of the following channels to be recorded the recording direction vertical or horizontal recording interval refer to page 2 8 IM DR232 01E suonoun4 0 uue v The numbers in parentheses refer to reference pages 2 3 Recording Functions Recording Example 7 2 ues Gulpiooa
322. oltage instantaneous value IN DC voltage average value integration time Normally an integration time of 20ms 50Hz 16 7ms 60Hz is selected depending on the commercial power supply frequencies A 100 ms integration mode is added to the instrument to achieve superior noise rejection However when using the 100ms setting the smallest measurement interval is longer than in case of the 20ms or 16 7ms setting The integration effect enables the PWM A D converter to perform the following two functions Rejection of frequency determined by the reciprocal of the integration time and frequencies which are whole multiples of that frequency First order lag filter provided with cut off frequency proportional to the reciprocal of the integration time The following table compares the integration times of 16 7ms 20ms and 100ms Integration time Rejection frequency Cut off frequency Remarks 16 7ms nx60Hz approx 19Hz for 60Hz 20 0ms nx50Hz approx 16Hz for 50Hz 100 0ms nx10Hz approx 3 2Hz for both 50Hz 60Hz n 1 2 3 As shown in the table the merit of 100 0 ms integration is not only that it applies to both 50 and 60Hz but also that it provides a low cut off frequency as the first order lag filter and improves the noise rejection ability The following figure shows the calculation values of the NMRR for three integration times and an example of actual measurement of the NMRR for a 100 ms integra
323. omes de energized when an error is detected in the system of the DA100 main unit or the DA DR subunit which is connected to the module Contact mode Transfer contact NO C NC Energize de energize not switchable Contact rating 250V DC 0 1A resistive load 250V AC 2A resistive load 30V DC 2A resistive load DO Chart end Output Function The output relay for chart end becomes energized when the recorder runs out of chart paper Contact mode Transfer contact normal open common normal close type Energize de energize not switchable Contact rating 250V DC 0 1A resistive load 250V AC 2A resistive load 30V DC 2A resistive load IM DR232 01E 14 27 14 9 DI DO Module DI Remote control of recorder functions Function The following functions can be controlled by contact input alarm acknowledge alarm reset timer reset starting stopping recording manual printout digital printout message printout message display changing chart speed recording interval group trend recording Starting stopping clearing resetting computation Saving reading measured computed data reading set up data Input signal No voltage contact open collector driven by a TTL or transistor Rated voltage 0 to 5 V DC input impedance 4 7kO 5 V DC pull up Maximum input voltage allowable range 2to7 V DC Input conditions ON voltage 0 5V max 30mA DC L
324. on Base Model Codes Extension module DV100 011 Extension base DV100 012 Units to Which Extension Modules Are Connected DS400 DS600 Input Modules Connectable to an Extension Base Universal input modules DU100 11 or DU100 12 10 channels DCV TC DI input modules DU200 11 or DU200 12 10 channels Maximum Mountable Number of Extension Modules One each on a sub unit Maximum Connectable Number of Extension Bases Up to three to each extension module It is not possible however to wire extension bases in such a manner that the total number of modules already mounted on the sub unit and the extension bases being wired exceeds the maximum number of modules allowed for mounting on the sub unit Overall Length of Wiring 30 m maximum The maximum overall length of cable measured from the extension module to the farthest extension base Normal Operating Temperature Humidity Range 10 to 60 C 20 to 80 RH for an ambient temperature range of 10 to 40 C 10 to 50 RH for 40 to 50 C 5 to 30 RH for 50 to 60 C non condensing Insulation Resistance Depends on the input module installed Withstanding Voltage Depends on the input module installed Power Consumption Included in the value of a system s installed main unit or sub unit Dimensions Extension module Approximately 57 W x 137 H x 49 5 D mm The dimensions do not include the support feet Extension base Approximately 114 8 W x 152 7 H x 43
325. on a panel within 0 1 of rdg 1 digit Vibration Variation when sinusoidal vibration of acceleration 0 2m s is applied for two hours in each of the 3 axial directions over a frequency range of 10 to 60Hz within 0 1 of rdg 1 digit Transportation and Storage Conditions These refer to the environmental conditions existing during transportation and storage from the time of shipment from the factory until commencement of use and also during transportation and storage in the case of a temporary period of non use If the environmental conditions are specified within the specified range the unit will not incur permanent damage and can be returned to a normal working condition although re adjustment may be required in some cases Ambient temperature 25 to 60 C Humidity 5 to 95 RH Vibration 10 to 60Hz 4 9m s max Shock 392 m s max in packed condition General Specifications EMC Conformity Standard Emission EN55011 Class A Immunity EN50082 2 IEC1000 4 2 Electrostatic Discharge Performance Criteria A 8kV Air 4kV Contact 000 4 3 Radiated fields Performance Criteria A 80 1000MHz 10V m IEC1000 4 4 Fast Transients Performance Criteria B Power line 2kV The others 1kV IEC1000 4 6 Conducted Disturbance Performance Criteria A 0 15 80MHz 10V Universal input module and DCV TC DI input module 10 of range except for 50V range 20 of range 50V range When the extension module is used 20
326. on software ME With data acquisition software Input Type 0 iss Always 00 Power Supply z 100 240VAC Power Cord Das 3 pin inlet w UL CSA cable Part No AI006WD Eus 3 pin inlet w VDE cable Part No A1009WD 3 pin inlet w SAA cable Part No A1024WD S dew 3 pin inlet w BS cable Part No A1023WD W 3 pin inlet with screw conversion terminal For DR232 only For DR242 only Options M1 Mathematical Func M3 Report Func Internal illumination D2 deg F Display NO Instrument Number Style number equipment and Release number software package Please refer to these numbers when contacting the dealer Subunit DS400 DS600 Check that the model and suffix code given on the name plate are according to your order Model and Suffix Codes Model Suffix Code Description DS400 4 module connection subunit DS600 6 module connection subunit Type always 00 Power Supply 1 100 240VAC 12 28V DC Power Cord D 3 pin inlet w UL CSA cable Part No A1006WD eod 3 pin inlet w VDE cable Part No A1009WD Rus 3 pin inlet w SAA cable Part No A10242WD B lvii 3 pin inlet w BS cable Part No A1023WD Wannei 3 pin inlet with screw conversion terminal when power supply suffix code is 1 Ns 2 pin inlet with round type connector when power supply suffix code is 2 NO Instrument Number and Style number equipment Please quote th
327. ou selected SKIP as the input type that channel will not be displayed When the input type of all channels is set to SKIP ALL SKIP will be displayed IM DR232 01E 4 1 Using the AUTO Display AUTO Display for Sub display 1 Data of two channels are displayed here simultaneously Channel No Difference between Channels delta Alarms Measurement Values Same as for the main display Engineering Units If the channel number has been selected to appear on the display the first four characters of the unit setting are used for displaying engineering units If TAG has been selected to appear on the display or when XXXXXX OOOOOO are displayed as measurement value no engineering unit will be displayed Selected Display Mode refer to page 4 1 for procedure This only appears on sub display 1 when monitoring The arrow shows to which display the display mode refers 004d L 0 0926V 005 0 0824V AUT Ls elected display mode Engineering unit Measurement value Alarm Difference between channels Channel No 1st digit unit No A will be displayed in the case of optional computation channels 2nd digit slot No 3rd digit channel No in units of 1 Others Same as for the main unit AUTO Display for Sub display 2 Data of two channels are displayed here simultaneously Channel No Difference between Channels delta Alarms Measurement
328. oundary values when the measurement range for each channel setting is different is that determined for each corresponding range As a result it exceeds the measurable range an error occurs For example if channels whose measurement ranges are 20 mV 2 V and type T thermocouple are set and the boundary value is set to 10000 the following applies The boundary value of the channel whose measurement range is 20 mV 10 000 mV The boundary value of the channel whose measurement range is 2 V 1 0000 V and The boundary value of the channel whose measurement range is type T thermocouple 1000 0 C As the measurement range of type T thermocouple is 200 0 to 400 0 C an error occurs for this channel For decimal point positions for each measurement range see Chapter 14 Specifications Points to Note when Using Partially Expanded Recording Partial recording cannot be carried out if the input type of the computation channels is SKIP or DI or if the computation channels are OFF Partially expanded settings will be automatically canceled when either of the following changes occur the input type has been changed the measurement range has been changed the recording span has been changed linear scaling settings have been changed the reference channel for difference between channels has been changed IM DR232 01E 6 7 suonipuoo bumes 6 4 Setting Tag Digital Printout and Manual Printout
329. ovide protective grounding before connecting measuring leadwires When connecting any object being measured ALWAYS turn off the power to the object It is extremely dangerous to connect or disconnect interconnecting leadwires with the power to the object left on Exercise utmost care to avoid connecting any current mode circuit to a voltage input terminal or any voltage mode circuit to a current input terminal Wrong connection may result in damage to the circuit or equipment being measured or the DR232 or DR242 recorder itself as well as bodily injury Fuses are not built into voltage and current input terminals ALWAYS install a fuse on the interconnecting leadwire Use a fuse that will not permit the voltage or current being measured to exceed the maximum ratings of an AC input module The maximum voltage and current that can continuously be imposed on an AC input module are as follows Voltage 250 Vrms current 5 Arms To avoid electrical shock ALWAYS attach the terminal cover in place after the completion of wiring to the terminals so that the terminals cannot be accidentally touched CAUTION In wiring use double insulated leadwires that have sufficient withstanding voltage and current carrying capacity margins against the voltage and current being measured and meet the ratings at which they are used ALWAYS clamp measuring leadwires with the wire clips to prevent the wires from being disconnected from the
330. ow Measurement channels to which linear scaling is applied Specified scaling upper lower limit Measurement channels to which no linear scaling is applied Upper lower limit of the measuring range Computation channels Specified LEFT RIGHT value IM DR232 01E 12 3 IPPON LIN ejqerreAv uoneinduio Bunnoox3 12 2 Setting a Computation Equation Relevant Keys Operating Procedure Main menu SET MATH Select set ENTER 01 01 Select Channel No 4 A01 01 MODE ON gt Select Channel No i A01 30 MODE ON OFF ON 4 CALC 001 002 04 23456789 CGMA NE CALCz001 2002 HOMINES CALCz001 002 0123456789 4 LEFT 3000 000Kg Span limit 9999 999 9999 999Kg RIGHT 3000 000Kg Span limit 9999 999 9999 999Kg 4 SET OK End of setting Press the SET key to enter the SET menu using the ZS keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ESC Cr o C RECORD ESG SET MATH rm GO C gt Select Setting Parameter CHART SYSTEM UNIT MATH CONST TREND TIMER LOG
331. ower ON Make sure depression of the DISP key is maintained for approximately another five seconds Select set using the O keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept Main menu SETUP Es FLOPPY ENTER FLOPPY SAVE ENTER SAVE LOAD DELETE INFO FORMAT 4 SAVE file ENTER AAA BBB CCC 4 SAVE FILE AAA ENTER 4 Saving Explanation J SAVE OK End of saving ESC Set up data except for date time is saved to the internal RAM disk or a floppy disk Set up data for the SETUP mode can be saved to a floppy disk only Data is always saved in ASCII format The file name must consist of up to 8 characters The following identifier is used Set up data file for SET mode PNL Set up data file for SETUP mode SET Data size Set up data for the SET mode Up to approximately 250 KB 300 measurement channels and 60 computation channels are available for set up data for the SET mode Set up data for SET OR mode Approx 50 KB max for 300 measurement channels and 60 computation channels Note Saving will be displayed during saving During this period key board operations are not possible No saving is allowed during computing The communication function remains disabled during saving IM DR232 01E 11 11 ejeg dn jes pue poinseay
332. pe GO Cree INS DEL gt Select Setting Parameter CHART PRN ADJ SCAN INTV RECORD MATH FLOPPY CA cuart ser enter Operating Procedure Carry out the following steps to enter the SET UP menu 1 If the SET UP menu is not currently displayed turn the power OFF 2 While holding the DISP key turn the power ON Make sure depression of the DISP key is maintained for approximately another five seconds Select set using the O amp 2 keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept Main menu SETUP c FLOPPY ENTER FLOPPY LOAD ENTER SAVE LOAD DELETE INFO FORMAT 4 LOAD FILE AAA ENTER AAA BBB CCC 4 Loading 4 Main menu 4 STORE for confirmation IM DR232 01E 11 13 dn jeg pue pajndwog poinseayy 11 4 Reading Set up Data Explanation Set up data for the SET mode or SETUP mode is read from the internal RAM disk or a floppy disk Loading methods LOAD MODE in SET mode The following two methods are available DIRECT Setup data is loaded immediately after setting has been completed TRIGGER 1 TRIGGER 2 TRIGGER 3 The event action function is used to load set up data when an event takes place This function is useful if you want to record d
333. plug by covering it with tape For extension cables of longer than 50 m connect the plug with copper foil directed towards the main unit DA100 Applying it in reverse direction might increase noise Fasten the cabels in such a way that no force is applied to the connector or the plug To prevent the wire from snapping etc do no apply a tensile force of more than 70N Furthermore do not bend the cable in a radius of 3 centimeters or less For the environmental conditions for wiring refer to Section 3 11 Countering Noise page 3 35 When several sub units are connected and the power is turned off of one of them the other connected sub units which are further away from the main unit will not be recognized anymore IM DR232 01E 3 19 pue uoneyyeisu 3 7 Connecting the Signal Lines A To prevent electric shock always make sure that the power supply is turned OFF before connecting When 30VAC or 60VDC and more is applied to the output terminal of the alarm module or the output terminal of the DI DO module use double insulated wires withstand voltage performance more than 2300VAC for those wires which apply 30VAC or 60VDC and more All other wires can be basic insulated withstand voltage performance more than 1350VAC Furthermore use crimp on lugs for 4mm screws with insulation sleeves for connecting to the screw terminal Make sure that the crimp on tool must be one specified
334. power cord of the AC adapter Only use the AC adapter from YOKOGAWA Model No DV500 00x Do not put objects on top of the AC adapter or the power cord Also do not let heat generating objects come in contact with them When unplugging the power cord do not pull on the power cord Always hold the plug If the power cord becomes damaged contact your nearest representative listed on the back cover of this manual Pru G l P s 2 109 2 s 1 Connecting Procedure 1 Check that the power switch is turned OFF 2 Connect the AC adapter to the AC adapter jack on DS400 DS600 3 Connect the power cord plug that came with the AC adapter to the power supply connector of the AC adapter 4 Connect the plug on the other end of the power cord to a power outlet meeting the following specifications The power outlet should be a three pole type with a protective grounding terminal Rated power supply voltage 100 to 240 VAC Permissible supply voltage range 90 to 250 VAC Rated supply voltage frequency 50 60 Hz Maximum power consumption 90 VA AC adapter rated output voltage 12 VDC AC adapter maximum rated output current 2 6 A DS400 DS600 DC power supply model DC power terminal connector Power connector for AC power supp 2 AC adapter Power cord for AC power supply Functional grounding When using the AC adapter noise may be reduced if
335. ppy disk may result Before removing the floppy disk always make sure that the access indicator is OFF General Precautions Regarding Handling of Floppy Disk For general precautions regarding handling of floppy disks refer to the instruction manual provided with the disk IM DR232 01E uejs S 2 1 Display Functions The inter active front panel display consists of three rows The first row is the main display and the second and third row are sub display 1 and 2 respectively Monitor Mode and Status Display Monitor Mode Auto Mode This mode can be set for the main display sub display 1 and sub display 2 Measurement values of all channels will be consecutively displayed with update interval e Manual Mode This mode can be set for the main display sub display 1 and sub display 2 Measurement values of a single channel will be displayed The display update interval is the same as the measurement interval refer to page 2 4 e Manual Mode This mode can be set for the main display When choosing this display the measurement values of 5 consecutive channels will be displayed as a page using also sub display 1 and 2 The display update interval is the same as the measurement interval refer to page 2 4 Alarm Search Mode This mode can be set for the main display sub display 1 and sub display 2 Channels at which an alarm occurred will be searched for and their measurement values displayed The displ
336. prox 25 VA DC power supply Fuse Ratings Main unit Maximum rated voltage current 250 V 2 5 A Type Time lag Standard IEC VDE Subunit The fuse may not be replaced by the customer AC power supply Maximum rated voltage current 250 V 2 A Type Time lag Standard IEC VDE DC power supply Maximum rated voltage current 250 V 6 3 A Type Time lag Standard UL CSA Normal Operating Conditions Supply voltage AC power supply 90 to 250 VAC DC power supply 10 to 32 VDC only for the subunit DS400 DS600 of a DC power supply model Supply frequency 50Hz 2 60Hz 2 Ambient temperature Main unit 0 to 50 C DS400 DS600 Subunit when floor mounted 0 to 50 C when panel mounted 10 to 60 C However if the subunit DS400 DS600 is a DC power supply model it can be used in the range from 0 C to 50 C regardless of the mounting method Ambient humidity 20 to 80 RH for 10 to 40 C 10 to 50 RH for 40 to 50 C 5 to 30 RH for 50 to 60 C no condensation Vibration 10 to 60 Hz 0 2m s Shock Not allowed Magnetic field 400 A m max 50 60Hz Position Unit should be positioned left right horizontally Installation location Room Installation height Altitude up to 2 000 m Hit oh category based on IEC 1010 1 II Pollution degree based on IEC 1010 1 2 2 Warm up time At least 30 minutes after power switch on Installation category is the specification of the inpuls withstanding voltage whi
337. put module show the calibrated values in the order 20 mA ZERO and 20 mA SPAN For a strain input module show the calibrated values in the following order 2k ZERO 2k SPAN 20k ZERO 20k SPAN 200k ZERO and 200k SPAN For a digital input module show the calibrated value in the following order 60mV ZERO 60mV SPAN 6V ZERO 6V SPAN When the DC V TC DI input module is selected the displayed values for RTD in the universal input module can be modified without influencing operation of the recorder The calibrated values appear in the above order each time the ENTER key is pressed If the MODE key is pressed while displaying calibrated values the display returns to A D calibration mode selection and the calibrated value already adjusted before pressing the MODE key is canceled Calibrated values are effective immediately after terminating the DISPLAY mode Adjustable range and error display Adjustable ranges are 32768 to 32767 excepting 16384 16384 16385 and 16383 If the following numeric values are set errors appear Outside the range from 32768 to 32767 002 16384 or 16384 145 16385 or 16383 144 Note n the adjustable ranges if the following are not satisfied the adjusted module is recognized as an error module Calibrated value ZERO 3277 to 3277 ideal value 0 Calibrated value SPAN 29491 to 29491 ideal value 32768 19000 to 21000 for strain input modul
338. r enter 1 Press the SET key for three seconds to enter the SET3 menu 2 Select set using the GS keys 3 To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept 4 New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Main menu SET __ Lower menu ALARM PR ENTER 001 01 1 ALARM PR ON2 D gt Select Channel No i 001 01 1 ALARM PR ON2 gt Select Channel No i 001 01 1 ALARM PR ON2 1234 H 001 01 1 ALARM PR ON2 ENTER OFF ON1 ON2 In case 4 OFF MSG ON ALARM OFF ENTER OFF 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 18 14 15 16 1718 19 20 4 GET OK ESC 6 1 0 IM DR232 01E 6 5 Setting the Alarm Printout Explanation Selecting the Alarm Items Although up to four alarm headings can be set per channel this setting specifies the number of the heading which will be printed The default setting is 1 If the instrument is equipped with the optional computation function or floppy disk drive this setting can also be made for computation channels A01 to A60 For details on alarm settings see 8 1 Setting Alarms and Relays including internal switches on page 8 1 Selecting the Alarm Printout ALARM PR This setting can be selected from the following The default setting is ON2 OFF Alarm printout will not be ca
339. r for 12 5 Var 25 Var and 37 5 Var spans 2 5 of SPAN 60 lt 191 lt 80 0 1 Var for 125 Var 250 Var and 375 Var spans Var for 1 250 Var 2 500 Var and 3 750 Var spans Frequency 0 1Hz 0 01Hz Power factor 2 of SPAN 0 lt 1 91 lt 80 0 01 Phase angle 5deg 0 lt 1 1 lt 80 0 1deg Measuring Ranges Measured Data Item 25 V 0 5A 25 250 V 0 5 A 250 V 5 A Effective voltage 0 00 to 25 00 V rms 0 00 to 25 00 V rms 0 0 to 250 0 V rms 0 0 to 250 0 V rms 1 2 3 13 0 Effective current 0 0000 to 0 50000A rms 0 000 to 5 000 A rms 0 0000 to 0 5000 A rms 0 000 to 5 000 A rms li i 1 2 3 13 0 Active power 12 50 to 12 50 W 125 0 to 125 0 W 125 0 to 125 0 W 1250 to 1250 W P2 P3 Active power 25 00 to 25 00 W 250 0 to 250 0 W 250 0 to 250 0 W 2500 to 2500 W P13 Active power 37 50 to 37 50 W 375 0 to 375 0 W 375 0 to 375 0W 3750 to 3750 W PO Apparent power 0 00 to 12 50 0 0to0 125 0 0 0 125 0 VA 0to 1250 VA VAI VA2 VA3 Apparent power 0 00 to 25 00 VA 0 0 2500 VA 0 0t0250 0 0to2500 VA VAI3 Apparent power 0 00 to 37 50 0 0t0375 0 0 0t0375 0 VA 0to3750 VA VAO Reactive power 0 00 to 12 50 Var 0 0to 125 0 Var 0 0 to 125 0 Var 0 to 1250 Var Varl Var2 Var3 Reactive power 0 00 to 25 00 Var 0 0 to 250 0 Var 0 0 to 250 0 Var 2500 Var Var13 Reactive power 0 00 to 37 50 Var 0 0 to 375 0 Var 0 0 to 375 0 Var 0to 3750 V
340. r menu SCALE PR ENTER 001 01 SCALE PR ON2 gt 4 001 01 SCALE PR ON2 D Cy O gt Select Channel No 4 001 01 SCALE PR ON2 ENTER OFF ON1 ON2 ON3 4 GET OK ESC LIST PR ENTER gt 001 01 LIST PR ON 00 gt Select Channel No 4 001 01 LIST PREON D ON ONBOO INMEIEENENNENENE HEB gt Select Channel No 4 001 01 LIST PR ON ENTER ONBOO INMEIEEENENNENNE HEB OFF ON 4 GET OK ESC n LIST FMT ENTER LIST RANGE ON ENTER OFF ON 4 LIST ALARM ON ENTER OFF ON 4 LIST PRINT ON ENTER OFF ON 4 LIST OTHER ON ENTER OFF ON 4 GET OK ESC IM DR232 01E 6 6 Setting Scale Printout List Printout and List Format Explanation Scale Printout SCALE PR This setting can be assigned to each channel individually The scaled values will be printed out with trend recordings This printout will not occur when a zone of 49mm or less is set The scaled values of the following channels will be printed For example when the recording zone of ch 1 is set to 49mm and of ch 2 is 150mm the scaled values of ch 2 will be printed at the position of ch 1 The default setting is ON2 If the instrument is equipped with the optional computation function or floppy disk drive this setting can also be made for computation channels 01 to A60 When Partial Expanded Recording is OFF OFF Scaled values will not be printed ONI when the recor
341. r of the internal switch which corresponds to the first batch of the display and range from 01 to 51 There are 60 internal switches S01 Internal switch 10 Relay status of internal switch 3 Relay status of internal switch 2 Relay status of internal switch 1 of internal switch no 0 to 5 Jnternal switch S switch 12 Internal switch 11 Internal switch 21 Internal switch 20 KNEE Internal switch 30 Internal switch no in units of 1 fixed to 1 Relation between the Relay Status and Alarm Output Relay If the relay status of the alarm output relays is being displayed a unit number will be displayed in the first character position The slot number in the second character position represents the number of slot in which the alarm module or the DI DO module is mounted The alarm output relay is different in relay status display whether it is in the alarm module or in the DI DO module as shown below f an alarm module is mounted ten or B indicators are displayed Ifthe DI DO module is mounted ten or indicators are displayed but the right 8 indicators of ten are not used because two alarm output relays are used Example for mounting the alarm module and the DI DO
342. r relay is operating the action is executed When the alarm module or the DI DO modules are not recognized as system modules see page 9 16 the relay is set to OFF See Section 8 1 Setting Alarms and Relays including internal switches on page 8 1 for setting internal switches and relays CHART END When the end of the chart is detected the action is executed TIMER f the selected timer s set time is up the action is executed Six timers are available Select any from among these timers See Section 6 1 Setting the Recording Mode Engineering Unit Recording Channels Recording Interval on page 6 3 for the timer setting provided earlier in this manual n combination with the level action the action is repeated alternately between executing and stopping each time the timer s set time is up MFUNC KEY When the M FUNC key on the operation panel is pressed the action is executed Select either M FUNC 1 or M FUNC 2 n combination with the level action the action is repeated alternately between executing and stopping each time the M FUNC key is pressed MATCH TIME When the set time is reached the action is executed There are three types of applicable MATCH TIMES Select of them For details see Section 6 8 Setting Match Time Moving Average Interpolation and Groups on page 6 17 provided earlier in this manual n combination with the level action the corresponding action is repeated alterna
343. r selected again as long as the calibration END mode is not executed Calibration mode CAL EXEC mode This mode enables specified ranges to be calibrated DISPLAY mode This mode enables current calibrated values to be displayed END mode This mode enables calibrated values to be stored in the internal nonvolatile memory and terminates the calibration mode If ABORT is selected the calibrated values are not stored in memory Subunit module selection error The following error messages are displayed The specified subunit remains disconnected Or the power supply is not turned on The specified module remains disconnected ERROR141 The specified module is such that it cannot be calibrated ERROR143 Calibrated data error The following error messages are displayed Attempted to remove the module during calibration Or hardware error ERROR145 Invalid calibrated data ERROR144 Attempted to set invalid numeric values in the DISPLAY mode ERROR145 Note When a calibrated data error appears the error data are stored in memory 13 6 IM DR232 01E 13 5 Calibration Required Equipment Name Measurement Accuracy Recommended Range DC Voltage Generator to 50V 0 005 of setting 14V Yokogawa 9000 4808 DMM OV to 50V 0 005 of setting 14V HP3458A Decade Resistance Box 0 1010 10000 0 01 Yokogawa 2793 DC Current Generator 0 to 20mA 0 05 of setting Yokogawa 7651 For OV input it i
344. registering operation is necessary In contrast the status can also be brought to that before setting selection abort without registration Terminate the SET UP menu after registering or aborting operation ABORT Registration is aborted and the SET UP menu is terminated STORE After registration the SET UP menu is terminated The default setting is ABORT Select the END menu then press the ENTER key The operation display mode is reached about 10 seconds after pressing the ENTER key 10 24 IM DR232 01E 10 11 Selecting the temperature unit from C or F option ER SETUP TEMP ic rure CJD Select Setting Parameter CHART LOCK FUNC_PARM SET PARM DISPLAY TEMP QD ee cuart ser LewrER Operating Procedure Enter the SET UP menu in the following procedure 1 When the display presents the operation display mode or a menu other than the SET UP menu first turn off the power switch 2 Turn the switch back on while pressing the DISP key and continue pressing the DISP key for about 5 seconds Select set using the amp 2 keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key The main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be saved when you reach the final display of that setting Main menu
345. rement value EMI Recording span i i bB lt 5 567 md i 27 i i E 9 N i M TA c 1 Recordin i lt span g gt vi i gt of full recording 0 50 100 of compression RATE span After compressing 25 of recording span 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 V 1 1 h ____ Measurement value ds Bounda value Recording span an i i 2 2 4 7 5 Sli e IN x 4 i M D 9 lt d Recording span Y i i gt 96 of full recording 0 25 100 96 of compression RATE span Interpolation Function When carrying out trend recording and a measurement value differs greatly from the previous one the track of the recording changes stepwise in the dot printing In cases like this interpolation will be carried out on the horizontal line to connect the two divergent trend tracks When the horizontal lines of channels are to be recorded on exactly the same location only the recording color with the higher priority will be used The priority of recording colors is black gt purple gt redish purple gt navy blue gt red gt blue gt brown gt green gt orange gt yellowish green which means that black has the highest priority In the figure below a recording example is given of a horizontal line in the colors bl
346. resentative Contct your nearest sales representative 9 CARRIAGE CANNOT Printer error Contct your nearest sales Qa 9 representative SYSTEM ERROR System error number Check whether each unit or D o number power code is connected properly after turning off the 20 S power switch If the same sa error occurs again even though 8 you turn on the power switch contact your nearest sales representative RESET ERROR An error occurs between the main unit Same as abeve and communication module IM DR232 01E 13 5 13 5 Calibration Overview We recommend that you calibrate the DR232 at least once a year to assure its measurement accuracy When calibrating please contact your nearest Sales representative at its address on the back cover of this manual Press and hold the MODE key and then turn on the power switch to place the recorder in the calibration mode Select the subunit and module to calibrate the recorder on a module basis After completing the calibration turn off the power and then turn it back on when resuming the measurements CAUTION You can use the DISPLAY mode only for a calibration adjustment If it is maladjusted the recorder may become faulty For details please contact your nearest Sales representative Calibration needs selection of asubunit and module and the calibration mode Once the subunit and module have been selected they are no longe
347. rried out ONI Alarms will only be printed out on occurrence The alarm occurrence mark channel No or tag type of alarm alarm heading or time of occurrence will be printed with trend recordings ON2 Alarms will both be printed out on occurrence and release The alarm occurrence release mark channel No or tag type of alarm alarm heading or time of occurrence release will be printed with trend recordings Alarm Printout Buffer Analog Trend Mode Up to 30 alarm occurrences releases can be stored in memory nformation on more than 30 alarm occurrences releases will be discarded After one alarm printout 29 alarm occurrences releases are stored and another alarm occurrence release can then be stored f 31 alarm occurrences releases exceeding the allowed number of 30 are entered an asterisk will be printed at the top of the alarm message when 30 alarm printouts are executed The alarm buffer clear function is available for canceling the stored alarm printout information see page 9 17 Logging Mode Up to 10 alarm occurrences releases can be stored in memory nformation on more than 10 alarm occurrences releases will be discarded f 11 alarm occurrences releases exceeding the allowed number of 10 are entered an asterisk will be printed at the top of the alarm message when 10 alarm printouts are executed The alarm buffer clear function is available for canceling the stored alarm printout information
348. s faulty data as Excluded from measurement set to SKIP computing the result of computing computing No channel included Excluded from Excluded from computing Takes faulty data as Excluded from in measurement computing the result of computing computing Error Excluded from Excluded from computing Takes faulty data as Excluded from computing the result of computing computing Output of data disabled Excluded from Excluded from computing Takes faulty data as Excluded from computing the result of computing computing The DR recorder prints the results of computing as shown in the following table if they are special data Type of Data Printout Format Positive overflow Negative overflow Channels included in measurement set to SKIP Space No channel included in measurement Space Error Output of data disabled If data being computed contain faulty data the DR recorder prints each digital data item beginning with an or x as the status indication 1 Power failure x In the case of a power failure the DR recorder prints the time for report making also beginning with an x 2 Channels included in measurement set to SKIP no channel included in measurement error output of disabled data x IM DR232 01E 10 33 145 sbumes oiseg 10 12 Working with the Report Function 3 Positive overflow negative overflow If more than one faulty data item occurs at th
349. s necessary to either short the input terminals or to monitor the output voltage using the DMM Calibrating Conditions Ambient temperature 23 C42 C Ambient humidity 55 10 RH AC power supply voltage 100 to 240 VAC AC power supply model DC power supply voltage 12 to 28 VDC the subunit of DC power supply model omly Power supply frequency 50 60 Hz 1 Warm up time at least 30 minutes for this recorder and necessary warm up time for the used equipment Connection terminal screw connections DC Voltage Measurement Apply a rated voltage in the voltage range that is to be calibrated to channel 3 Input terminal DC Voltage Generator Short circuit between and terminals in channel 2 5 CH2 Input terminal Temperature Measurement Using RTD apply the 100Q resistance to channel 5 000000 Input terminal Decade Resistance Box Short circuit the resistance input terminals A B and b in channel 4 b B A Input terminal IM DR232 01E 13 7 eoueuejure y pue 13 5 Calibration DC Current Measurement Apply the 20mA to channel 3 WI Input terminal
350. s of the chart pressure plate 2 Chart pressure plate 2 Latch release button of chart pressure plate 2 IM DR232 01E 3 9 pue 3 4 Installing the Chart and Ribbon Cassette Loading the Chart Paper 5 Place the chart paper in the chart storage housing and move the paper to the left Position the chart so that its round perforations are on the left and the recording surface faces upward when the chart paper is wound around the platen Platen Chart pressure plate 2 Chart storage housing Sprocket gt Right and left position mark Guide pin 7 Align the right and left chart paper perforations Set the chart paper so that the right and left marks of the sprockets and the fold line are aligned 8 Close the chart pressure plate 1 until it latches Confirm that the horizontal lines of the chart paper are parallel with the horizontal line of the chart pressure plate 1 If they are not parallel open the chart pressure plate 1 and align the right and left perforations again 9 Close the chart pressure plate 2 until it latches 10 Fitting the guide pin of the chart cassette in the main unit guide groove place the chart cassette on the bottom of the main unit and slide the cassette deep inside the main unit until the latch engages 11 Turn on the power of the main unit and feed the chart paper by pressing the FEED key on the operation panel Feed the chart paper by three folds or more
351. seconds Select set using the keys If exiting the following lower menu setting halfway press the MODE ESC key The display returns to the main menu to which the lower menu belongs However newly set or selected contents are canceled When setting proceeds to the display for the setting end the newly set or selected contents are established O C Lower menu 4 FUNC PARM ENTER PANEL ALARM ACK ENTER 4 ALARM ACK FUNC ENTER FUNC PARM SET ESC CO A FUNCFUNC3 OFF PANEL ALARM RESET ENTER 4 ALARM RESET FUNC ENTER C2 FUNC FUNC3 OFF m PANEL TIMER RESET ENTER 4 TIMER RESET FUNC ENTER FUNC FUNC3 OFF PANEL MATH START ENTER 4 MATH START FUNC ENTER OY FUNC FUNC3 OFF m PANEL MATH_CLR_START ENTER 4 MATH CLR START FUNC ENTER CA FUNC FUNC3 OFF m PANEL MATH STOP ENTER 4 MATH STOP FUNC ENTER FUNC FUNC3 OFF m PANEL MATH ACK ENTER C O MATH ACK FUNC ENTER FUNC FUNC3 OFF From the following page To next page IM DR232 01E 10 17 145 sbumes oiseg 10 8 Setting FUNC FUNC3 Menu From prevlous page A PANEL REPORT_START REPORT START FUNC FUNC FUNC3 OFF PANEL REPORT_START REPORT STARTZFUNC FUNC FUNC3 OFF PANEL REP_RECALL_START REP RECALL START FUNC FUNC FUNC3 OFF PANEL REP_PRINT_STOP REP PRINT STOP F
352. set communication parameters Ethernet module DT300 41 Status indicator Switch to set mode 10BASE T port Extender Module Extender Base Extender Module DV100 011 Extension cable connector Inatallation Slot number setup switch holes Screw holes for module installation Power indicator Terminator on off switch Module connector Lid covering the extension a Holes for fastening the feet lt gt 1 10 IM DR232 01E ON OFF switch of built in terminating resistor LED 1 4 Floppy Disk A floppy disk drive is provided with the DR232 1 and DR242 1 Applicable Floppy Disks 3 5 inch floppy disks can be used for this instrument They can also be formatted on this instrument 2HD type 1 2 MB or 1 44 MB MS DOS format 2DD type 720 MB MS DOS format Inserting a Floppy Disk into the Drive Insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive shutter side first and with the label face up Make sure that the floppy disk is inserted until the eject button pops up Removing the Floppy Disk from the Drive Make sure that the access indicator is not lit then push the eject button to remove the floppy disk access indicator eject button CAUTION If the floppy disk is removed when the access indicator is still lit damage to the magnetic head of the floppy disk drive or to data saved on the flo
353. settings are initialized In addition if the DR recorder is not a model with the optional MATH function M1 option groups to which computation channels were assigned by the group setting and logic boxes to which actions of the MATH function were assigned by the logic setting are initialized ON State of contact OFF ON Time 0 Integration interval You can select whether to treat a result of the computational expression TLOG PSUM exceeding 99999999 as an overflow or to continue computing with the value following 99999999 reset to 0 For details on how to make the selection see Section 12 5 Setting Action to Be Carried Out in Case of Computation Error and Setting the Time Axis for TLOG SUM The result of computing in this context is that resulting from a separate calculation of TLOG PSUM XXXX If you set the computational expression as TLOG PSUM XXXX 100 the above action does not take place even if the result of the calculation TLOG PSUM XXXX 100 exceeds 99999999 f you have made such selection as to continue computing even if the result exceeds 99999999 the value subsequent to 99999999 is reset to 0 If the next measured value is 4 after the result of computing has proved to be 99999999 that value is not reset to 0 but is counted in sequence from 0 to 3 giving 3 as the result 12 6 IM DR232 01E 12 3 Setting a Constant Relevant Keys SET CONST RECORD ALARM
354. side for each line as shown below When printing in logging mode or manual printing Printing direction Channel no TAG selection Temporary stop in seconds Horizontal Channel 4 TAG of 7 to 8 characters TAG of 9 to 16 characters 3 5 Vertical Channel 2 TAG of 7 to 16 characters 3 List printing Temporary stop For 0 5 secondsList printing IM DR232 01E Dunnooex3 7 2 Starting Manual Printing List Printing and Header Printing Relevant Keys ESC MAN PR START zm me GD Ge INS gt Enter amp Print Start Stop CHART MAN PR START LIST START HEADER START wy ser Enter 2 Operating Procedure Press the PRINT key to enter the print menu Explanation MAN PR START ENTER To display the print menu from the RANGE ALARM or CHART SET SET3 menu press the DISP key LIST START ENTER HEADER START ENTER Starting the manual print MAN PR START Press the ENTER key to start manual printing After printing starts the operation display mode appears During manual printing the menu displays MAN PR STOP During manual printing enter the PRINT menu again and select MAN PR STOP Then press the ENTER key to stop the manual printing After manual printing terminates or stops the displa
355. sing the polarity insert a fuse rating shown below in the wiring This will lower the chances of blowing the internal fuse Fuse 250 V T2 5 A to T4A time lag 20 mm glass tube fuse Pt 12 5 to 32 Recommended A1350EF 250 V T2 5 A l t212 5 SCHURTER FST0034 3121 Connecting procedure 1 Check thst the power switch is turned off 2 Connect the accessory DC power terminal connector part No A1105JC to the power wire and the DS400 DS600 Use a power wire with a cross sectional area of 0 3 mn 22AWG or more Soldering gt DS400 DS600 Rated supply voltage 12 to 28 V DC Operating supply voltage 10 to 32 V DC 0 V DC 10 to 32 V DC Power consumption About 25 VA max DS400 DS600 DC power supply model DC power terminal 3 31 pue uoneyyeisu 3 9 Connecting the Power Cord and Turning the Power ON OFF AN DS400 DS600 when using optional AC adapter This applies only to products with power supply 2 suffix code Follow the warnings below to avoid electric shock or damaging the instrument Connect the power wires after checking that the power supply is turned off to prevent electric shock To prevent electric shock or fire always use the power cable supplied by YOKOGAWA Before connecting the power cord check that the voltage on the supply side matches with the voltage rating of this recorder When not using the instrument for a long time unplug the
356. ss filter is turned off Cutoff frequency 50 60 Hz 10 Hz Shortest measurement interval 0 5 s 4s When the lowpass filter is turned on Cutoff frequency 50 60 Hz 10 Hz Shortest measurement interval 265 12s Normal Operating Temperature Humidity Range 10 to 60 C 20 to 80 RH for an ambient temperature range of 10 to 50 C 10 to 50 RH for 40 to 50 C 5 to 30 RH for 50 to 60 C non condensing Maximum Input Voltage 5 VDC Maximum Normal mode Noise Current 24 mA peak value including 50 and 60 Hz signal components Equivalent voltage of 2 4 V Normal Mode Rejection Ratio Equivalent Voltage 40 dB minimum 50 60 Hz 0 1 Maximum Common Mode Noise Voltage 250 V ACrms 50 60 Hz Common Mode Rejection Ratio Equivalent Voltage 120 dB minimum 50 60 Hz 0 1 Maximum Noise Across Channels 150 V ACrms 50 60 Hz Measuring Range Accuracy As described below under the following operating conditions Ambient temperature 23 2 C ambient humidity 55 10 RH power supply voltage 90 to 250 VAC AC power supply 10 to 32 VDC the subunit of a DC power supply model only power supply frequency 50 60Hz within 1 AC power supply warm up time 30 minutes or more vibrations and others not affecting instrument operation Measuring Range Measuring Accuracy Maximum Resolution 20 000 to 20 000 mA 0 25 of rdg 5 digits 1 uA 14 14 IM DR232 01E 14 3 Specifications of mA input Module Filter
357. ssette is properly loaded in the carriage f a ribbon cassette is used for a long time the ribbon may become wavy and move out of the dot printing range of the printer head If this happens replace the ribbon with a new one IM DR232 01E 3 13 pue uoneyyeisu 3 5 Connecting the Interface Cables GP IB When connecting a personal computer to the instrument via a communication interface observe the following The GP IB connector of the GP IB communication module is a 24 pin connector of IEEE St d 488 1978 Only use cables that conform to IEEE St d 488 1978 as a communication cable Connection Procedure Connect the cable as shown in the figure below Personal computer Ferrite core pomme Function grounding terminal t When connecting the cable take note of the following To reduce noise use two ferrite cores e g ZCAT 3035 1330 from TDK at both ends of the interface cable as shown above Securely tighten the screws which fasten the GP IB cable connector f more than one equipment is connected the same addresses cannot be assigned to different equipment Use only cables of 2 m or less to interconnect each equipment How to Assign an Address The address can be assigned easily by turning the rotary dipswitch as shown in the figure below Any address can be set from 0 to 157 the characters
358. t H do so after calibrating the voltages to maintain accuracy When a calibrated data error appears the error data are stored in memory If ERROR145 appears turn off the power and then back on to restart operation If the same error occurs again the recorder may be defective If ERROR144 appears check the electrical connections and input data If the same error occurs again the module to be calibrated may be defective When calibrating a strain input module first calibrate zero ZERO and then the span SPAN IM DR232 01E 13 11 eoueuejure y pue 13 5 Calibration DISPLAY mode to display and adjust the calibrated value Use this mode only for checking the calibrated value In this mode you can adjust the calibrated value but if it is invalid the instrument may be inoperative For details contact your nearest Sales representative Calibrated value display items Calibrated value display items vary depending on the type of module to be calibrated For use with universal input modules display calibrated value display items in the following order 20 mV ZERO 20 mV SPAN 60 mV ZERO 60 mV SPAN 200 mV ZERO gt 200 mV SPAN 52 V ZERO gt 2 V SPAN gt 6 V ZERO gt 6 V SPAN gt 20 V ZERO gt 20 V SPAN gt 50 V ZERO gt 50 V SPAN 9 Pt 1 mA ZERO 9 Pt 1 mA SPAN Pt 2 mA ZERO Pt 2 mA SPAN Pt 1 mA H SPAN 9 Pt 2 mA H SPAN gt Cu 2 mA ZERO gt Cu 2 mA SPAN For a mA in
359. t Recording Channel and Recording Interval on page 6 1 for more information on how to assign the unit IM DR232 01E 6 1 Setting the Recording Mode Engineering Unit Recording Channel and Recording Interval Relevant Keys SET SYSTEM gt Select Setting Parameter SYSTEM UNIT TREND TIMER LOGIC COPY Operating Procedure Main menu SET L__ SYSTEM UNIT TREND 2 Select set using the CS keys 3 To escape from a lower menu press the Cue CoE aree 1 Press the SET key to enter the SET menu MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept 4 New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Lower menu ENTER SYSTEM LOGGING ENTER 1 SET OK ESC gt SETO L sYSTEM TREND ENTER 4 TREND FIX ENTER FIX AUTO 4 GET OK ESC Delete two lines of description in Japanese in this position ENTER gt 001 01 0 gt Select Channel No 4 001 01 UNIT gt Select Channel No V 001 01 UNIT 0 ENTER 1968 4 0123 89 ABC KLT 4 ESC ENTER 001 01 TREND ON gt 001 EERE EH Select Channel
360. t least three time the operating voltage Note Across the relay or solenoid coil a counter electromotive force is produced by an inductive load This phenomenon may damage the contact or as the noise source cause a malfunctioning of the equipment and have an unfavorable effect on the entire system AC relay Surge suppresser circuit If a relay contact is connectd to the input connect to the dm of the system components apply the relay socket measure shown in the figure at the right terminal directly to the relay coil Otherwise a counter 4 C 0 01 to 1uF electromotive force produced across the EN st with Mos d a voltage coil may be induced on the contact side of at least three times through the relay s internal coupling or P the operating voltage coupling between the lines and may R 0 3Re to 1Re cause a malfunctioning of the equipment Re Relay coil s DC resistance Others isolation from noise source for hot line measurement At low temperatures Mylar isolation film Hot line Power transistor Vcc 4 D en Adhesion At high temperatures Anti Noise Measures for PC Connection When connecting the instrument to a PC it is recommended to apply ferrite cores e g ZCAT3035 1303 from TDK to the interface cable as a noise countering measure Apply a ferrite core on both sides of the cable as shown below when the noise persists apply more ferrite
361. t printing 2 5 to 2 7 6 9 7 1 10 5 10 6 number of columns for sees 2 7 10 5 Display een See also Functions 1 2 1 3 4 2 4 3 vete tec a eee 4 2 4 3 hold 2 15 10 8 information 2 15 8 14 Alarm Search i ede OE FD REO TRE 2 1 4 7 4 8 Adlarm Status 2n aee eee ey 2 1 4 10 AUTO M 2 1 4 1 to 4 3 Chatel s soc YE E E EY RON OO RON Re 4 2 4 3 Su e heats 2 1 4 13 Gonditi n RARE RENI ERE ERR 2 1 difference between channels 2 4 2 5 3 IET 1 2 1 3 2 1 4 1 to 4 3 P ge PAGE i uana niii ne eii HER rete Ren 2 1 4 6 remote local control status essere 2 1 Relay status DISP key gt Chapter 4 7 2 7 3 9 14 9 16 Chapter 10 11 11 11 13 12 12 Display mode etie eere aee edite re See mode Display update interval sniene ianya See interval Dot printing shift centre ene reete sa 10 2 Dot printing recording system See also dot recording 10 4 Dot recording eem tere 2 5 2 6 2 9 6 2 method Of oriri ar repeat aeq 2 9 10 4 See Recording E Engineering unit display e pte eei Printout Of e Enhanced data logging software ACtiOn Event event action funct
362. t in RAM disk RD TRIG Reads measured computed data from the built in RAM disk LD TRGI 3 Reads setup data from the built in RAM disk FLOPY available only with the DR231 1 or DR241 1 equipped with a floppy disk drive LD TRGI 3 Reads setup data from the floppy disk FLAG only for M1 optional model e F01 to 16 Set the flag number F01 to F16 to 1 F01 to F16 are normally 0 Flags can be placed in computing equations to hold the computed result using a certain event as a trigger or reset to 0 REPORT available if the instrument is equiped with the REPORT function START Edge action Starts making up a report STOP Edge action Stops making up a report REPORT Level action Starts stops making up a report Note If in the SETUP mode the report function is set to OFF for all data items you cannot select the action item REPORT IM DR232 01E 9 11 suonoung pue 4 uonoyue 3 9 2 Copying Relevant Keys OS Ca ESC SET2CO PY Func gt Fee INS DEL Select Setting Parameter SYSTEM UNIT TREND TIMER LOGIC COPY Q ser EnreR w ruwc 2 Operating Procedure Press the SET key to enter the SET menu Select set using the O keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although
363. t one hour for the extension base to adjust to the ambient atmosphere before using it Do not install the extension base where it is exposed to direct sunlight or there is a heat source nearby soot steam dust and or corrosive gas is relatively abundant there is a strong electromagnetic source nearby there is high voltage equipment or a power line nearby it is exposed to severe and or frequent mechanical vibration or it is not positioned stably Desk top or Floor Installation Attach the two supplied shoe plates onto the extension base with two screws 4 mm screws 16 mm long supplied as standard accessories as shown in the figure on the left below Then place the extension base in an upright position If the base is liable to fall on its side after wiring fix the shoe plates with the four supplied screws 4 mm screws 12 mm long using the through holes for 4 mm screws of the shoe plates Direct Mounting on Panel According to the figure on the right below fix the extension base onto a panel by fastening the four corners with the supplied screws 4 mm screws 12 mm long IM DR232 01E 3 27 pue uoneyyeisu 3 8 Connecting an Extension Module to Extension Bases Connecting Extension Bases to an Extension Module Verify that the power of the DR DS400 DS600 has been turned off before connecting the extension module extention base Mount the extension modul
364. ta for computation channels If the instrument is equipped with the computation function M1 model read data can be calculated in the same way that measured computed data is calculated Like measurement channels it is possible to make the unit alarm zone partial compression tag linear interpolation dot color and recording settings for computation channels A01 to A60 However only the upper limit and lower limit alarms are available Specify channel Nos A01 to A60 when specifying channel Nos Reading data from a floppy disk To read data which has been copied to a floppy disk from the RAM disk it is necessary to copy the data from the floppy disk to the RAM disk However data in ASCII format cannot be read Status display during reading The following status symbols are displayed in the sub display 2 lowest display section It is not possible to make media settings other than reading stop setting while measured computed data is being read Y Reading is in progress Awaiting a trigger IM DR232 01E ejeg dn j as pue poinseayy 11 3 Saving Set up Data Saving set up data for the SET mode Relevant Keys SET MEMORY RECORD 75 ESC RECORD xx rece CE Feed INS DEL Operating Procedure CSKA MEMORY ENTER MEMORY S
365. tch 2 Turn the switch back on while pressing the DISP key and continue pressing the DISP key for about 5 seconds Select set using the O keys If exiting the following lower menu setting halfway press the MODE ESC key The display returns to the main menu to which the lower menu belongs However newly set or selected contents are canceled established When setting proceeds to the display for the setting end the newly set or selected contents are Lower menu ij RELAY ENTER RELAY SET REFLASH ENTER REFLASH AND ENERG HOLD REFLASH RELAY No 1 OFF 123456 Age REFLASH RELAY No 1 OFF ENTER REFLASH SET ESC OFF 0 REFLASH RELAY 1 001 REFLASH RELAY No 1 001 ENTER RELAY SET AND ENTER AND RELAY S NONE ENTER ao AND RELAY SzNONE ENTER AND RELAY SET iESCI RELAY SET ENERG ENTER RELAY 001 01 ENERG D RELAY 001 01 ENERG ENTER RELAY MODE SET fESC ENERG DE EN RELAY SET HOLD ENTER RELAY HOLD OFF ENTER RELAY HOLD SET ESC OFF ON IM DR232 01E 10 9 dN 135 sbumes oiseg 10 4 Setting Operation Mode of Relay Internal Switch Explanation The following operation mode is set to the alarm output relays and the internal switches There are menus which cannot be displayed unless the alarm modul
366. tely between executing and stopping for each set time Selecting edge or level action Edge action EDGE This action is executed when an event is detected Level action LEVEL This action is executed when an event is detected When an event is released this action will be canceled IM DR232 01E suonoung pue 4 uonoyaue 3 9 1 Setting Event Action Functions Selection of actions An action that can be selected varies depending on the events and edge or level action See the individual procedures The following describe all actions available ALARM ACK This allows alarm acknowledgment For the applicable functions see Section 2 4 Alarm Function on page 2 15 ALARM RST This resets alarms When the RELAY is selected for an event this function cannot be selected For the applicable functions see Section 2 4 Alarm Function on page 2 15 TIMER RST This resets timers For the applicable functions see Section 2 3 Recording Functions on page 2 8 RECORD ON Starts recording The recording format is set individually For details see Section 10 2 Setting Recording Format on page 10 3 OFF Stops recording The level action does not include record ON OFF functions When the level action is set the ON OFF functions using the RECORD key are disabled The edge and level actions cannot be set simultaneously For the level action only one action is available MANUAL
367. tenen 13 Chapter 1 System Configuration 11 About DARWIN 1 2 Product OVERVIEW euenire i P a Ge ea aa Soa 1 2 1 3 Names of Parts cor ae eO VU UO re rM EE eret 1 4 DIS eror EHE ERE 1 11 Chapter 2 Functions 2 1 Display FUNCHONS ERES chewed 2 1 2 22 Measurement Input Functions eee pee de Ele ee 2 3 2 3 Recording Furictions e EIER EUR UR ELM MEGA es 2 5 2 4 Alarm FUNCHON ue Rien aaa eee i Taste re ee ES 2 13 2 5 Standard Computation Functions nt eie getan ce teh gere Hoi 2 16 2 6 Other Functionsz etes nA eh ERUTU eee RAN RHA had oad tete 2 17 Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring 3 1 General Precautions for Installation AER IEEE IERI ERR D REDE 3 1 A 32 Install AN 33 to Connect the Input Output Modules essent 3 7 3 4 Installing the Chart and Ribbon Cassette eese nnne 3 9 3 5 Connecting the Interface Cable Sinisen ERREUR INA RES ROGER EO ERREUR HS 3 6 X Connecting the Extension Cables 7372 Connecting thesSignal Lanes seite tee ite edet d A 3 8 Connecting an Extension Module to Extension Bases sees 3 27 A 3 9 Connecting the Power Cord and Turning the Power ON OFF eerte 3 29 3 10 Setti
368. the functional ground is connected to the earth GND Use the functional ground terminal as necessary 3 32 IM DR232 01E 3 9 Connecting the Power Cord and Turning the Power ON OFF Switching the Power ON OFF DR232 DR242 The power switch is a push button the power is turned on when pressed once and turned off when pressed again Power switch Note Before turning the power on check that each unit is properly mounted and the power cord is correctly connected f nothing appears on the display when the power switch is turned on turn off the power and check the following s the power cord properly connected s the supply voltage within the range noted on the previous page s the power fuse blown see page 13 2 If the problem still cannot be fixed there may be an equipment problem please contact your nearest sales representative Addresses may be found on the back cover of the manual The device takes about 30 minutes to warm up The service life of the lithium battery used to save the settings is about 10 years at an ambient temperature of 23 C If the settings cannot be held because the lithium battery has run down please contact your nearest sales representative Addresses may be found on the back cover of the manual DS400 DS600 When the side of the power switch is pressed the power is turned on and when the O side of the switch is pressed the power is turned off When the power is turned on
369. the specified date and time is reached When the set time is reached the setting will return to its intial value of 50 01 01 00 The value of the years are as follows 00 to 49 stand for the year 2000 to 2049 whereas 50 to 99 stand for the years 1950 to 1999 IM DR232 01E 9 19 suonoung pue 4 10 1 Selecting Adjustment of Dot Printing Position or Scan Interval SETUP PRN ADJ e OD Gz gt Select Setting Parameter eS PRN ADJ SCAN INTVL RECORD ALARM A D INT Keno CO ser enter 2 Operating Procedure Recording Mode SYSTEM Enter the SET UP menu in the following procedure 1 When the display presents the operation display mode or a menu other than the SET UP menu first turn off the power switch 2 Turn the switch back on while pressing the DISP key and continue pressing the DISP key for about 5 seconds Select set using the O amp 2 keys If exiting the following lower menu setting halfway press the MODE ESC key The display returns to the main menu to which the lower menu belongs However newly set or selected contents are canceled When setting proceeds to the display for the setting end the newly set or selected contents are established Main menu SETUP Lower menu PRN ADJ ENTER PRINTER HYS 2 ENTER gt Hys Limit 50 50 4
370. the status indicator see the figure on page 3 29 lights Note Before turning the power on check that each unit is properly mounted and the power cord is correctly connected If the status indicator does not go on when the power switch is turned on turn off the power and check the following s the power cord properly connected s the supply voltage within the range noted on the previous page If the problem still cannot be fixed there may be an equipment problem please contact Yokogawa Engineering Service Corporation contact details on rear cover for repair If the status lamp flashes it means that there is an internal error Turn off the power switch and check the same items as for the DR242 If the problem still cannot be fixed there may be an equipment problem please contact your nearest sales representative Addresses may be found on the back cover of the manual If the power of a subunit is turned on and off with multiple subunits connected subunits connected subsequently to the end from the subunit whose power is turned off will not be recognized temporarily The device takes about 30 minutes to warm up IM DR232 01E 3 33 pue uoneyyeisu 3 10 Setting the Date and Time Relevant Keys merces DS RECORD ESG SET CLOCK zm GO INS DEL QO ser enter
371. tion of the report function the DR recorder starts printing automatically at the same time it finishes making a report You can also print reports by pressing the FUNC key opening the FUNC menu and then selecting the REP RECALL START menu item In that case take note of the following Youcan print the latest report only irrespective of whether it is an hourly daily or monthly report Neither daily nor monthly reports are printed if you print immediately after an hourly report was created Care must be taken when the REPORT PRINT menu item is set to automatic printing If the time for automatic printing arrives while printing is enabled from the FUNC menu the DR recorder will no longer print reports automatically Even if you have configured the DR recorder so it prints a daily report in the enhanced format it prints the report in the standard format if it has been more than an hour since the report was created Even if you have configured the DR recorder so it prints a monthly report in the enhanced format it prints the report in the standard format if it has been more than a day since the report was created To stop printing press the FUNC key and select REP PRINT STOP from the FUNC menu The following are examples of how a daily report prints Standard format Time to make report Starting time DAILY REPORT Jan 03 97 00 00 START Jan 01 97 00 00 RCH CH TAG MODE UNIT Jan 03 00 00 MIN TOTAL MAX R01 TAG 001CH AVE V 21 000
372. tion signal Calculated values of NMRR Example of actual measurement of NMRR 100ms 100ms 5 10 20 50 100 200 5 10 20 750 300 200 Frequency Hz Frequency Hz Noise Filter This instrument is equipped with a low pass filter cutoff frequency of 10Hz for both 50 60 Hz 50Hz 60Hz which functions as a way of noise rejection Also exponential averaging functions as a noise filter Applications Practical Measures Reducing noise itself The basics of this practical measures dictates using the instrument in conditions where noise is suppressed as much as possible for power lines an increase of impedance Separate the power lines for noise source equipment inverter thyristor etc from those for the measuring instrument IM DR232 01E 3 39 pue uoneyyeisu 3 11 Countering Noise for input lines an increase of impedance Always separate the input line from the noise source lines power and alarm lines Step 1 Install a separator Separator Signal NS lines lines 0000 Special class 3 ground 100 or less Step 2 Keep the signal cables at least 15cm above the power lines using a bracket If the power lines are not shielded the operating voltage is 220V or less and the operating current is 10A or more the distance between the signal cables and power cords must be 60cm or more N Signal lines Step 3
373. tire header Characters and numerals can be selected from the menu The default setting is all spaces Entering a Title One title can be set using up to 32 characters Characters and numerals can be selected from the menu The default setting is all spaces Inserting Deleting a Character or Numeral Press the PRINT DEL key to delete a set character or numeral The digit at the location of the cursor will be deleted Press the FUNC INS key to insert a character or numeral The digit at the location of the cursor will become a space while all the characters numeral at the right side of the cursor will move one digit to the right IM DR232 01E 6 15 suonipuoo bumoes 6 8 Setting Match Time Moving Average Interpolation and Groups Relevant Keys ESC Func emer 7 SET2MATCH TIME Func gt Feeo INS DEL Select Setting Parameter CHART MATCH TIME MOVE AVE INTERPOL GROUPT cai 205 010 CO ser 2 1 Press the SET key for three seconds to enter the SET3 menu 2 Select set using the GS keys 3 To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept 4 New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting
374. ts when the current printing ends Manual printing is in progress List printing or setup list printing is in progress Header printing is in progress Logging printing is in progress The DR recorder does not print reports either even if the preset time to make a report arrives while printing is enabled from the FUNC menu IM DR232 01E 10 31 dN 135 sbumes oiseg 10 12 Working with the Report Function Starting Stopping Report Making Report making can be started or stopped in two ways Press the FUNC key and select REPORT START or REPORT STOP from the FUNC menu Use the event action functions to define the start stop of making a report for the following events Edge action You can define every event as an edge action to start stop report making Level action You can use remote alarm relay and end of chart signals as events to start stop report making Report making starts at the same time that any of these events occur Report making stops when the event clears Note If you start report making all reports created up to that point are reset When report making is in progress you cannot make changes to measurement channels measuring ranges or dates and times nor can you copy information on the ranges f any computed data are included in your report making let computing start first and then get report making started If you fail to enable computing the data in your reports will become meaningless b
375. ue 4 uonoyaue 3 9 5 Fail Chart End Output and Remote Control Signal Input Function See Section 2 6 Other Functions on page 2 17 Connections and Notice See Section 3 7 Connecting the Signal Lines on page 3 20 IM DR232 01E 9 18 9 6 Summer Winter Time Relevant Keys RECORD ESC SET DST GO C vs INS DEL gt Select Setting Parameter CHART SYSTEM UNIT TREND TIMER LOGIC DST COPY Corepa set enter 2 Operating Procedure Press the SET key to enter the SET menu Select set using the e keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Main menu sET L av Lower menu DST ENTER SET TIME SUMMER ENTER SUMMER WINTER 4 SUMMER 96 05 01 00 ENTER gt Set Data amp Time YY MM DD HH 00 00 4 GET OK ESC gt Using this funcion the DR will autonatically change its date and time to the summer time or winter time when appropriate If you specify SUMMER the time will be ajusted to one hour later when the specified date and time is reached If you specify WINTER the time will be ajusted to one hour earlier when
376. up of information that has been set Fluorescent lamp B9628ZN 3 4 Internal assembly lighting 30 000 hours Printer head B9233HZ 3 1 5 x 10 dots depend on the set conditions Carriage B9233GA 5 Depends on the set conditions eoueuejure y pue DR232 01E 13 1 13 2 Replacing the Fuse The fuse must be of the specified rating current voltage type to prevent a fire hazard Be sure to turn off the power switch and to unplug the power cord before replacing the fuse Never short circuit the fuse holder Fuse Rating The fuse must have the following specifications Maximum rated voltage 250 V Maximum rated current 2 5 Type time lag Standard IEC VDE certified Part number A1350EF Replacement procedure To replace the fuse proceed as follows DR232 1 Turn off the power switch 2 Unplug the power cord from the power outlet 3 Remove the fuse holder at the side of the power connector on the rear panel 4 Remove the blown fuse from the holder 5 Insert a new fuse into the holder and then install the holder in place DR242 Turn off the power switch 2 Disconnect the power connections 3 Open the front and display doors to gain access to the fuse holder Use a standard screwdriver to turn the fuse holder screw counterclockwise Then remove the fuse holder 4 Remove the blown fuse from the holder 5 Insert a new fuse into the holder and then instal
377. upling impedance of common mode voltage Ecm These are called the decrease and increase of impedance as basics of anti noise measures In the above discussions anti noise measures have been described on the assumption that common mode noise has already been given In real applications common mode noise often occurs owing to grounding resistance as shown in the figure below H Signal source The instrument One point grounding 7 7 7 7 c4 Grounding resistance and Ecy Ground current In such a case perform one point grounding as indicated by the dotted line as an extreme example of decreasing impedance to equalize the potentials of the signal source and the instrument Rejecting common mode noise in this way is the basics of anti noise measures Anti Noise Measures in the Instrument Itself Pulse width modulation type A D converter PWM type A D This instrument uses a feedback pulse width modulation type A D converter and has the following features Linearity and stability are good because of the feedback effect Integration type A D converter ensures excellent noise suppression If the integration time is equal to the noise period the positive and negative sides of the shaded part in the figure below cancel each other out and thus the average value becomes zero 3 38 IM DR232 01E 3 11 Countering Noise Anti Noise Measures Balance each other Input v
378. uration mode A mode in which the IP address subnet mask and default gateway are set for the DR Test mode A mode in which the condition of the physical connection is tested Communication mode A mode in which the DR is connected to the network to carry out communication Use this mode to read in the DR measurement data with the PC In addition you can turn ON OFF the Keepalive function Mode Setting Mode Switch 1 Switch 2 Configuration mode ON OFF Test mode OFF ON Communication mode OFF OFF Default Setting Do not set both dip switches 1 and 2 to ON Keepalive Setting Keepalive Switch 3 Enable ON Disable OFF Default Setting Keepalive is a function supported by TCP It sends packets at constant time intervals and automatically disconnects when there is no corresponding response This instrument sends packets at 30 second time intervals If a response is not received it sends 4 more packets at one second intervals If a response is still not received the connection is dropped Have dip switch 4 turned OFF IM DR232 01E 3 6 Connecting the Extension Cables Extension Cables Any of the following extension cables can be used for connections between the DA100 main unit and subunits or for connections between subunits Name Model Description Extension cable DV200 000 Length 0 5m Extension cable DV200 001 Length 1m Extension cable DV200 002 Length 2m Extension cable
379. uring the Pulse Input Channel esee 5 13 Setting the Recording Conditions 6 1 Setting the Recording Mode Engineering Unit Recording Channel and Recording Interval 6 1 62 Setting the Chart Speed o5 eed pr eie Dn a Sa ee e a e e ERES 6 4 6 3 Setting Recording Zones and Partially Expanded Recording eee 6 6 6 4 Setting Tag Digital Printout and Manual Printout esee 6 8 6 5 Setting the Alarm PEntOlt dO Ee ee ee piece ve 6 10 6 6 Setting Scale Printout List Printout and List Format eese 6 12 6 7 Entering Messages Headers and nennen 6 14 6 8 Setting Match Time Moving Average Interpolation and Groups eee 6 16 Executing Recording 7 1 Starting Dot Printing Digital Printing and Printing in Logging Mode see 7 1 7 2 Starting Manual Printing List Printing and Header Printing esee 7 2 4 9 xStar ng Message Printing sete terea eU a des eed Ur Pe e erem Reged 7 3 TA Printing Setup Lists eine ener Mee re het ee fee oe ete sie rs 7 4 Setting Displaying and Recording Alarms 8 1 Setting Alarms and Relays including internal switches eee 8 1 82 Alarm Display and Prihtng ett Uer OE tr ICI RE REGE Ye 8 4 Event Action Function and Other Functions 9 15 Setting Event Action Funct O
380. ursor from the starting to the ending channel number the ending channel number becomes the same as the last two digits of the starting channel number Setting the Recording Span SPAN Set the left and right spans within the limits of the input range In the SPAN menu item the left hand value is the left span and the right hand value the right span Note If you have connected any new strain gauge or changed the measuring range initialization of settings or reconfiguration of the system also changes the measuring range back to its default you must go through initial balancing See Section 5 5 Performing Initial Balancing Initialization on a Strain Input Channel for more information IM DR232 01E 5 11 seoulq ueds 1 Indul ayy funes 5 5 Performing Initial Balancing lnitialization on a Strain Input Channel melee WEBS em INIT BALANCE mim Fue Print CGD Fee INS gt Select Function item CHART CA ser 2 Operating Procedure Press the FUNC key to enter the FUNC menu Using y and select and or enter a value for each of the shaded fields shown below To exit any of the following menu items during the procedure press the MODE ESC key This returns to the first item of the menu Note however that your new settings and selections are canc
381. using the DISP key 2 Select SER using the MODE key Sub display 1 005 0 2108V 006 0 0951V wSER ALARM SEARCH Display for the Main Display Only the channels in which an alarm occurred will be displayed When an alarm occurs in several channels the channels will be displayed consecutively Channel No Difference between Channels delta Alarms Measurement Values and Engineering Units Same as for the AUTO display refer to page 4 2 Others When the input types of all channels set to SKIP or no alarms occur NO ALARM will be displayed ALARM SEARCH Display for the Sub display 1 and 2 Only the channels in which an alarm occurred will be displayed Two channels will be displayed on each sub display Channel No Difference between Channels delta Alarms Measurement Values Engineering Units and Selected Display Mode Same as for the AUTO display refer to page 4 3 IM DR232 01E 4 7 ejdsig epo 101u0Jy Dunes 4 4 Using the ALARM SEARCH Display Points to Note when Using the ALARM SEARCH Display When all three displays are set to ALARM SEARCH display the main display will start displaying data of the channel with the smallest channel number on sub display 1 data of the next two channels will be displayed while on sub display 2 data of the next two channels will be displayed When the data are updated the display will be replaced with data of the next cons
382. ut Type Measurement Range TC R 32to 3200 F Note that accuracy S 32to 3200 F of reference junction B 32 to 3308 F compensation is not K 328 to 2498 F considered E 328 0 to 1472 0 F J 328 0 to 2012 0 F T 1 328 0 to 752 0 F L 2 328 0 to 1652 0 F U 2 328 0 to 752 0 F N 3 32 to 2372 F W 32 to 4199 F KPvsAu7Fe 0 0 to 300 0K RTD Pt100 1mA s 328 0 to 1112 0 F Pt100 2mA s 328 0 to 482 0 F JPtO0 1lmA 55 328 0 to 1022 0 F 1 100 2 5 328 0 to 482 0 F Pt50 2mA s 328 0 to 1022 0 F Nil00 1mA 6 328 0 to 482 0 F SAMA NilO0 1mA DIN 6 76 0 to 356 0 F Nil20 1mA 7 94 0 to 392 0 F J263 B 0 0 to 300 0K Cul0 GE g 328 0 to 572 0 F Cul0 L amp N g Cul0 WEED g Cul0 BAILEY s High resolution RTD Pt100 1mA s 220 0 to 302 0 F Pt100 2mA s 94 0 to 158 0 F JPt100 1mA s 220 0 to 302 0 F JPt100 2mA s 94 0to 158 0 F R S B E J T ANSI IEC 584 DIN IEC 584 JIS C 1602 1981 2 L Fe CuNi DIN43710 U Cu CuNi DIN 43710 3 N Nicrosil Nisil IEC 584 DIN IEC 584 4 W 5 RE W 26 Re Hoskins Mfg Co 5 Pt50 JIS C 1604 1981 JIS C 1606 1986 Pt100 JIS C 1604 1989 JIS C 1606 1989 IEC 751 DIN IEC 751 JPt100 JIS C 1604 1981 JIS C 1606 1989 6 SAMA DIN 7 McGRAW EDISON COMPANY 8 Ranges to which accuracy appli
383. ut wiring etc Electrostatic induction noise leaks through capacitances between wires and instruments Electromagnetic induction loop in the input line etc induces an AC voltage by detecting the AC magnetic field In real applications the above three propagation paths are not independent of each other Their combination propagates noise to the equipment and causes problems Examples of noise propagated through each of these paths are given below Conduction inverter noise relay noise thyristor noise and noise caused by surface temperature measurement of a power transistor etc Electrostatic induction commercial power supply noise such as the hum of audio equipment relay noise etc Electromagnetic induction magnetic leakage flux from a power transformer or motor magnetic field from a high frequency induction furnace the rotating magnetic field of a power generator 100 etc The figure on the next page shows the propagation paths using practical examples 3 36 IM DR232 01E 3 11 Countering Noise Example of a high frequency x _ induction furnace Due to electromagnetic induction current i flows through the conductor creating joule heat which heats the furnace Jzi r Furnace Inverter power supply 20 to 3500kW Power supply 0 2k to 10kHz Electro magnetic induction noise ee Electrostatic induction noise inside
384. utation channels A01 to A60 OFF List printout will not be printed ON Setting information per channel will be printed Setting the List Format LIST FMT This setting specifies which setting information will be printed out in case of list printouts Each of the following lists can be selected ON or OFF and the default setting is ON LIST RANGE information about the setting range Information about settings related to tags type of input recording span linear scaling and computation equation LIST ALARM information about the alarm settings Alarm settings LIST PRINT information about the printing settings Information about settings related to analog trend recording digital printout interpolation recording zones partial expanded recording recording interval of digital printouts for logging mode and analog mode moving average scaled values alarm printout manual printout and data saving ON OFF LIST OTHER information about other settings Information about settings related to match time groups headers messages event action function list format and computation constant Information which always be included in a list printout regardless of the above settings are title measurement interval recording interval trend chart speeds 1 and 2 recording mode and time IM DR232 01E 6 13 suonipuoo 6 7 Entering Messages Headers and Title Relevant Keys
385. valid channel in character string for group Set channel correctly setting 083 Partial compaction set to a channel where Change ranges SKIP was set 084 Partial compaction set to a channel in Change ranges which ranges cannot be partially compacted 085 Partial compaction out of range a channel Set correct partial compaction range with continuous ranges 086 The left and right zones have the same values Change zone set values 087 The left zone is wider than the right zone Change zone set values 088 The left and right zones are less than 5 mm Change zone set values apart wide 089 Copy channel setting error Sets the correct channel 090 Attempted to copy a message with the same Change copy source or destination source and destination number 091 Illegal protocol for logic setting Set correct protocol 100 No equation option Not possible to make any computation settings 101 Invalid code in the equation Set the equation correctly 102 Incorrect number of in the equation Set the correct number of 103 Syntax error Set the equation correctly 13 4 IM DR232 01E 13 4 Error Codes 04 Illegal character s or code s is used before or after an operator Set the equation correctly allowed to be made during saving or reading of measured data 24 Too many files in the media 25 Attempted to read data which was saved by another instrument model 05 The right and left spans are the same Chang
386. ving average Press the SET key for about three seconds SET MOVE AVE Section 6 8 Measurement cycle A D integration time Filter Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key SET UP Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key SET UP A D INTG SCAN INTVL Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key SET UP FILTER Section 10 1 Section 10 3 Section 10 3 Make sure that the total number of setting changes including calibrations and restructuring does not surpass 100000 2 Procedure varies according to the menu configuration of the SET key see section 10 9 Parameters Procedure Selecting menu Reference Chart speed 1 CHART key CHART Section 6 2 Chart speed 2 Press the SET key for about three seconds SET CHART2 Section 6 2 Procedure varies according to the menu configuration of the SET key see section 10 9 Parameters Procedure Selecting menu Reference Logging Analog trend SET key SET SYSTEM Section 6 1 switch dot printing cycle Recording channel SET key SET TREND Section 6 1 Recording zone Press the SET key for about three SET ZONE Section 6 3 Partial compression Press the SET key for about three SET PERTIAL Section 6 3 Tag Press the SET key for about three seconds SET TAG Section 6 4 Channel to digital print Press the SET key for about three seconds SET DIGITAL PR Section 6 4 number of rows to print Channel to manual print Press the SET key for about three secon
387. y 11 4 Reading Set up Data Reading set up data for the SET mode Relevant Keys C RECORD SET MEMO RY um Func C gt Feen INS DEL Select Setting Parameter CHART MM SYSTEM UNIT MATH CONST MEMORY FLOPPY TR eos CO charr set enter 2 Operating Procedure Press the SET key to enter the SET menu Select set using the CS keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Main menu SET aes MEMORY ENTER MEMORY LOAD ENTER CH SET WRITE READ SAVE LOAD COPY DELETE INFO INIT 4 LOAD MODE DIRECT ENTER DIRECT TRIG_1 TRIG 2 TRIG 3 4 CK LOAD FILE AAA ENTER AAA BBB CCC 4 Loading 4 Operation status displayed FLOPPY ENTER FLOPPY LOAD ENTER Main menu SAVE LOAD DELETE INFO FORMAT 4 SET LOAD MODE DIRECT ENTER DIRECT TRIG 1 TRIG 2 TRIG 3 C O 4 MEM ORY LOAD FILE AAA ENTER AAA BBB CCC H Loading 4 Operation status displayed 11 12 IM DR232 01E 11 4 Reading Set up Data Reading set up data for the SETUP mode Grp ESSE SETUP FLOPPY em se
388. y number The first character is a unit number For the second and third characters a number from 01 to 60 can be set but the effective setting range is as shown in the following examples Check which what slot the alarm module or the DI DO module is mounted in using the model number of mounted modules and their mounted positions Slot numbers are set in the order of slot 0 slot 1 facing the front Ex 1 When the alarm module is mounted in slot 3 31 to 40 Ex 2 The DI DO module is mounted in slot4 41 to 42 End relay number The same settings of the second or third characters in the first relay number The default setting is 001 01 Selection of energizing deenergizing ENERG energizing DE EN deenergizing The default setting is ENERG Setting Relay Hold HOLD This is a menu which canot be displayed unless the alarm module or the DI DO module is mounted and recognized as the system of this instrument However the internal switches are set simultaneously with relays OFF No relays internal switches hold ON all relays internal switches hold The default setting is OFF Note n order to make the set or selected contents effective the contents must be registered For details see page 10 24 To return from the SET UP menu to the operation display mode select END in the main menu For details see page 10 24 IM DR232 01E 10 11 L3S sbumes oiseg 10 5 Setting Burn out Refere
389. y reports As an example the following illustrates the process of summation and cumulative summation for hourly reports The example shows the case where the preset time to make a report is 8 00 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 Cumulative summation gt 7 2 1 I n 27 1 2 Summation 1 1 Results of beber le computing 8 00 9 00 10 00 11 00 7 00 8 00 9 00 10 00 A A AU A EA Time A Time to make an hourly report A Preset time to make report Unit of Summation SUM UNIT Such input data items as the flowrate that have a unit in sec min hour or day when simply summed give results of computing different from their actual values This occurs because the unit of such a data item differs from that of the measurement interval In that case you can take the output after having converted the unit of summation so it matches that of the input data item applied Unit of Input Preset Unit Conversion Formula INTVL no conversion Y measured data values sec measured data values x measurement interval min measured data values x measurement interval 60 hour Y measured data values x measurement interval 3600 day Y measured data values x measurement interval 86400 10 30 IM DR232 01E 10 12 Working with the Report Function Printing Reports on a Recording Chart You can print created reports on a recording chart If you set the REPORT PRINT menu item to on during the configura
390. y returns to MAN PR START Starting the list print LIST START Press the ENTER key to start list printing For details on setting the time for temporarily stopping printing see the previous page After list printing starts the operation display mode appears During list printing the menu displays LIST STOP During list printing if the PRINT menu is displayed to select the LIST STOP and the ENTER key is then pressed the list printing stops After list printing terminates or stops the display returns to LIST START Starting the header print HEADER START To start the header print press the ENTER key After header printing starts the operation display mode appears During header printing the HEADER STOP menu appears During header printing if the PRINT menu is displayed to select the HEADER STOP and the ENTER key is then pressed the header printing stops After header printing terminates or stops the display returns to HEADER START Notes on starting the above menus If the above menus are executed analog trend recording will stop After returning from the menus analog trend recording resumes While the above menus are being executed if any other menu is selected the previous menu is first executed and the later menu is then executed See Chapter 6 for details on setting the above menus IM DR232 01E 7 3 Starting Message Printing Relevant Keys

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

PERSPECTIVES DOCUMENTAIRES EN EDUCATION  AXIS 2120 User`s Manual  Mode d`emploi de la bourse aux VETEMENTS et jouets    Woxter 85 IPS Dual User Guide  ダウンロード - プラネックスコミュニケーションズ    Lettre du quartier Carnot-Gambetta N° 4 (pdf - 1,83 Mo)    

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file